Preface
Contents
Overview
Machine Features
Color and Image Quality Functions
- Basic Color Modes
- Adjusting Image Quality and Color
Guides Provided with the Machine
About the Operation Guide (this Guide)
- Structure of the guide
- Conventions Used in This Guide
Menu Map
1 Legal and Safety Information
- Notice
2 Installing and Setting up the Machine
3 Preparation before Use
4 Printing from PC
5 Operation on the Machine
6 Using Various Functions
- Functions Available on the Machine
- Functions
7 Status/Job Cancel
8 Setup and Registration (System Menu)
- System Menu
9 User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting)
10 Troubleshooting
11 Appendix

KYOCERA M2635dn User Manual

Displayed below is the user manual for M2635dn by KYOCERA which is a product in the Multifunctionals category. This manual has pages.

Related Manuals

KYOCERA M2635dn/KL3 Manual

KYOCERA P7040cdn Manual

KYOCERA TASKalfa 306ci Manual

KYOCERA TASKalfa 2552ci MFP A3 Colour Manual

KYOCERA TASKALFA 6052CI MFP LAS COL A3 Manual

KYOCERA TASKALFA 3252CI MFP LAS COL A3 Manual

OPERATION GUIDE

PRINT COPY SCAN

PRINT COPY SCAN FAX

> Preface

Preface

Thank you for purchasing this machine.

This Operation Guide is intended to help you operate the machine correctly, perform routine maintenance, and take

simple troubleshooting measures as needed so that the machine can always be used in the optimum condition.

Please read this Operation Guide before using the machine.

To maintain quality, we recommend using genuine Kyocera toner containers, which must

pass numerous quality inspections.

The use of non-genuine toner containers may cause failure.

We will not be liable for any damages caused by the use of third party supplies in this machine.

A label is affixed to our genuine supplies, as shown below.

Checking the Equipment's Serial Number

The equipment's serial number is printed in the location shown in the figure.

You'll need the equipment's serial number when contacting your Service Representative. Please check the number

before contacting your Service Representative.

Contents

Preface ..................................................................................................................................... i

Contents.................................................................................................................................. ii

Overview ................................................................................................................................ ix

Machine Features ................................................................................................................... x

Color and Image Quality Functions................................................................................... xiv

Basic Color Modes ...................................................................................................... xiv

Adjusting Image Quality and Color............................................................................... xv

Guides Provided with the Machine.................................................................................... xvi

About the Operation Guide (this Guide) ......................................................................... xviii

Structure of the guide................................................................................................. xviii

Conventions Used in This Guide................................................................................. xix

Menu Map............................................................................................................................. xxi

1 Legal and Safety Information ................................................................ 1-1

Notice ................................................................................................................................. 1-2

Safety Conventions in This Guide ............................................................................. 1-2

Environment .............................................................................................................. 1-3

Precautions for Use ................................................................................................... 1-4

Laser Safety (Europe) ............................................................................................... 1-5

SAFETY OF LASER BEAM (USA) ........................................................................... 1-6

Safety Instructions Regarding the Disconnection of Power ...................................... 1-7

Compliance and Conformity ...................................................................................... 1-7

Other precautions (for users in California, the United States) ................................... 1-7

Warranty (the United States and Canada) ................................................................ 1-8

Legal Restriction on Copying/Scanning .................................................................... 1-9

EN ISO 7779 ............................................................................................................. 1-9

EK1-ITB 2000 ............................................................................................................ 1-9

Wireless Connection (Mexico only) ........................................................................... 1-9

Security Precautions when Using Wireless LAN (If equipped) ................................. 1-9

Limited Use of This Product (If equipped) ............................................................... 1-10

Legal Information .................................................................................................... 1-11

Energy Saving Control Function ............................................................................. 1-17

Automatic 2-Sided Print Function ............................................................................ 1-17

Resource Saving - Paper ........................................................................................ 1-17

Environmental benefits of "Power Management" .................................................... 1-17

Energy Star (ENERGY STAR®) Program ............................................................... 1-17

2 Installing and Setting up the Machine .................................................. 2-1

Part Names (Machine Exterior) ........................................................................................ 2-2

Part Names (Connectors/Interior) .................................................................................... 2-4

Part Names (With Optional Equipments Attached) ........................................................ 2-6

Connecting the Machine and Other Devices .................................................................. 2-7

Connecting Cables ............................................................................................................ 2-8

Connecting LAN Cable .............................................................................................. 2-8

Connecting USB Cable ............................................................................................. 2-9

Connecting the Power Cable .................................................................................... 2-9

Power On/Off ................................................................................................................... 2-10

Power On ................................................................................................................ 2-10

Power Off ................................................................................................................ 2-10

Using the Operation Panel ............................................................................................. 2-11

Operation Panel Keys ............................................................................................. 2-11

Operation Method ................................................................................................... 2-13

Check the original and paper settings ..................................................................... 2-14

Help Screen ............................................................................................................ 2-14

Login/Logout ................................................................................................................... 2-15

Login ....................................................................................................................... 2-15

iii

Logout ..................................................................................................................... 2-16

Default Settings of the Machine ..................................................................................... 2-17

Setting Date and Time ............................................................................................ 2-17

Network Setup ................................................................................................................. 2-18

Configuring the Wired Network ............................................................................... 2-18

Configuring the Wireless Network ........................................................................... 2-20

Setting Wi-Fi Direct ................................................................................................. 2-24

Energy Saver function .................................................................................................... 2-26

Sleep ....................................................................................................................... 2-26

Auto Sleep ............................................................................................................... 2-27

Sleep Rules (models for Europe) ............................................................................ 2-27

Sleep Level (Energy Saver and Quick Recovery) (models except for Europe) ...... 2-28

Power Off Rule (models for Europe) ....................................................................... 2-28

Quiet Mode ....................................................................................................................... 2-29

Installing Software .......................................................................................................... 2-30

Software on DVD (Windows) .................................................................................. 2-30

Installing Software in Windows ............................................................................... 2-31

Uninstalling the Software ........................................................................................ 2-37

Installing Software in Mac Computer ...................................................................... 2-38

Setting TWAIN Driver .............................................................................................. 2-40

Setting WIA Driver ................................................................................................... 2-42

Checking the Counter ..................................................................................................... 2-43

Additional Preparations for the Administrator ............................................................. 2-44

Sending Documents to a PC ................................................................................... 2-44

Strengthening the Security ...................................................................................... 2-44

Command Center RX ...................................................................................................... 2-45

Accessing Command Center RX ............................................................................ 2-46

Changing Security Settings ..................................................................................... 2-47

Changing Device Information .................................................................................. 2-49

E-mail Settings ........................................................................................................ 2-51

Registering Destinations ......................................................................................... 2-55

Transferring Data from Our Other Products ................................................................. 2-56

Migrating the Address Book .................................................................................... 2-56

3 Preparation before Use .......................................................................... 3-1

Loading Paper ................................................................................................................... 3-2

Precaution for Loading Paper ................................................................................... 3-2

Selecting the Paper Feeder Units ............................................................................. 3-3

Loading in the Cassette ............................................................................................ 3-4

Precautions for Outputting Paper .................................................................................... 3-7

Paper Stopper ........................................................................................................... 3-7

Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC ................................ 3-8

Making a note of the computer name and full computer name ................................. 3-8

Making a note of the user name and domain name .................................................. 3-9

Creating a Shared Folder, Making a Note of a Shared Folder ................................ 3-10

Configuring Windows Firewall ................................................................................. 3-13

Registering Destinations in the Address Book ............................................................ 3-18

Adding a Destination (Address Book) ..................................................................... 3-18

Adding a Destination on One Touch Key (One Touch Key) .................................... 3-25

4 Printing from PC ..................................................................................... 4-1

Printer Driver Properties Screen ...................................................................................... 4-2

Displaying the Printer Driver Help ............................................................................. 4-3

Changing the Default Printer Driver Settings (Windows 8.1) .................................... 4-3

Printing from PC ................................................................................................................ 4-4

Printing on Standard Sized Paper ............................................................................. 4-4

Printing on Non-standard Sized Paper ...................................................................... 4-6

Canceling Printing from a Computer ......................................................................... 4-8

Printing from the Handheld Device ................................................................................. 4-9

Printing by AirPrint .................................................................................................... 4-9

Printing by Google Cloud Print .................................................................................. 4-9

Printing by Mopria ..................................................................................................... 4-9

Printing with Wi-Fi Direct ........................................................................................... 4-9

Printing Data Saved in the Printer ................................................................................. 4-10

Specifying the Job Box from a Computer and Storing the Job ............................... 4-10

Printing Documents from Private Print Box ............................................................. 4-11

Deleting the Documents Stored in the Private Print Box ......................................... 4-11

Printing Document from Stored Job Box ................................................................. 4-12

Deleting the Documents Stored in the Stored Job Box ........................................... 4-13

Printing Document from Quick Copy Box ................................................................ 4-14

Deleting the Documents Stored in the Quick Copy Box .......................................... 4-14

Printing Document from Proof and Hold Box .......................................................... 4-15

Deleting the Documents Stored in the Proof and Hold Box .................................... 4-16

Monitoring the Printer Status (Status Monitor) ............................................................ 4-17

Accessing the Status Monitor .................................................................................. 4-17

Exiting the Status Monitor ....................................................................................... 4-17

Quick View State ..................................................................................................... 4-17

Printing Progress Tab ............................................................................................. 4-18

Paper Tray Status Tab ............................................................................................ 4-18

Toner Status Tab .................................................................................................... 4-18

Alert Tab .................................................................................................................. 4-19

Status Monitor Context Menu .................................................................................. 4-19

Status Monitor Notification Settings ........................................................................ 4-20

Configuration Tool .......................................................................................................... 4-21

Accessing the Configuration Tool ........................................................................... 4-21

Exiting the Configuration Tool ................................................................................. 4-22

Configuration Tool Settings Screen ........................................................................ 4-23

5 Operation on the Machine ..................................................................... 5-1

Loading Originals .............................................................................................................. 5-2

Placing Originals on the Platen ................................................................................. 5-2

Loading Originals in the Document Processor .......................................................... 5-3

Loading Paper in the Multipurpose Tray ......................................................................... 5-5

Program .............................................................................................................................. 5-8

Registering Programs ............................................................................................... 5-8

Recalling Program ..................................................................................................... 5-9

Overwriting Program ............................................................................................... 5-10

Deleting Program .................................................................................................... 5-10

Select Key Settings ......................................................................................................... 5-11

Copying ............................................................................................................................ 5-12

Basic Operation ....................................................................................................... 5-12

Canceling Jobs ........................................................................................................ 5-13

Frequently-Used Sending Method ................................................................................. 5-14

Sending Document via E-mail ........................................................................................ 5-15

Configuring Settings before Sending ...................................................................... 5-15

Sending Scanned Document via E-mail .................................................................. 5-15

Sending Document to Desired Shared Folder on a Computer (Scan to PC) ............. 5-16

Configuring Settings before Sending ...................................................................... 5-16

Sending Document to Desired Shared Folder on a Computer ................................ 5-16

Sending Document to Folder on an FTP Server (Scan to FTP) ................................... 5-18

Configuring Settings before Sending ...................................................................... 5-18

Sending Document to Folder on an FTP Server ..................................................... 5-18

Scanning using TWAIN or WIA ...................................................................................... 5-20

Configuring Settings before Sending ...................................................................... 5-20

Scanning Document Using Application ................................................................... 5-20

Useful Sending Method .................................................................................................. 5-21

WSD Scan ........................................................................................................................ 5-22

Installing Driver Software ........................................................................................ 5-22

WSD scan ............................................................................................................... 5-23

Using fax server to send a fax

(fax server transmission) ................................................................................................ 5-25

Configuring Settings before Sending ...................................................................... 5-25

Using fax server to send a fax ................................................................................. 5-25

Sending to Different Types of Destinations (Multi Sending) ....................................... 5-27

Send to Me (E-mail) ......................................................................................................... 5-28

Sending a document to the mail address of the logged in user .............................. 5-28

Canceling Sending Jobs ................................................................................................. 5-29

Handling Destination ...................................................................................................... 5-30

Specifying Destination ............................................................................................. 5-30

Choosing from the Address Book ........................................................................... 5-30

Choosing from the External Address Book ............................................................. 5-31

Choosing from the One Touch Key ......................................................................... 5-32

Checking and Editing Destinations ......................................................................... 5-33

Confirmation Screen of Destinations ....................................................................... 5-34

Recall ...................................................................................................................... 5-34

How to use the FAX Function ........................................................................................ 5-35

Using Document Boxes .................................................................................................. 5-36

What is Job Box? .................................................................................................... 5-36

What is Removable Memory Box? .......................................................................... 5-36

What is Sub Address Box/Polling Box? .................................................................. 5-36

Operating using Removable USB Memory ................................................................... 5-37

Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Memory ........................................ 5-37

Saving Documents to USB Memory (Scan to USB) ................................................ 5-39

Check the USB Memory Information ....................................................................... 5-40

Removing USB Memory .......................................................................................... 5-40

6 Using Various Functions ....................................................................... 6-1

Functions Available on the Machine ............................................................................... 6-2

About Functions Available on the Machine ............................................................... 6-2

How to Select Functions ........................................................................................... 6-2

Copy .......................................................................................................................... 6-3

Send .......................................................................................................................... 6-4

Removable Memory (Store File, Printing Documents) .............................................. 6-5

Functions ........................................................................................................................... 6-7

Paper Selection ......................................................................................................... 6-8

Collate ....................................................................................................................... 6-9

Duplex ....................................................................................................................... 6-9

Zoom ....................................................................................................................... 6-12

Combine .................................................................................................................. 6-14

Original Size ............................................................................................................ 6-16

Original Orientation ................................................................................................. 6-16

Mixed Size Originals ............................................................................................... 6-17

Original Image ......................................................................................................... 6-17

Density .................................................................................................................... 6-18

EcoPrint ................................................................................................................... 6-18

Continuous Scan ..................................................................................................... 6-18

File Name Entry ...................................................................................................... 6-19

Job Finish Notice ..................................................................................................... 6-19

Priority Override ...................................................................................................... 6-19

Color Selection ........................................................................................................ 6-20

Sharpness ............................................................................................................... 6-20

Contrast ................................................................................................................... 6-21

Background Density Adj. (Background Density Adjustment) .................................. 6-21

Skip Blank Page ...................................................................................................... 6-22

Scan Resolution ...................................................................................................... 6-22

Sending Size ........................................................................................................... 6-23

File Format .............................................................................................................. 6-24

Subject/Body ........................................................................................................... 6-28

Duplex (2-sided Original) ........................................................................................ 6-28

FTP Encrypted TX ................................................................................................... 6-29

File Separation ........................................................................................................ 6-29

Storing Size ............................................................................................................. 6-30

Encrypted PDF ........................................................................................................ 6-30

JPEG/TIFF Print ...................................................................................................... 6-31

XPS Fit to Page ....................................................................................................... 6-31

7 Status/Job Cancel .................................................................................. 7-1

Checking Job Status ......................................................................................................... 7-2

Details of the Status Screens .................................................................................... 7-4

Checking Job History ....................................................................................................... 7-8

Sending the Log History .......................................................................................... 7-12

Job Operation .................................................................................................................. 7-13

Pause and Resumption of Jobs .............................................................................. 7-13

Canceling of Jobs .................................................................................................... 7-13

Device/Communication ................................................................................................... 7-14

Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner and Paper (Paper/Supplies) ................... 7-15

8 Setup and Registration (System Menu) ............................................... 8-1

System Menu ..................................................................................................................... 8-2

Operation Method ..................................................................................................... 8-2

System Menu Settings .............................................................................................. 8-3

Report ....................................................................................................................... 8-5

System/Network ........................................................................................................ 8-7

User/Job Account .................................................................................................... 8-18

User Property .......................................................................................................... 8-18

Common Settings .................................................................................................... 8-19

Copy ........................................................................................................................ 8-32

Printer ...................................................................................................................... 8-33

Send ........................................................................................................................ 8-35

FAX ......................................................................................................................... 8-36

Document Box ......................................................................................................... 8-36

Edit Destination ....................................................................................................... 8-37

Adjust/Maint. ........................................................................................................... 8-38

9 User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) 9-1

Overview of User Login Administration .......................................................................... 9-2

Managing the Job Account from PC ......................................................................... 9-2

Enabling User Login Administration ............................................................................... 9-3

Setting User Login Administration .................................................................................. 9-5

Authentication Security ............................................................................................. 9-5

Adding a User (Local User List) ................................................................................ 9-6

Changing User Properties ......................................................................................... 9-8

User Login Administration for Printing ..................................................................... 9-11

Managing the Users to Scan Using TWAIN ............................................................ 9-12

Managing the Users to Scan Using WIA ................................................................. 9-13

Managing the Users that Send Faxes from a PC .................................................... 9-14

Group Authorization Settings .................................................................................. 9-15

Guest Authorization Set. ......................................................................................... 9-16

Obtain NW User Property ....................................................................................... 9-19

ID Card Settings ...................................................................................................... 9-20

PIN Login Settings .................................................................................................. 9-21

vii

Using User Login Administration .................................................................................. 9-22

Login/Logout ........................................................................................................... 9-22

Overview of Job Accounting .......................................................................................... 9-23

To Manage the Number of Sheets Used on Jobs Printed from a PC ..................... 9-23

Enabling Job Accounting ............................................................................................... 9-24

Job Accounting Access ........................................................................................... 9-25

Setting an Account .......................................................................................................... 9-26

Adding an Account .................................................................................................. 9-26

Restricting the Use of the Machine ......................................................................... 9-28

Editing an Account .................................................................................................. 9-29

Deleting an Account ................................................................................................ 9-30

Job Accounting for Printing ..................................................................................... 9-31

Job Accounting for Scan Using TWAIN .................................................................. 9-32

Job Accounting for Scan Using WIA ....................................................................... 9-33

Job Accounting for the FAX Transmitted from a Computer .................................... 9-34

Configuring Job Accounting .......................................................................................... 9-35

Default Setting ......................................................................................................... 9-35

Counting the Number of Pages Printed .................................................................. 9-36

Print Accounting Report .......................................................................................... 9-37

Using Job Accounting .................................................................................................... 9-38

Login/Logout ........................................................................................................... 9-38

Unknown User Settings .................................................................................................. 9-39

Unknown ID Job ...................................................................................................... 9-39

Registering Information for a User whose ID is Unknown ....................................... 9-40

10 Troubleshooting ................................................................................... 10-1

Regular Maintenance ...................................................................................................... 10-2

Cleaning .................................................................................................................. 10-2

Cleaning Glass Platen ............................................................................................. 10-2

Cleaning Slit Grass ................................................................................................. 10-3

Cleaning the inside of the Machine ......................................................................... 10-4

Toner Container Replacement ................................................................................ 10-7

Loading Paper ....................................................................................................... 10-10

Using the Maintenance Menu ....................................................................................... 10-11

Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................ 10-12

Solving Malfunctions ............................................................................................. 10-12

Machine Operation Trouble ................................................................................... 10-12

Printed Image Trouble ........................................................................................... 10-15

Responding to Messages ...................................................................................... 10-18

Clearing Paper Jams ..................................................................................................... 10-30

Jam Location Indicators ........................................................................................ 10-30

Remove any jammed paper in Cassette 1 ............................................................ 10-31

Remove any jammed paper in Cassette 2 ............................................................ 10-33

Remove any jammed paper in Cassette 3 ............................................................ 10-35

Remove any jammed paper in the Multipurpose Tray .......................................... 10-37

Remove any jammed paper inside of the Machine .............................................. 10-38

Remove any jammed paper in Rear Cover ........................................................... 10-42

Remove any jammed paper in the Document Processor ...................................... 10-46

11 Appendix ............................................................................................... 11-1

Optional Equipment ........................................................................................................ 11-2

Overview of Optional Equipment ............................................................................. 11-2

Optional Applications .............................................................................................. 11-6

Starting Application Use .......................................................................................... 11-6

Checking Details of Application ............................................................................... 11-7

Character Entry Method .................................................................................................. 11-8

Using the Keys ........................................................................................................ 11-8

Selecting Type of Characters .................................................................................. 11-9

viii

Characters That Can be Entered Using the Numeric Keys ..................................... 11-9

Entering Symbols .................................................................................................. 11-10

Entering Characters .............................................................................................. 11-10

Entering Using the Character Selection Screen .................................................... 11-12

Paper .............................................................................................................................. 11-13

Basic Paper Specifications .................................................................................... 11-13

Choosing the Appropriate Paper ........................................................................... 11-14

Special Paper ........................................................................................................ 11-17

Specifications ................................................................................................................ 11-21

Machine ................................................................................................................. 11-21

Copy Functions ..................................................................................................... 11-22

Printer Functions ................................................................................................... 11-23

Scanner Functions ................................................................................................ 11-23

Document Processor ............................................................................................. 11-24

Paper Feeder ........................................................................................................ 11-24

Glossary ......................................................................................................................... 11-25

Index ........................................................................................................... 2-1

> Overview

Overview

NOTE

• Before using the machine, be sure to read the following:

Legal and Safety Information (page 1-1)

• To prepare the device for use, including setting up cable connections and installing software.

Installing and Setting up the Machine (page 2-1)

• To learn how to load paper, set up shared folders, and add addresses to the address book, refer to the following:

Preparation before Use (page 3-1)

Input Data

Operations from your PC

Document

Box functions

Security

Output Data

Copy functions

Printer functions USB memory

Send functions

Fax functions

Original Electronic data Fax dataUSB memory

FAX Operation

Guide

This function serves a variety of purposes,

including saving data in the machine and on a USB

memory stick.

Printing Data Saved in the Printer (page 4-10)

You can apply the various machine

security levels to your specific needs.

Frequently-Used Sending

Method (page 5-14)

Command Center RX

You can check the status and change

the settings of the machine from a Web

browser on your computer.

Command Center RX (page 2-45)

Command Center RX User Guide

Strengthen security

(page xii)

Copying (page 5-12)

Printing from PC (page 4-1)

Saving Documents to

USB Memory (Scan to

USB) (page 5-39)

> Machine Features

Machine Features

The machine is equipped with many useful functions.

Using Various Functions (page 6-1)

Here are some examples.

Optimize your office workflow

Access to frequently used functions

with just one touch (Favorites)

You can preset frequently used functions.

Once you register frequently used

settings as favorite, you can call up the

settings easily. Using this favorite brings

the same results even if operated by

another person.

Program (page 5-8)

Copy both sides of an ID card on a

single sheet (ID Card Copy)

You can copy the front and back sides of

an ID card on a single sheet of paper.

Program (page 5-8)

Scan originals of different sizes at a

time (Mixed Size Originals)

It is useful when preparing conference

materials.

You can set the different sized originals at

one time so you don't need to reset the

originals regardless of size.

Mixed Size Originals (page 6-17)

Optimize your office workflow

Scan a large number of originals in

separate batches and produce as one

job (Continuous Scan)

It is useful when preparing many-page

handouts.

When a large number of originals cannot

be placed in the document processor at

one time, the originals can be scanned in

separate batches and then copied or sent

as one job.

Continuous Scan (page 6-18)

Send one time with multiple sending

options (Multi Sending)

You can send a same document to the

multiple destinations using a different

method.

You can specify multiple destinations of

different send methods such as E-mail,

SMB, and Fax.

You can reduce your workflow by sending

a job at once.

Sending to Different Types of

Destinations (Multi Sending) (page 5-

27)

Send a FAX from a PC

(Sending FAX from PC)

You can save the paper used for sending

a FAX with this function.

You can send a file to be faxed from the

PC without printing the file, so that you

can reduce the number of pieces of paper

and perform sending jobs efficiently.

FAX Operation Guide

1~10

1~30

11~20

21~30

> Machine Features

Save energy and cost

Save energy as needed

(Energy Saver function)

The machine is equipped with Energy

Saver function that automatically

switched into Sleep Mode. You can set

appropriate Energy Saver Recovery

Level depending on the operation.

Energy Saver function (page 2-26)

Use less toner for printing

(EcoPrint)

You can save toner consumption with this

function.

When you only need to check the printed

content, such as a trial print run or

documents for internal confirmation, use

this function to save toner.

Use this function when a high-quality print

is not required.

EcoPrint (page 6-18)

Reduce paper use

(Paper Saving Printing)

You can print originals on both sides of

the paper. You can also print multiple

originals onto one sheet.

Combine (page 6-14)

Duplex (page 6-9)

Save energy and cost Create attractive documents

Skip blank pages when printing

(Skip Blank Page)

When there are blank pages in a scanned

document, this function skips the blank

pages and prints only pages that are not

blank.

Skip Blank Page (page 6-22)

Send a FAX to reduce the

communication cost

(FAX Delayed Transmission)

You can reduce the communication cost

with this function.

The communication cost can be reduced

by setting the timer to the time period

during which the communication cost is

low.

FAX Operation Guide

Scan originals in color and send them

to a PC (Scan)

You can scan originals and convert them

into electronic data, such as a color PDF.

Frequently-Used Sending Method

(page 5-14)

Off

xii

> Machine Features

Strengthen security

Password-protect a PDF file

(PDF Encryption Functions)

Use the PDF format's password security

options to restrict document viewing,

printing and editing.

PDF Encryption

Functions (page 6-26)

Prevent loss of finished documents

(Private Print)

Temporarily saving print jobs in the main

unit document box and outputting them

when in front of the device can prevent

documents from being taken by others.

Printing Data Saved in the Printer

(page 4-10)

(Card Authentication)

You can log in simply by touching an ID

card. You don't need to enter your user

name and password.

Card Authentication Kit(B) "Card

Authentication Kit" (page 11-4)

Strengthen security Use functions more efficiently

Strengthen security

(Settings for Administrator)

Various functions are available for

administrators to strengthen security.

Strengthening the Security (page 2-

44)

Make the machine quiet

(Quiet Mode)

You can make the machine quiet by

reducing its running noise.ON/OFF

switching by one-touch is possible.

Quiet Mode (page 2-29)

Install the machine without concerning

the network cables (Wireless Network)

If there is a wireless LAN environment, it

is possible to install the unit without

worrying about the network wiring. In

addition, Wi-Fi Direct, etc. are supported.

Network Setup (page 2-18)

Setting Wi-Fi Direct (page 2-24)

OK !

xiii

> Machine Features

Use functions more efficiently

Use USB memory

(USB Memory)

It is useful when you need to print

documents outside your office or you

cannot print documents from your PC.

You can print the document from the USB

memory by plugging it directly into the

machine.

Original scanned at the machine can be

saved in the USB memory also.

Printing Documents Stored in

Removable USB Memory (page 5-

37)

Saving Documents to USB Memory

(Scan to USB) (page 5-39)

Specify image file format

(File Format)

You can select the various file formats

when sending/storing images.

File Format (page 6-24)

Perform remote operation

(Command Center RX)

You can access to the machine remotely

to print, send or download data.

Administrators can configure the machine

behavior or management settings.

Command Center RX (page 2-45)

xiv

> Color and Image Quality Functions

Color and Image Quality Functions

The machine is equipped with various color and image quality functions. You can adjust the scanned image as desired.

Basic Color Modes

The basic color modes are as follows.

For details, refer to the following:

Color Selection (page 6-20)

Color mode Description

Reference image Reference

page

Before After

Auto(Color/Gray)

Auto(Color/B&W)

Automatically recognizes whether a

document being scanned is color or black

& white.

page 6-20

Full Color Scans a document in full color. page 6-20

Grayscale Scans a document in grayscale. page 6-20

Black & White Scans a document in black & white. page 6-20

> Color and Image Quality Functions

Adjusting Image Quality and Color

To adjust the image quality or color of an image, use the following functions.

I want to...

Sample image

Function Page

Before After

Adjust the color precisely.

Adjust the density. Density page 6-18

Adjust the image quality precisely

Emphasize or blur the image

outline.

Example: Emphasize the image

outlines

Sharpness page 6-20

Adjust the difference between

dark and light parts of the image.

Contrast page 6-21

Darken or lighten the background

(the area with no texts or images)

of a document.

Example: Lightening the

background

Background Density page 6-21

Adjust the scanned image

Decrease the file size and

produce the characters clearly.

File format

[High Comp. PDF]

page 6-24

xvi

> Guides Provided with the Machine

Guides Provided with the Machine

The following guides are provided with the machine. Refer to each guide as needed.

The contents of the guides are subject to change without notice for the purpose of improvement of machine

performance.

Printed guides

Start using the

machine quickly

Quick Guide

Explains how to use basic functions of the machine, how to use convenient features, how

to perform routine maintenance, and what to do when problems occur.

For safe use of the

machine

Safety Guide

Provides safety and cautionary information for installation environment and use of the

machine. Be sure to read this guide before using the machine.

Safety Guide (ECOSYS M2135dn/ECOSYS M2635dn/

ECOSYS M2635dw/ECOSYS M2040dn/ECOSYS M2540dn/

ECOSYS M2540dw)

Indicates the space required for machine installation, and describes the cautionary labels

and other safety information. Be sure to read this guide before using the machine.

xvii

> Guides Provided with the Machine

Guides (PDF) on the DVD (Product Library)

Install the following versions of Adobe Reader to view the manuals on the DVD.

Version 8.0 or later

Use the machine

thoughtfully

Operation Guide (This Guide)

Explains how to load paper and perform copy, print and scan operations, and indicates

default settings and other information.

Use the fax functions FAX Operation Guide

Explains how to use the fax function.

Use the ID card Card Authentication Kit (B) Operation Guide

Explains how to perform authentication using the ID card.

Easily register

machine information

and configure settings

Command Center RX User Guide

Explains how to access the machine from a Web browser on your computer to check and

change settings.

Print data from a

computer

Printer Driver User Guide

Explains how to install the printer driver and use the printer function.

Directly print a PDF file KYOCERA Net Direct Print Operation Guide

Explains how to print PDF files without launching Adobe Acrobat or Reader.

Monitor the machine

and printers on the

network

KYOCERA Net Viewer User Guide

Explains how to monitor your network printing system (the machine) with KYOCERA Net

Viewer.

Print without using the

printer driver

PRESCRIBE Commands Command Reference

Describes the native printer language (PRESCRIBE commands).

PRESCRIBE Commands Technical Reference

Describes the PRESCRIBE command functions and control for each type of emulation.

Adjust the print or

scan position

Maintenance Menu User Guide

Maintenance Menu provides the explanation on how to configure the print, scan, and other

settings.

xviii

> About the Operation Guide (this Guide)

About the Operation Guide (this Guide)

Structure of the guide

The Operation Guide contains the following chapters.

Chapter Contents

1Legal and Safety Information Provides precautions regarding use of the machine and trademark information.

2Installing and Setting up the

Machine

Explains part names, cable connections, installation of the software, login, logout, and

other matters related to administration of the machine.

3Preparation before Use Explains preparations and settings that are required in order to use the machine, such

as how to load paper, and create an address book.

4Printing from PC Explains functions that are available when the machine is used as a printer.

5Operation on the Machine Explains the basic procedures for using the machine, such as placing originals, making

copies, sending documents, and using document boxes.

6Using Various Functions Explains convenient functions that are available on the machine.

7Status/Job Cancel Explains how to check the status of a job and the job history, and how to cancel jobs

being printed or waiting to print. Also explains how to check paper and toner levels, how

to check the device status, and how to cancel fax transmission.

8Setup and Registration (System

Menu)

Explains System Menu and how it relates to the operation of the machine.

9User Authentication and

Accounting (User Login, Job

Accounting)

Explains user login and job accounting.

10 Troubleshooting Explains what to do when toner runs out, an error is displayed, or a paper jam or other

problem occurs.

11 Appendix Describes convenient options that are available for the machine. Provides information

on media types and paper sizes, and gives a glossary of terms. Explains how to enter

characters, and lists the specifications of the machine.

xix

> About the Operation Guide (this Guide)

Conventions Used in This Guide

Adobe Reader XI is used as an example in the explanations below.

Certain items are indicated in this guide by the conventions described below.

NOTE

The items that appear in Adobe Reader vary depending on how it is used. If the Table of Contents or tools do not

appear, refer to Adobe Reader Help.

Convention Description

[Bold] Indicates keys and buttons.

"Regular" Indicates a message or setting.

Click to move from the current page to the previously

displayed page. This is convenient when you want to return

to the page from which you jumped to the current page.

Click an item in the Table of

Contents to jump to the

corresponding page.

CAUTION

Indicates that personal injury or

mechanical damage may result

from insufficient attention to or

incorrect compliance with the

related points.

NOTE

Indicates supplemental

explanations and reference

information for operations.

IMPORTANT

Indicates operational requirements

and restrictions to operate the

machine correctly, and avoid

damage to the machine or property.

Refer to

Click the underlined text to jump to

the corresponding page.

> About the Operation Guide (this Guide)

Conventions used in procedures for operating the machine

In this Operation Guide, continuous operation is as follows:

Size and Orientation of Paper

Paper sizes such as A5 can be used in both the horizontal and vertical orientations. To distinguish the orientations when

these sizes are used, "R" is added to sizes used in the vertical orientation. In addition, the following icons are used to

indicate paper placement orientations on the message display.

Actual procedure Procedure indicated in this guide

Select the [System Menu/Counter] key.



Select the [▲] or [] key to select [Common settings].



Select the [OK] key.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [] key > [Common

Settings] > [OK] key

Orientation Setting Position

(X=Length, Y=Width)

Icons on the

message display

Indicated size in this

Guide*1

*1 Paper sizes that can be used vary depending on the function and source tray. For details, refer to the following.

Specifications (page 11-21)

Vertical

orientation (-R)

Cassette A5-R

Multipurpose

tray

A5-R

Horizontal

orientation

Cassette A5

Multipurpose

tray

xxi

> Menu Map

Menu Map

This is a list of menus displayed on the message display. Depending on the settings, some menus may not be displayed.

Some menu names may differ from their reference titles.

Paper Selection (page 6-8)

Collate (page 6-9)

Duplex (page 6-9)

Zoom (page 6-12)

Combine (page 6-14)

Original Size (page 6-16)

Orig.Orientation (page 6-16)

Mixed Size Orig. (page 6-17)

Original Image (page 6-17)

Density (page 6-18)

EcoPrint (page 6-18)

Continuous Scan (page 6-18)

File Name Entry (page 6-19)

JobFinish Notice (page 6-19)

Print Override (page 6-19)

Sharpness (page 6-20)

Contrast (page 6-21)

Backgrnd Density (page 6-21)

Skip Blank Page (page 6-22)

xxii

> Menu Map

Me(E-mail) (page 5-28)

E-mail (page 5-15)

Folder(SMB) (page 5-16)

Folder(FTP) (page 5-18)

WSD Scan (page 5-23)

FAX Server (page 5-25)

FAX (Refer to FAX Operation Guide.)

Color Selection (page 6-20)

Original Size (page 6-16)

Original Image (page 6-17)

Scan Resolution (page 6-22)

Sending Size (page 6-23)

Zoom (page 6-12)

Orig.Orientation (page 6-16)

Mixed Size Orig. (page 6-17)

Continuous Scan (page 6-18)

File Format (page 6-24)

File Name Entry (page 6-19)

Subject/Body (page 6-28)

JobFinish Notice (page 6-19)

FAX Resolution (Refer to FAX Operation Guide.)

FAX Delayed TX (Refer to FAX Operation Guide.)

FAX Direct TX (Refer to FAX Operation Guide.)

FAX RX Polling (Refer to FAX Operation Guide.)

FAX TX Report (Refer to FAX Operation Guide.)

Density (page 6-18)

Duplex (page 6-28)

FTP Encrypted TX (page 6-29)

File Separation (page 6-29)

Sharpness (page 6-20)

Contrast (page 6-21)

Backgrnd Density (page 6-21)

Skip Blank Page (page 6-22)

xxiii

> Menu Map

Sub Address Box (Refer to FAX Operation Guide.)

Polling Box (Refer to FAX Operation Guide.)

Job Box Private Print (page 4-11)

Private/Stored (page 4-11)

Proof and Hold (page 4-16)

Quick/Proof (page 4-14)

USB

Memory

Store File Color Selection (page 6-20)

Original Size (page 6-16)

Original Image (page 6-17)

Scan Resolution (page 6-22)

Storing Size (page 6-30)

Zoom (page 6-12)

Orig.Orientation (page 6-16)

Mixed Size Orig. (page 6-17)

Continuous Scan (page 6-18)

File Format (page 6-24)

File Separation (page 6-29)

File Name Entry (page 6-19)

JobFinish Notice (page 6-19)

Density (page 6-18)

Duplex (page 6-28)

Sharpness (page 6-20)

Contrast (page 6-21)

Backgrnd Density (page 6-21)

Skip Blank Page (page 6-22)

(File

Selection)

Print Collate (page 6-9)

Paper Selection (page 6-8)

Duplex (page 6-9)

EcoPrint (page 6-18)

File Name Entry (page 6-19)

JobFinish Notice (page 6-19)

Print Override (page 6-19)

Encrypted PDF (page 6-30)

JPEG/TIFF Print (page 6-31)

XPS FitTo Page (page 6-31)

xxiv

> Menu Map

Recall program. (page 5-8)

Print Job Status (page 7-4)

Send Job Status (page 7-5)

Store Job Status (page 7-6)

Scheduled Job (page 7-7)

Print Job Log (page 7-10)

Send Job Log (page 7-11)

Store Job Log (page 7-12)

FAX Job Log (Refer to FAX Operation Guide.)

Scanner (page 7-14)

Printer (page 7-14)

FAX (Refer to FAX Operation Guide.)

Toner Status (page 7-15)

Paper Status (page 7-15)

USB Memory (page 7-14)

USB Keyboard (page 7-14)

Network (page 7-14)

Wi-Fi (page 7-14)

xxv

> Menu Map

Report Report Print Menu Map (page 8-5)

Status Page (page 8-5)

Font List (page 8-5)

Admin Rpt Set. (Refer to FAX Operation Guide.)

Result Rpt Set. (page 8-6)

Job Log History Auto Sending (page 8-6)

Send History (page 8-6)

Destination (page 8-6)

Subject (page 8-6)

Personal Info. (page 8-6)

Counter (page 2-43)

System/Network Network Setting Host Name (page 8-7)

Wi-Fi Direct Set Wi-Fi Direct (page 8-7)

Device Name (page 8-7)

IP Address (page 8-7)

Auto Disconnect (page 8-7)

Wi-Fi Settings Wi-Fi (page 8-8)

Setup (page 8-8)

TCP/IP Settings (page 8-10)

Restart Network (page 8-11)

Wired Netwk. Set TCP/IP Settings (page 8-11)

LAN Interface (page 8-11)

Bonjour (page 8-12)

IPSec (page 8-12)

ProtocolSettings (page 8-12)

Secure Settings (page 8-16)

Ping (page 8-16)

Restart Network (page 8-16)

Primary Network (page 8-16)

I/F Block Set. USB Host (page 8-17)

USB Device (page 8-17)

USB Storage (page 8-17)

Security Level (page 8-17)

xxvi

> Menu Map

System/Network Restart (page 8-17)

Op Functions (page 8-17)

FAX Server Set. (page 8-18)

User/Job Account User Login Set. User Login (page 9-3)

Local User List (page 9-6)

Account Lockout (page 9-5)

ID Card Setting Key Login (page 9-20)

Additional Auth. (page 9-20)

Group Auth. (page 9-15)

Guest Auth. Set. (page 9-16)

PIN Login (page 9-21)

NW User Property (page 9-19)

Job Account.Set. Job Accounting (page 9-24)

AccountingAccess (page 9-25)

Account. Report (page 9-37)

Total Accounting (page 9-36)

Each Job Account (page 9-36)

Account. List (page 9-26)

Default Setting Apply Limit (page 9-35)

Copy/Print Count (page 9-35)

Counter Limit (page 9-35)

Unknown User Unknown ID Job (page 9-39)

User Property (page 9-40)

User Property (page 9-10)

Common Settings Language (page 8-19)

Default Screen (page 8-19)

Sound Buzzer (page 8-19)

FAX Speaker (Refer to FAX Operation Guide.)

FAX Monitor (Refer to FAX Operation Guide.)

Display Bright. (page 8-19)

xxvii

> Menu Map

Common Settings Orig./Paper Set. Custom Orig.Size (page 8-20)

Detect Orig.(DP) (page 8-20)

Def. Orig. Size (page 8-20)

Custom PaperSize (page 8-21)

Cassette 1 Set. Cassette 1 Size (page 8-23)

Cassette 1 Type (page 8-23)

Cassette 2 Set. Cassette 2 Size (page 8-23)

Cassette 2 Type (page 8-23)

Cassette 3 Set. Cassette 3 Size (page 8-23)

Cassette 3 Type (page 8-23)

MP Tray Set. MP Tray Size (page 8-23)

MP Tray Type (page 8-23)

Media Type Set. (page 8-21)

Media for Auto (page 8-21)

Def. PaperSource (page 8-22)

SpcialPaper Act. (page 8-22)

Paper Setup Msg (page 8-22)

Preset Limit (page 8-24)

Measurement (page 8-24)

Error Handling DuplexPaperError (page 8-25)

PaperMismatchErr (page 8-25)

Date Setting Date/Time (page 8-25)

Date Format (page 8-25)

Time Zone (page 8-25)

Summer Time (page 8-25)

Timer Setting Auto Panel Reset (page 8-26)

PanelReset Timer (page 8-26)

Sleep Level (models except for Europe) (page 8-26)

Sleep Rules (models for Europe) (page 8-26)

Sleep Timer (page 8-26)

Power Off Rule (models for Europe) (page 8-27)

Power Off Timer (models for Europe) (page 8-27)

Auto Err. Clear (page 8-27)

Err. Clear Timer (page 8-27)

Unusable Time (Refer to FAX Operation Guide.)

Ping Timeout (page 8-27)

xxviii

> Menu Map

Common Settings Function Default Color Selection (page 8-28)

Scan Resolution (page 8-28)

FAX Resolution (Refer to FAX Operation Guide.)

Orig.Image(Copy) (page 8-28)

Orig.Image(Send) (page 8-28)

Zoom (page 8-28)

Collate (page 8-28)

Orig.Orientation (page 8-28)

Backgrnd(Copy) (page 8-28)

Backgrnd(Send) (page 8-28)

EcoPrint (page 8-28)

Skip Blank(Copy) (page 8-28)

Skip Blank(Send) (page 8-28)

File Name Entry (page 8-28)

Subject/Body (page 8-28)

Con.scan-Copy (page 8-28)

Con.scan-FAX (page 8-29)

Con.scan-Others (page 8-29)

File Format (page 8-29)

File Separation (page 8-29)

JPEG/TIFF Print (page 8-29)

XPS FitTo Page (page 8-29)

Detail Setting 2 in 1 Layout (page 8-29)

4 in 1 Layout (page 8-29)

Border Line (page 8-29)

Orig. Binding (page 8-29)

Finish. Binding (page 8-29)

Image Quality (page 8-29)

Color TIFF Comp. (page 8-29)

PDF/A (page 8-29)

High Comp.PDF (page 8-29)

Black Lvl(Copy) (page 8-29)

Black Lvl(Send) (page 8-29)

RAM Disk Mode (page 8-30)

Format SD Card (page 8-30)

xxix

> Menu Map

Common Settings Optional Memory (page 8-30)

Disp. Status/Log (page 8-31)

USB KeyboardType (page 8-31)

Low Toner Alert (page 8-31)

Show PowerOffMsg (page 8-31)

EnergySaver Set. Recovery Level (page 8-32)

Copy Paper Selection (page 8-32)

AutoPaperSelect. (page 8-32)

Auto % Priority (page 8-32)

DP Read Action (page 8-32)

Select Key Set. (page 8-32)

Printer Emulation Set. (page 8-33)

EcoPrint (page 8-33)

Override A4/LTR (page 8-33)

Duplex (page 8-33)

Copies (page 8-33)

Orientation (page 8-33)

Wide A4 (page 8-33)

FormFeed TimeOut (page 8-33)

LF Action (page 8-33)

CR Action (page 8-33)

Job Name (page 8-34)

User Name (page 8-34)

MP Tray Priority (page 8-34)

Paper Feed Mode (page 8-34)

Auto Cass. Change (page 8-34)

Resolution (page 8-34)

KIR (page 8-34)

Send Select Key Set. (page 8-35)

DestinationCheck (page 8-35)

New Dest. Entry (page 8-35)

Recall Dest. (page 8-35)

Default Screen (page 8-35)

Send and Forward (page 8-35)

FAX (Refer to FAX Operation Guide.)

xxx

> Menu Map

Document Box Sub Address Box (Refer to FAX Operation Guide.)

Job Box Quick Copy Jobs (page 8-36)

JobRet. Deletion (page 8-36)

Polling Box (Refer to FAX Operation Guide.)

Select Key Set. (page 8-32)

Edit Destination Address Book (page 8-37)

Print List (page 8-37)

Addr Book Defaults (page 8-37)

Adjust/Maint. Copy Denst. Adj. (page 8-38)

Send/Box Density (page 8-38)

Contrast (Copy) (page 8-38)

Contrast (Send) (page 8-38)

Backgrnd Density (page 8-38)

Print Density (page 8-38)

AutoColorCorrect (page 8-38)

Correct. Bk Line (page 8-38)

Service Setting (page 8-38)

1-1

1 Legal and Safety

Information

Please read this information before using your machine. This chapter provides information on the following topics.

Notice ................................................................................................................................................................. 1-2

Safety Conventions in This Guide ........................................................................................................... 1-2

Environment ............................................................................................................................................. 1-3

Precautions for Use ................................................................................................................................. 1-4

Laser Safety (Europe) .............................................................................................................................. 1-5

SAFETY OF LASER BEAM (USA) .......................................................................................................... 1-6

Safety Instructions Regarding the Disconnection of Power ..................................................................... 1-7

Compliance and Conformity .................................................................................................................... 1-7

Other precautions (for users in California, the United States) .................................................................. 1-7

Warranty (the United States and Canada) ............................................................................................... 1-8

Legal Restriction on Copying/Scanning ................................................................................................... 1-9

EN ISO 7779 ............................................................................................................................................ 1-9

EK1-ITB 2000 .......................................................................................................................................... 1-9

Wireless Connection (Mexico only) ......................................................................................................... 1-9

Security Precautions when Using Wireless LAN (If equipped) ................................................................ 1-9

Limited Use of This Product (If equipped) ............................................................................................. 1-10

Legal Information .................................................................................................................................... 1-11

Energy Saving Control Function ............................................................................................................ 1-17

Automatic 2-Sided Print Function .......................................................................................................... 1-17

Resource Saving - Paper ....................................................................................................................... 1-17

Environmental benefits of "Power Management" ................................................................................... 1-17

Energy Star (ENERGY STAR®) Program .............................................................................................. 1-17

1-2

Legal and Safety Information > Notice

Notice

Safety Conventions in This Guide

The sections of this guide and parts of the machine marked with symbols are safety warnings meant to protect the user,

other individuals and surrounding objects, and ensure correct and safe usage of the machine. The symbols and their

meanings are indicated below.

WARNING: Indicates that serious injury or even death may result from insufficient

attention to or incorrect compliance with the related points.

CAUTION: Indicates that personal injury or mechanical damage may result from

insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance with the related points.

Symbols

The  symbol indicates that the related section includes safety warnings. Specific points of attention are indicated

inside the symbol.

... [General warning]

... [Warning of high temperature]

The symbol indicates that the related section includes information on prohibited actions. Specifics of the prohibited

action are indicated inside the symbol.

... [Warning of prohibited action]

... [Disassembly prohibited]

The  symbol indicates that the related section includes information on actions which must be performed. Specifics of

the required action are indicated inside the symbol.

... [Alert of required action]

... [Remove the power plug from the outlet]

... [Always connect the machine to an outlet with a ground connection]

Please contact your service representative to order a replacement if the safety warnings in this Operation Guide are

illegible or if the guide itself is missing (fee required).

NOTE

An original which resembles a bank note closely may not be copied properly in some rare cases because this

machine is equipped with a counterfeiting prevention function.

1-3

Legal and Safety Information > Notice

Environment

The service environmental conditions are as follows:

Avoid the following locations when selecting a site for the machine.

• Avoid locations near a window or with exposure to direct sunlight.

• Avoid locations with vibrations.

• Avoid locations with drastic temperature fluctuations.

• Avoid locations with direct exposure to hot or cold air.

• Avoid poorly ventilated locations.

If the floor is delicate against casters, when this machine is moved after installation, the floor material may be damaged.

During copying, some ozone is released, but the amount does not cause any ill effect to one's health. If, however, the

machine is used over a long period of time in a poorly ventilated room or when making an extremely large number of

prints, the smell may become unpleasant. To maintain the appropriate environment for copy work, it is suggested that

the room be properly ventilated.

Temperature 50 to 90.5°F (10 to 32.5°C)

Humidity 10 to 80%

1-4

Legal and Safety Information > Notice

Precautions for Use

Cautions when handling consumables

CAUTION

Do not attempt to incinerate parts which contain toner. Dangerous sparks may cause burns.

Keep parts which contain toner out of the reach of children.

If toner happens to spill from parts which contain toner, avoid inhalation and ingestion, as well as contact with your eyes

and skin.

• If you do happen to inhale toner, move to a place with fresh air and gargle thoroughly with a large amount of water. If

coughing develops, contact a physician.

• If you do happen to ingest toner, rinse your mouth with water and drink 1 or 2 cups of water to dilute the contents of

your stomach. If necessary, contact a physician.

• If you do happen to get toner in your eyes, flush them thoroughly with water. If there is any remaining tenderness,

contact a physician.

• If toner does happen to get on your skin, wash with soap and water.

Do not attempt to force open or destroy parts which contain toner.

Other precautions

Return the exhausted toner container to your dealer or service representative. The collected toner container will be

recycled or disposed in accordance with the relevant regulations.

Store the machine while avoiding exposure to direct sunlight.

Store the machine in a place where the temperature stays below 40°C while avoiding sharp changes of temperature and

humidity.

If the machine will not be used for an extended period of time, remove the paper from the cassette and the Multipurpose

(MP) Tray, return it to its original package and reseal it.

1-5

Legal and Safety Information > Notice

Laser Safety (Europe)

Laser radiation could be hazardous to the human body. For this reason, laser radiation emitted inside this machine is

hermetically sealed within the protective housing and external cover. In the normal operation of the product by user, no

radiation can leak from the machine.

This machine is classified as Class 1 laser product under IEC/EN 60825-1:2014.

Regarding CLASS 1 laser products, information is provided on the rating label.

1-6

Legal and Safety Information > Notice

SAFETY OF LASER BEAM (USA)

1. Safety of laser beam

This machine has been certified by the manufacturer to Class 1 level under the radiation performance standards

established by the U.S.DHHS (Department of Health and Human Services) in 1968. This indicates that the product is

safe to use during normal operation and maintenance. The laser optical system, enclosed in a protective housing and

sealed within the external covers, never permits the laser beam to escape.

2. The CDRH Act

A laser-product-related act was implemented on Aug. 2, 1976, by the Center for Devices and Radiological Health

(CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA). This act prohibits the sale of laser products in the U.S. without

certification, and applies to laser products manufactured after Aug. 1, 1976. The label shown below indicates

compliance with the CDRH regulations and must be attached to laser products marketed in the United States. The

position of the rating label is show below.

3. Maintenance

For safety of the service personnel, follow the maintenance instructions in the other section of this manual.

4. Safety switch

The power to the laser unit is cut off when the front cover is opened.

ECOSYS xxxxxxxx

1-7

Legal and Safety Information > Notice

Safety Instructions Regarding the Disconnection of

Power

Caution: The power plug is the main isolation device! Other switches on the equipment are only functional switches and

are not suitable for isolating the equipment from the power source.

Attention: Le débranchement de la fiche secteur est le seul moyen de mettre l'appareil hors tension. Les interrupteurs

sur l'appareil ne sont que des interrupteurs de fonctionnement: ils ne mettent pas l'appareil hors tension.

Compliance and Conformity

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of

the FCC Rules.

These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This

equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the

instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference

will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television

reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the

interference by one or more of the following measures:

• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

• The use of a non-shielded interface cable with the referenced device is prohibited.

CAUTION — The changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void

the user's authority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions; (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this

device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two

conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including

interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all

persons and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other transmitter.

* The above statements are valid only in the United States of America and Canada.

NOTE — Use shielded interface cables.

Other precautions

(for users in California, the United States)

Perchlorate Material - special handling may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

1-8

Legal and Safety Information > Notice

Warranty (the United States and Canada)

ECOSYS M2635dw/ECOSYS M2040dn/ECOSYS M2540dw

COLOR MULTIFUNCTIONAL PRODUCT LIMITED WARRANTY

KYOCERA Document Solutions America, Inc. and KYOCERA Document Solutions Canada, Ltd.

(both referred to as "KYOCERA") warrant the Customer's new Color Multifunctional Product

(referred to as "MFP"), and the new accessories installed with the initial installation of the MFP,

against any defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year, or 200,000 copies/prints

from date of installation, whichever first occurs. In the event the MFP or an accessory is found to be

defective within the warranty period, KYOCERA's only obligation and the Customer's exclusive

remedy shall be replacement of any defective parts. KYOCERA shall have no obligation to furnish

labor.

This warranty covers Maintenance Kits and the components of Maintenance Kits included with the

original MFP for a period of one year or 100,000 copies/prints, whichever first occurs. Maintenance

Kits consist of the developing unit and the drum unit. Replacement Maintenance Kits have a 90 day

Limited Warranty.

This warranty is valid only for the original retail purchaser (referred to as the "Customer") of a new

KYOCERA MFP in the United States of America or Canada, based upon the country of purchase.

In order to obtain performance of this warranty, the Customer must immediately notify the

Authorized KYOCERA Dealer from whom the product was purchased. If the KYOCERA Dealer is

not able to provide service, write to KYOCERA at the address below for the name and address of

the Authorized KYOCERA Dealer in your area, or check KYOCERA's website at

www.kyoceradocumentsolutions.com for KYOCERA Document Solutions America, Inc. or

www.kyoceradocumentsolutions.ca for KYOCERA Document Solutions Canada, Ltd.

This warranty does not cover MFPs or accessories which: (a) have become damaged due to

operator negligence, misuse, accidents, improper storage or unusual physical or electrical stress,

(b) have used parts or supplies which are not genuine KYOCERA brand parts or supplies, (c) have

been installed or serviced by a technician not employed by KYOCERA or an Authorized KYOCERA

Dealer, or (d) have had the serial number modified, altered, or removed.

This warranty gives the Customer specific legal rights. The Customer may also have other rights,

which vary from state to state, or province to province. Neither the seller, nor any other person, is

authorized to extend the time period or expand this warranty on behalf of KYOCERA.

THIS WARRANTY IS MADE IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS,

EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, AND KYOCERA SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED

WARRANTY OR CONDITION OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR

PURPOSE. THIS WARRANTY SHALL NOT EXTEND TO, AND KYOCERA SHALL NOT BE

LIABLE FOR, ANY INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHICH MAY ARISE OUT OF

THE USE OF, OR INABILITY TO USE, THE MFP.

KYOCERA Document Solutions Canada, Ltd.

6120 Kestrel Rd., Mississauga, ON L5T 1S8,

Canada

KYOCERA Document Solutions America, Inc.

225 Sand Road,

Fairfield, New Jersey 07004-0008, USA

1-9

Legal and Safety Information > Notice

Legal Restriction on Copying/Scanning

It may be prohibited to copy/scan copyrighted material without permission of the copyright owner.

Copying/Scanning the following items is prohibited and may be penalized by low. It may not be limited to these items. Do

not knowingly copy/scan the items that are not to be copied/scanned.

• Paper money

• Bank note

• Securities

•Stamp

• Passport

• Certificate

Local laws and regulations may prohibit or restrict copying/scanning of other items not mentioned above.

EN ISO 7779

Maschinenlärminformations-Verordnung 3. GPSGV, 06.01.2004: Der höchste Schalldruckpegel beträgt 70 dB (A) oder

weniger gemäß EN ISO 7779.

EK1-ITB 2000

Das Gerät ist nicht für die Benutzung im unmittelbaren Gesichtsfeld am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz vorgesehen. Um

störende Reflexionen am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz zu vermeiden, darf dieses Produkt nicht im unmittelbaren Gesichtsfeld

platziert werden.

Wireless Connection (Mexico only)

The operation of this equipment is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) it is possible that this equipment or device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this equipment or device must

accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones:

(1) es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y (2) este equipo o dispositivo debe

aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operación no deseada.

Security Precautions when Using Wireless LAN

(If equipped)

Wireless LAN allows information to be exchanged between wireless access points instead of using a network cable,

which offers the advantage that a LAN connection can be established freely within an area in which radio waves can be

transmitted.

On the other hand, the following problems may occur if security settings are not configured, because radio waves can

pass through obstacles (including walls) and reach everywhere within a certain area.

Secretly Viewing Communication Contents

A third person with malicious objectives may intentionally monitor radio waves and gain unauthorized access to the

following communication contents.

• Personal information including ID, passwords, and credit card numbers

• Contents of email messages

1-10

Legal and Safety Information > Notice

Illegal Intrusion

A third party with malicious intent may gain unauthorized access to personal or company networks and conduct the

following illegal actions.

• Extracting personal and confidential information (information leak)

• Entering into communication while impersonating a specific person and distributing unauthorized information

(spoofing)

• Modifying and retransmitting intercepted communications (falsification)

• Transmitting computer viruses and destroying data and systems (destruction)

Wireless LAN cards and wireless access points contain built-in security mechanisms to address these problems and to

reduce the possibility of these problems occurring by configuring the security settings of wireless LAN products when

the product is used.

We recommend that customers take responsibility and use their judgment when configuring the security settings and

that they ensure that they fully understand the problems that can occur when the product is used without configuring the

security settings.

Limited Use of This Product (If equipped)

• Radio waves transmitted from this product may affect medical equipment. When using this product in a medical

institution or in the vicinity of medical instruments, either use this product according to the instructions and

precautions provided by the administrator of the institution or those provided on the medical instruments.

• Radio waves transmitted from this product may affect automatic control equipment including automatic doors and fire

alarms. When using this product in the vicinity of the automatic control equipment, use this product according to the

instructions and precautions provided on the automatic control equipment.

• If this product is used in devices that are directly related to service including airplanes, trains, ships, and automobiles

or this product is used in applications requiring high reliability and safety to function and in devices requiring accuracy

including those used in disaster prevention and crime prevention and those used for various safety purposes, please

use this product after considering the safety design of the entire system including adoption of a failsafe design and

redundancy design for reliability and safety maintenance of the entire system. This product is not intended for use in

applications requiring high reliability and safety including aerospace instruments, trunk communication equipment,

nuclear power control equipment, and medical equipment; hence, the decision as to whether to use this product in

these applications needs to be fully considered and determined.

1-11

Legal and Safety Information > Notice

Legal Information

Copying or other reproduction of all or part of this guide without the prior written consent of KYOCERA Document

Solutions Inc. is prohibited.

Regarding Trade Names

• PRESCRIBE and ECOSYS are registered trademark of Kyocera Corporation.

• KPDL is a trademark of Kyocera Corporation.

• Microsoft, Windows, Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, Windows Vista, Windows Server 2008, Windows 7,

Windows Server 2012, Windows 8, Windows 8.1, Windows 10 and Internet Explorer are registered trademarks or

trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and/or other countries.

• PCL is a trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.

• Adobe Acrobat, Adobe Reader and PostScript are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.

• Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation.

• IBM and IBM PC/AT are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation.

• AppleTalk, Bonjour, Macintosh, and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

• All European language fonts installed in this machine are used under licensing agreement with Monotype Imaging

Inc.

• Helvetica, Palatino and Times are registered trademarks of Linotype GmbH.

• ITC Avant Garde Gothic, ITC Bookman, ITC ZapfChancery and ITC ZapfDingbats are registered trademarks of

International Typeface Corporation.

• ThinPrint is a trademark of Cortado AG in Germany and other countries.

• UFST™ MicroType® fonts by Monotype Imaging Inc. are installed in this machine.

• This machine contains the software having modules developed by Independent JPEG Group.

• iPad, iPhone and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

• AirPrint and the AirPrint logo are trademarks of Apple Inc.

• iOS is a trademark or registered trademark of Cisco in the U.S. and other countries and is used under license by

Apple Inc.

• Google and Google Cloud Print™ are trademarks and/or registered trademarks of Google Inc.

• Mopria™ is registered trademarks of Mopria™ Alliance.

• Wi-Fi and Wi-Fi Direct are trademarks and/or registered trademarks of Wi-Fi Alliance.

All other brands and product names are registered trademarks or trademarks of their respective companies. The

designations ™ and ® will not be used in this Operation Guide.

1-12

Legal and Safety Information > Notice

GPL/LGPL

This product contains GPL (http://www.gnu.org/licenses/gpl.html) and/or LGPL (http://www.gnu.org/licenses/lgpl.html)

software as part of its firmware. You can get the source code, and you are permitted to copy, redistribute and modify it

under the terms of GPL/LGPL. For further information including availability of the source code, visit

http://www.kyoceradocumentsolutions.com/gpl/.

OpenSSL License

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following

conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following

disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following

disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment:

"This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit.

(http://www.openssl.org/)"

4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used to endorse or promote products derived

from this software without prior written permission.

For written permission, please contact openssl-core@openssl.org.

5. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL" nor may "OpenSSL" appear in their names without

prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project.

6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment: "This product includes software

developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)"

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED

WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND

FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR

ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR

CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR

SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON

ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE

OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE

POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

Original SSLeay License

This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). The implementation was written so

as to conform with Netscapes SSL.

This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are adhered to. The

following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the

SSL code. The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the

holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).

If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used.

This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation (online or textual) provided with the

package.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following

conditions are met:

1-13

Legal and Safety Information > Notice

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following

disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement:

"This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)"

The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the routines from the library being used are not cryptographic related :-).

4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps directory (application code) you must

include an acknowledgement: "This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)"

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,

INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A

PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE

FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES

(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,

DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,

WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN

ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e.

this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution licence [including the GNU Public Licence.]

Monotype Imaging License Agreement

1Software shall mean the digitally encoded, machine readable, scalable outline data as encoded in a special format as

well as the UFST Software.

2 You agree to accept a non-exclusive license to use the Software to reproduce and display weights, styles and

versions of letters, numerals, characters and symbols (Typefaces) solely for your own customary business or

personal purposes at the address stated on the registration card you return to Monotype Imaging. Under the terms of

this License Agreement, you have the right to use the Fonts on up to three printers. If you need to have access to the

fonts on more than three printers, you need to acquire a multiuser license agreement which can be obtained from

Monotype Imaging. Monotype Imaging retains all rights, title and interest to the Software and Typefaces and no rights

are granted to you other than a License to use the Software on the terms expressly set forth in this Agreement.

3 To protect proprietary rights of Monotype Imaging, you agree to maintain the Software and other proprietary

information concerning the Typefaces in strict confidence and to establish reasonable procedures regulating access

to and use of the Software and Typefaces.

4 You agree not to duplicate or copy the Software or Typefaces, except that you may make one backup copy. You

agree that any such copy shall contain the same proprietary notices as those appearing on the original.

5 This License shall continue until the last use of the Software and Typefaces, unless sooner terminated. This License

may be terminated by Monotype Imaging if you fail to comply with the terms of this License and such failure is not

remedied within thirty (30) days after notice from Monotype Imaging. When this License expires or is terminated, you

shall either return to Monotype Imaging or destroy all copies of the Software and Typefaces and documentation as

requested.

6 You agree that you will not modify, alter, disassemble, decrypt, reverse engineer or decompile the Software.

7 Monotype Imaging warrants that for ninety (90) days after delivery, the Software will perform in accordance with

Monotype Imaging-published specifications, and the diskette will be free from defects in material and workmanship.

Monotype Imaging does not warrant that the Software is free from all bugs, errors and omissions.

The parties agree that all other warranties, expressed or implied, including warranties of fitness for a particular

purpose and merchantability, are excluded.

8 Your exclusive remedy and the sole liability of Monotype Imaging in connection with the Software and Typefaces is

repair or replacement of defective parts, upon their return to Monotype Imaging.

In no event will Monotype Imaging be liable for lost profits, lost data, or any other incidental or consequential

damages, or any damages caused by abuse or misapplication of the Software and Typefaces.

9Massachusetts U.S.A. law governs this Agreement.

1-14

Legal and Safety Information > Notice

10 You shall not sublicense, sell, lease, or otherwise transfer the Software and/or Typefaces without the prior written

consent of Monotype Imaging.

11 Use, duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in the Rights in Technical Data

and Computer Software clause at FAR 252-227-7013, subdivision (b)(3)(ii) or subparagraph (c)(1)(ii), as appropriate.

Further use, duplication or disclosure is subject to restrictions applicable to restricted rights software as set forth in

FAR 52.227-19 (c)(2).

12 You acknowledge that you have read this Agreement, understand it, and agree to be bound by its terms and

conditions. Neither party shall be bound by any statement or representation not contained in this Agreement. No

change in this Agreement is effective unless written and signed by properly authorized representatives of each party.

By opening this diskette package, you agree to accept the terms and conditions of this Agreement.

Knopflerfish License

This product includes software developed by the Knopflerfish Project.

http://www.knopflerfish.org

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following

conditions are met:

- Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following

disclaimer.

- Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following

disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

- Neither the name of the KNOPFLERFISH project nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or

promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY

EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF

MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE

EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF

SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)

HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR

TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS

SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

Apache License (Version 2.0)

Apache License

Version 2.0, January 2004

http://www.apache.org/licenses/

TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR USE, REPRODUCTION, AND DISTRIBUTION

1. Definitions.

"License" shall mean the terms and conditions for use, reproduction, and distribution as defined by Sections 1

through 9 of this document.

"Licensor" shall mean the copyright owner or entity authorized by the copyright owner that is granting the License.

"Legal Entity" shall mean the union of the acting entity and all other entities that control, are controlled by, or are

under common control with that entity. For the purposes of this definition, "control" means (i) the power, direct or

indirect, to cause the direction or management of such entity, whether by contract or otherwise, or (ii) ownership of

fifty percent (50%) or more of the outstanding shares, or (iii) beneficial ownership of such entity.

"You" (or "Your") shall mean an individual or Legal Entity exercising permissions granted by this License.

"Source" form shall mean the preferred form for making modifications, including but not limited to software source

code, documentation source, and configuration files.

1-15

Legal and Safety Information > Notice

"Object" form shall mean any form resulting from mechanical transformation or translation of a Source form, including

but not limited to compiled object code, generated documentation, and conversions to other media types.

"Work" shall mean the work of authorship, whether in Source or Object form, made available under the License, as

indicated by a copyright notice that is included in or attached to the work (an example is provided in the Appendix

below).

"Derivative Works" shall mean any work, whether in Source or Object form, that is based on (or derived from) the

Work and for which the editorial revisions, annotations, elaborations, or other modifications represent, as a whole, an

original work of authorship. For the purposes of this License, Derivative Works shall not include works that remain

separable from, or merely link (or bind by name) to the interfaces of, the Work and Derivative Works thereof.

"Contribution" shall mean any work of authorship, including the original version of the Work and any modifications or

additions to that Work or Derivative Works thereof, that is intentionally submitted to Licensor for inclusion in the Work

by the copyright owner or by an individual or Legal Entity authorized to submit on behalf of the copyright owner. For

the purposes of this definition, "submitted" means any form of electronic, verbal, or written communication sent to the

Licensor or its representatives, including but not limited to communication on electronic mailing lists, source code

control systems, and issue tracking systems that are managed by, or on behalf of, the Licensor for the purpose of

discussing and improving the Work, but excluding communication that is conspicuously marked or otherwise

designated in writing by the copyright owner as "Not a Contribution."

"Contributor" shall mean Licensor and any individual or Legal Entity on behalf of whom a Contribution has been

received by Licensor and subsequently incorporated within the Work.

2. Grant of Copyright License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, each Contributor hereby grants to

You a perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable copyright license to reproduce,

prepare Derivative Works of, publicly display, publicly perform, sublicense, and distribute the Work and such

Derivative Works in Source or Object form.

3. Grant of Patent License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, each Contributor hereby grants to You a

perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable (except as stated in this section) patent

license to make, have made, use, offer to sell, sell, import, and otherwise transfer the Work, where such license

applies only to those patent claims licensable by such Contributor that are necessarily infringed by their

Contribution(s) alone or by combination of their Contribution(s) with the Work to which such Contribution(s) was

submitted. If You institute patent litigation against any entity (including a cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit)

alleging that the Work or a Contribution incorporated within the Work constitutes direct or contributory patent

infringement, then any patent licenses granted to You under this License for that Work shall terminate as of the date

such litigation is filed.

4. Redistribution. You may reproduce and distribute copies of the Work or Derivative Works thereof in any medium, with

or without modifications, and in Source or Object form, provided that You meet the following conditions:

(a)You must give any other recipients of the Work or Derivative Works a copy of this License; and

(b)You must cause any modified files to carry prominent notices stating that You changed the files; and

(c)You must retain, in the Source form of any Derivative Works that You distribute, all copyright, patent, trademark,

and attribution notices from the Source form of the Work, excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of

the Derivative Works; and

(d)If the Work includes a "NOTICE" text file as part of its distribution, then any Derivative Works that You distribute

must include a readable copy of the attribution notices contained within such NOTICE file, excluding those notices

that do not pertain to any part of the Derivative Works, in at least one of the following places: within a NOTICE text

file distributed as part of the Derivative Works; within the Source form or documentation, if provided along with the

Derivative Works; or, within a display generated by the Derivative Works, if and wherever such third-party notices

normally appear. The contents of the NOTICE file are for informational purposes only and do not modify the

License. You may add Your own attribution notices within Derivative Works that You distribute, alongside or as an

addendum to the NOTICE text from the Work, provided that such additional attribution notices cannot be

construed as modifying the License.

You may add Your own copyright statement to Your modifications and may provide additional or different license

terms and conditions for use, reproduction, or distribution of Your modifications, or for any such Derivative Works as

a whole, provided Your use, reproduction, and distribution of the Work otherwise complies with the conditions stated

in this License.

1-16

Legal and Safety Information > Notice

5. Submission of Contributions. Unless You explicitly state otherwise, any Contribution intentionally submitted for

inclusion in the Work by You to the Licensor shall be under the terms and conditions of this License, without any

additional terms or conditions. Notwithstanding the above, nothing herein shall supersede or modify the terms of any

separate license agreement you may have executed with Licensor regarding such Contributions.

6. Trademarks. This License does not grant permission to use the trade names, trademarks, service marks, or product

names of the Licensor, except as required for reasonable and customary use in describing the origin of the Work and

reproducing the content of the NOTICE file.

7. Disclaimer of Warranty. Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, Licensor provides the Work (and

each Contributor provides its Contributions) on an "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF

ANY KIND, either express or implied, including, without limitation, any warranties or conditions of TITLE,

NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. You are solely

responsible for determining the appropriateness of using or redistributing the Work and assume any risks associated

with Your exercise of permissions under this License.

8. Limitation of Liability. In no event and under no legal theory, whether in tort (including negligence), contract, or

otherwise, unless required by applicable law (such as deliberate and grossly negligent acts) or agreed to in writing,

shall any Contributor be liable to You for damages, including any direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential

damages of any character arising as a result of this License or out of the use or inability to use the Work (including

but not limited to damages for loss of goodwill, work stoppage, computer failure or malfunction, or any and all other

commercial damages or losses), even if such Contributor has been advised of the possibility of such damages.

9. Accepting Warranty or Additional Liability. While redistributing the Work or Derivative Works thereof, You may choose

to offer, and charge a fee for, acceptance of support, warranty, indemnity, or other liability obligations and/or rights

consistent with this License. However, in accepting such obligations, You may act only on Your own behalf and on

Your sole responsibility, not on behalf of any other Contributor, and only if You agree to indemnify, defend, and hold

each Contributor harmless for any liability incurred by, or claims asserted against, such Contributor by reason of your

accepting any such warranty or additional liability.

END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS

APPENDIX: How to apply the Apache License to your work.

To apply the Apache License to your work, attach the following boilerplate notice, with the fields enclosed by brackets

"[]" replaced with your own identifying information. (Don't include the brackets!) The text should be enclosed in the

appropriate comment syntax for the file format. We also recommend that a file or class name and description of

purpose be included on the same "printed page" as the copyright notice for easier identification within third-party

archives.

Licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file except in compliance with the

License. You may obtain a copy of the License at

http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0

Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS

IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. See the License for

the specific language governing permissions and limitations under the License.

1-17

Legal and Safety Information > Notice

Energy Saving Control Function

The device comes equipped with a Sleep where printer and fax functions remain in a waiting state but power

consumption is reduced to a minimum after a certain amount of time elapses since the device was last used. If the

machine is not used while in sleep mode, the power automatically turns off.

Sleep (page 2-26)

Power Off Rule (models for Europe) (page 2-28)

Automatic 2-Sided Print Function

This device includes 2-sided printing as a standard function. For example, by printing two 1-sided originals onto a single

sheet of paper as a 2-sided print, it is possible to lower the amount of paper used.

Duplex (page 6-9)

Printing in duplex mode reduces paper consumption and contributes to the conservation of forest resources. Duplex

mode also reduces the amount of paper that must be purchased, and thereby reduces cost. It is recommended that

machines capable of duplex printing be set to use duplex mode by default.

Resource Saving - Paper

For the preservation and sustainable use of forest resources, it is recommended that recycled as well as virgin paper

certified under environmental stewardship initiatives or carrying recognised ecolabels, which meet EN 12281:2002* or

an equivalent quality standard, be used.

This machine also supports printing on 64 g/m2 paper. Using such paper containing less raw materials can lead to

further saving of forest resources.

* : EN12281:2002 "Printing and business paper - Requirements for copy paper for dry toner imaging processes"

Your sales or service representative can provide information about recommended paper types.

Environmental benefits of "Power Management"

To reduce power consumption when idle, this machine is equipped with a power management function that

automatically activates energy-saving mode when the machine is idle for a certain period of time.

Although it takes the machine a slight amount of time to return to READY mode when in energy-saving mode, a

significant reduction in energy consumption is possible. It is recommended that the machine be used with the activation

time for energy-saving mode set to the default setting.

Energy Star (ENERGY STAR®) Program

We have determined as a participating company in the International Energy Star Program that this

product is compliant with the standards laid out in the International Energy Star Program.

ENERGY STAR® is a voluntary energy efficiency program with the goal of developing and promoting the

use of products with high energy efficiency in order to help prevent global warming. By purchasing

ENERGY STAR® qualified products, customers can help reduce emissions of greenhouse gases during

product use and cut energy-related costs.

2-1

2 Installing and Setting

up the Machine

This chapter provides information for the administrator of this machine, such as part names, cable connection, and

software installation.

Part Names (Machine Exterior) ..................... 2-2

Part Names (Connectors/Interior) ................. 2-4

Part Names (With Optional Equipments

Attached) ....................................................... 2-6

Connecting the Machine and Other

Devices ......................................................... 2-7

Connecting Cables ........................................ 2-8

Connecting LAN Cable ....................... 2-8

Connecting USB Cable ....................... 2-9

Connecting the Power Cable .............. 2-9

Power On/Off .............................................. 2-10

Power On .......................................... 2-10

Power Off .......................................... 2-10

Using the Operation Panel ........................... 2-11

Operation Panel Keys ........................ 2-11

Operation Method ............................. 2-13

Check the original and paper settings 2-14

Help Screen ...................................... 2-14

Logout ............................................... 2-16

Default Settings of the Machine .................. 2-17

Setting Date and Time ...................... 2-17

Network Setup ............................................ 2-18

Configuring the Wired Network ......... 2-18

Configuring the Wireless Network .... 2-20

Setting Wi-Fi Direct ........................... 2-24

Energy Saver function ................................. 2-26

Sleep ................................................. 2-26

Auto Sleep ........................................ 2-27

Sleep Rules (models for Europe) ...... 2-27

Sleep Level (Energy Saver and

Quick Recovery) (models except for

Europe) ............................................. 2-28

Power Off Rule (models for

Europe) ............................................. 2-28

Quiet Mode ................................................. 2-29

Installing Software ....................................... 2-30

Software on DVD (Windows) ............ 2-30

Installing Software in Windows ......... 2-31

Uninstalling the Software .................. 2-37

Installing Software

in Mac Computer .............................. 2-38

Setting TWAIN Driver ........................ 2-40

Setting WIA Driver ............................ 2-42

Checking the Counter ................................. 2-43

Additional Preparations for

the Administrator ......................................... 2-44

Sending Documents to a PC ............. 2-44

Strengthening the Security ................ 2-44

Command Center RX .................................. 2-45

Accessing Command

Center RX ......................................... 2-46

Changing Security Settings .............. 2-47

Changing Device Information ........... 2-49

E-mail Settings .................................. 2-51

Registering Destinations ................... 2-55

Transferring Data from Our Other

Products ...................................................... 2-56

Migrating the Address Book .............. 2-56

2-2

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Part Names (Machine Exterior)

Part Names (Machine Exterior)

1 Document Processor

2 Inner Tray

3 Paper Stopper

4 Cassette 1

5 Power Switch

6 Front Cover Open Button

7 Original Eject Table

8 Original Stopper

9 Original Table

10 Original Width Guides

11 Slit Glass

12 Operation Panel

13 Platen

14 Original Size Indicator Plates

910

2-3

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Part Names (Machine Exterior)

15 Rear Cover

16 Anti-theft Lock Slot

2-4

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Part Names (Connectors/Interior)

Part Names (Connectors/Interior)

1 TEL Connector

2 LINE Connector

3 USB Interface Connector

4 Network Interface Connector

5 Feed Cover

6 Paper Length Guide

7 Paper Width Guides

8 USB Memory Slot

9 Multipurpose Tray

10 Tray Extension

11 Paper Width Guides

12 Fuser Cover

1 2

910

2-5

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Part Names (Connectors/Interior)

13 Toner Container Release Button

14 Toner Container

2-6

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Part Names (With Optional Equipments Attached)

Part Names (With Optional Equipments

Attached)

1 Cassette 2

2 Cassette 3

Optional Equipment (page 11-2)

2-7

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Connecting the Machine and Other Devices

Connecting the Machine and Other Devices

Prepare the cables necessary to suit the environment and purpose of the machine use.

When Connecting the Machine to the PC via USB

When Connecting the Machine to the PC or Tablet by network cable, Wi-Fi, or Wi-Fi direct

Cables that Can Be Used

NOTE

If you are using wireless LAN, refer to the following.

Configuring the Wireless Network (page 2-20)

Connection Environment Function Necessary Cable

Connect a LAN cable to the

machine.

Printer/Scanner/Network FAX*1

*1 Only on products with the fax function installed.

LAN cable (10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX,

1000BASE-T)

Connect a USB cable to the

machine.

Printer/Scanner (TWAIN/WIA) USB 2.0 compatible cable (Hi-Speed USB

compliant, max. 5.0 m, shielded)

IMPORTANT

Using a cable other than a USB 2.0 compatible cable may cause failure.

USB

Tablet

Network cable

connection

Network

Wi-Fi access point

Wi-Fi

connection*1

Wi-Fi Direct

connection*1

*1 Only for models with Wi-Fi.

2-8

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Connecting Cables

Connecting Cables

Connecting LAN Cable

1Connect the cable to the machine.

1Connect the LAN cable to the network interface connector.

2Connect the other end of the cable to the hub or the PC.

2Power on the machine and configure the network.

IMPORTANT

Make sure that the power to the machine is turned off.

Power Off (page 2-10)

Network Setup (page 2-18)

2-9

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Connecting Cables

Connecting USB Cable

1Connect the cable to the machine.

1Connect the USB cable to the USB interface connector.

2Connect the other end of the cable to the PC.

2Power on the machine.

Connecting the Power Cable

1Connect the cable to the machine.

Connect one end of the supplied power cable to the machine and the other end to a power

outlet.

IMPORTANT

Make sure that the power to the machine is turned off.

Power Off (page 2-10)

IMPORTANT

Only use the power cable that comes with the machine.

2-10

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Power On/Off

Power On/Off

Power On

1Turn the power switch on.

Power Off

1Turn the power switch off.

The confirmation message for power supply off is displayed.

It takes about 3 minutes for power off.

Show PowerOffMsg (page 8-31)

CAUTION

If this machine will be left unused for an extended period (e.g. overnight), turn it off at the power switch. If the

machine will not be used for an even longer period of time (e.g. vacation), remove the power plug from the

outlet as a safety precaution.

IMPORTANT

• If using the products equipped with the fax function, note that turning the machine off at the power switch

disables fax transmission and reception.

• Remove paper from the cassettes and seal it in the paper storage bag to protect it from humidity.

2-11

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Using the Operation Panel

Using the Operation Panel

Operation Panel Keys

1[Status/Job Cancel] key: Displays the Status/Job Cancel screen.

2[Document Box/USB] key: Displays the Document Box/USB screen.

3[System Menu/Counter] key: Displays the System Menu/Counter screen.

4[FAX] key*1: Displays the FAX screen.

5[Send] key: Displays the screen for sending. You can change it to display the Address Book screen.

6 One Touch keys: Recalls the destination registered for One Touch Keys.

7[Wi-Fi] indicator*2: Blinks during Wi-Fi connection.

8 Select keys: Selects the menu displayed at the bottom of the message display.

9[Processing] indicator: Blinks while printing or sending/receiving.

10 [Memory] indicator: Blinks while the machine is accessing the machine memory or fax memory.

11 Message display: Displays the setting menu, machine status, and error messages.

12 [Wi-Fi Direct] key*2: Set Wi-Fi Direct, and show information necessary for connection and the connection status.

13 [On Hook] key*1: Switches between on-hook and off-hook when manually sending a FAX.

14 [Confirm/Add Destination] key: Confirms the destination or adds a destination.

15 [Address Recall/Pause] key*3: Calls the previous destination. Also used to enter a pause when entering a FAX

number.

16 [Address Book] key: Displays the Address Book screen.

17 [Copy] key: Displays the Copy screen.

*1 Only on products with the fax function installed.

*2 Only for models with Wi-Fi.

*3 The products without the fax function have the [Address Recall] key instead of the [Address Recall/Pause] key.

3 4 6 7 9 10

15 14 13 1216 11

2 5

2-12

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Using the Operation Panel

18 [Function Menu] key: Displays the function menu screen.

19 [Back] key: Returns to the previous display.

20 [Attention] indicator: Lights or blinks when an error occurs and a job is stopped.

21 Arrow keys: Increments or decrements numbers, or selects menu in the message display. In addition, moves the

cursor when entering the characters.

22 [OK] key: Finalizes a function or menu, and numbers that have been entered.

23 Numeric keys: Enter numbers and symbols.

24 [Stop] key: Cancels or pauses the job in progress.

25 [Start] key: Starts copying and scanning operations and processing for setting operations.

26 [Quiet Mode] key: Lower print speed for quiet processing.

27 [Authentication/Logout] key: Authenticates user, and exits the operation for the current user (i.e. log out).

28 [Energy Saver] key: Puts the machine into Sleep Mode. Recovers from Sleep if in Sleep Mode.

29 Program keys: Used to register or recall programs.

30 [Reset] key: Returns settings to their default states.

31 [Clear] key: Clears entered numbers and characters.

20 21, 22 23 25 26 27

3031

2-13

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Using the Operation Panel

Operation Method

This section explains how to operate the setting menus on the message display.

Displaying the Menus and Configuring Settings

Select the [System Menu/Counter] key or [Function Menu] key to display the setting menus. Select the [▲] key, [▼]

key, [◄] key, [►] key, [OK] key, or [Back] key to select a menu, and perform settings.

Sys. Menu/Count.:

User/Job Account

Exit

User Property

Common Settings

Language:

English

Deutsch

Francais

Language:

English

Deutsch

Francais

Common Settings:

Language

Exit

Default Screen

Sound

Sys. Menu/Count.:

System/Network

Exit

Counter

01 Report

Select the [System Menu/Counter] key or

[Function Menu] key to display the setting

menus.

The directions of usable arrow

keys are shown on the screen

displayed.

When the [▲] or [▼] key is

selected, the selection moves

line by line.

When the [◄] or [►] key is

selected, the selection moves in

units of one page.

When [OK] is displayed, select

the [OK] key to confirm the

selection.

Select the [OK] key to display

the selected menu.

The selected item is displayed with

[*] (asterisk) at the beginning.

Select the [OK] key to confirm

the selected setting.

When the [▲] or [▼] key is

selected, the selection moves

line by line.

Select the [Back] key to return to

the screen one level higher.

Setting menus

Normal screen

Exiting the menu operation

When [Exit] is displayed, select [Exit] to exit

the setting menu and return to the normal

screen.

Sys. Menu/Count.:

System/Network

Exit

Counter

01 Report

Ready to copy.

A4 A4

Zoom Paper

Copies

100%

2-14

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Using the Operation Panel

Check the original and paper settings

The current original and paper settings are displayed.

The copy screen is used here as an example.

Help Screen

If you have difficulty operating the machine, you can check how to operate it using the operation panel.

When [Help] is displayed on the message display, select [Help] to display the Help screen. The Help screen shows

machine operation.

Select the [▼] key to display the next step or select the [▲] key to display the previous step.

Select the [OK] key to exit the Help screen.

NOTE

• You can select the [Function Menu] key to configure original and paper settings.

Paper Selection (page 6-8)

Original Size (page 6-16)

Original Orientation (page 6-16)

• You can register frequently used functions in Select keys.

Select Key Set. (page 8-32)

Select Key Set. (page 8-35)

Ready to copy.

A4 A4

Zoom Paper

Copies

100%

1 Original size

2 Original orientation

3 Paper source

4 Paper size

5 Paper orientation

Ready to copy.

A4 A4

Zoom Paper

Copies

100%

6[Function Menu] key

7 Select keys

Paper

jammed in

Cassette 1.

Help

JAM****

CorrectiveAction:

Detach Cassette 1.

Remove paper jam.

Reattach Cassette 1.

2-15

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Login/Logout

If you are setting a function that requires administrator rights, or if user login administration is enabled, you must enter

your login user name and login password.

1Enter the login user name.

1If the login screen is displayed during operations, select "Login User Name" and select the

[OK] key.

2Enter the login user name using the numeric keys and select the [OK] key.

2Enter the login password.

1Select "Login Password" and select the [OK] key.

2Enter the login password and select the [OK] key.

3Select [Login].

NOTE

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

You will be unable to login if you forget your login user name or login password. In this event, login with administrator

privileges and change your login user name or login password.

NOTE

• If [Netwk Authentic.] is selected as the user authentication method, [Menu] is

displayed. Select [Menu] and select [Login Type] and then it is possible to select the

authentication destination as [Local Authentic.] or [Netwk Authentic.].

•Select [Menu] and select [Domain] and then it is possible to select from the domains

registered.

NOTE

If Login Operation is [Select Character], then the screen is displayed to enter details by

selecting from the characters on the message display.

Function Defaults (page 8-28)

Character Entry Method (page 11-8)

Model Name Login User Name Login Password

ECOSYS M2135dn/ECOSYS M2635dn/

ECOSYS M2635dw

3500 3500

ECOSYS M2040dn/ECOSYS M2540dn/

ECOSYS M2540dw

4000 4000

2-16

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Login/Logout

Logout

To logout from the machine, select the [Authentication/Logout] key to return to the login user

name/login password entry screen.

Users are automatically logged out in the following circumstances:

• When the machine enters the sleep state.

• When the auto panel reset function is activated.

2-17

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Default Settings of the Machine

Default Settings of the Machine

Before using this machine, configure such settings as date and time, network configuration, and energy saving functions

as needed.

Setting Date and Time

Follow the steps below to set the local date and time at the place of installation.

When you send an E-mail using the transmission function, the date and time as set here will be printed in the header of

the E-mail message. Set the date, time and time difference from GMT of the region where the machine is used.

1Display the screen.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Common Settings] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key >

[Date Setting] > [OK] key

2Configure the settings.

[▲] [▼] key > [Time Zone] > [OK] key > Select the time zone > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key >

[Date/Time] > [OK] key > Set the date/time > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Date Format] >

[OK] key > Select the Date Format > [OK] key

NOTE

The default settings of the machine can be changed in System Menu.

For settings that are configurable from System Menu, refer to the following:

Setup and Registration (System Menu) (page 8-1)

NOTE

• If user login administration is enabled, you can only change the settings by logging in with administrator privileges.

If user login administration is disabled, the user authentication screen appears. Enter a login user name and

password, and select [Login].

• The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

• Be sure to set the time difference before setting the date and time.

• The correct time can be periodically set by obtaining the time from the network time server.

Command Center RX User Guide

Item Description

Time Zone Set the time difference from GMT. Choose the nearest listed location from

the list. If you select a region that utilizes summer time, configure settings

for summer time.

Date/Time Set the date and time for the location where you use the machine. If you

perform Send as E-mail, the date and time set here will be displayed on

the header.

Value: Year (2000 to 2037), Month (1 to 12), Day (1 to 31),

Hour (00 to 23), Minute (00 to 59), Second (00 to 59)

Date Format Select the display format of year, month, and date. The year is displayed

in Western notation.

Value: Month/Day/Year, Day/Month/Year, Year/Month/Day

Model Name Login User Name Login Password

ECOSYS M2135dn/ECOSYS M2635dn/

ECOSYS M2635dw

3500 3500

ECOSYS M2040dn/ECOSYS M2540dn/

ECOSYS M2540dw

4000 4000

2-18

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Network Setup

Network Setup

Configuring the Wired Network

The machine is equipped with network interface, which is compatible with network protocols such as TCP/IP (IPv4),

TCP/IP (IPv6), NetBEUI, and IPSec. It enables network printing on the Windows, Macintosh, UNIX and other platforms.

Set up TCP/IP (IPv4) to connect to the Windows network.

Be sure to connect the network cable before configuring the settings.

Connecting LAN Cable (page 2-8)

For other network settings, refer to the following:

Network Setting (page 8-7)

IPv4 setting

1Display the screen.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [] key > [System/Network] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key >

[Network Setting] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key > [Wired Netwk. Set] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key >

[TCP/IP Settings] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key > [IPv4 Setting] > [OK] key

2Configure the settings.

When setting the static IP address

1[▲] [] key > [DHCP] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key > [Off] > [OK] key

2[▲] [] key > [IP Address] > [OK] key

NOTE

Select the [▲] or [▼] key to enter a number.

Select the [◄] or [►] key to move the position being entered, which is shown highlighted.

NOTE

If user login administration is enabled, you can only change the settings by logging in with administrator privileges.

If user login administration is disabled, the user authentication screen appears. Enter a login user name and

password, and select [Login].

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

Model Name Login User Name Login Password

ECOSYS M2135dn/ECOSYS M2635dn/

ECOSYS M2635dw

3500 3500

ECOSYS M2040dn/ECOSYS M2540dn/

ECOSYS M2540dw

4000 4000

2-19

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Network Setup

3Set the IP address.

4Select the [OK] key.

5[▲] [] key > [Subnet Mask] > [OK] key

6Set the subnet mask.

7Select the [OK] key.

8[▲] [] key > [Default Gateway] > [OK] key

9Set the default gateway.

10Select the [OK] key.

11[▲] [] key > [Auto-IP] > [OK] key

12[Off] > [OK] key

NOTE

You can set any value between 000 and 255.

Use the numeric keys or select the [▲] or [▼] key to enter a number.

Select the [◄] or [►] key to move the position being entered, which is shown highlighted.

NOTE

You can set any value between 000 and 255.

Use the numeric keys or select the [▲] or [▼] key to enter a number.

Select the [◄] or [►] key to move the position being entered, which is shown highlighted.

NOTE

You can set any value between 000 and 255.

Use the numeric keys or select the [▲] or [▼] key to enter a number.

Select the [◄] or [►] key to move the position being entered, which is shown highlighted.

IMPORTANT

After changing the setting, restart the network from System Menu, or turn the

machine OFF and then ON.

Restart Network (page 8-16)

NOTE

Ask your network administrator for the IP address in advance, and have it ready when you

configure this setting.

In the following cases, set the IP address of DNS server on the Command Center RX.

• When using the host name with "DHCP" setting set to "Off"

• When using the DNS server with IP address that is not assigned by DHCP automatically.

Setting the IP Address of the DNS Server, refer to the following:

Command Center RX User Guide

2-20

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Network Setup

Configuring the Wireless Network

Setting the Connection by Using the Wi-Fi Setup Tool

To send the Wi-Fi settings configured in the Wi-Fi Setup Tool to the machine, connect the computer or handheld device

with the machine locally. The connection methods are wired connection via LAN cable and wireless LAN connection (Wi-

Fi Direct).

Wired Connection by Using LAN Cable

1Connect the machine with a computer

1Connect the machine with a computer via LAN cable when the machine is powered on.

2Turn on the computer.

IP address (link local address) of the machine and computer is generated automatically.

When the wireless network function is available on the machine and the connection settings are configured, it is possible

to print or send in a wireless network (wireless LAN) environment. The configuration methods are as follows:

Configuration Method Description Reference Page

Configuring the Connection

from the Operation Panel

on This Machine

Use Wi-Fi Settings or Wireless Network to configure

the network in details from System menu.

Wi-Fi Settings (page 8-8)

Setting the Connection by

Using the Wi-Fi Setup Tool

This is the tool included in the Product Library. You

can configure the connection according to the

instructions provided by the wizard.

Setting the Connection by

Using the Wi-Fi Setup Tool

(page 2-20)

Configuring Connections

on the Web Page

The connection can be set from the Command

Center RX.

Command Center RX User

Guide

NOTE

On a model with a Wi-Fi function, change the settings in "Primary Network" appropriately if you switch to other than a

wired network interface.

Primary Network (page 8-16)

NOTE

• Before using the Wi-Fi Setup Tool, connect your computer to this machine locally with wired LAN cable or Wi-Fi

Direct.

• To use Wi-Fi Direct, confirm that the Wi-Fi Direct is enabled (Wi-Fi Direct is set to [On]) and Restart Network from

the operation panel, before your computer will be connected to this machine with Wi-Fi Direct.

• To use a wired LAN cable directly connected to the machine, the Auto-IP (Link-local) address will be assigned to the

machine and the computer. This machine applies Auto-IP as the default settings.

• Configure the settings on the operation panel if your computer supports WPS.

Wi-Fi Settings (page 8-8)

2-21

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Network Setup

2Insert the DVD.

3Display the screen.

4Select [Maintenance].

5[Wi-Fi Setup Tool] > [OK]

6Configure the settings.

1[Do not use automatic configuration] > [Next] > [Next]

2[Use LAN cable] > [Next] > [Next]

NOTE

• Installation on Windows must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges.

• If the "Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard" dialog box displays, select

[Cancel].

• If the autorun screen is displayed, click [Run setup.exe].

• If the user account management window appears, click [Yes] ([Allow]).

1Click [View License Agreement]

and read the License Agreement.

2Click [Accept].

2-22

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Network Setup

3[Easy setup] > [Next]

The machine is detected.

4Select the machine > [Next]

5Select [Use the device settings.] on [Authentication mode], and enter the login user

name and password. Login user name and Password are both Admin.

6Configure the communication settings > [Next]

7Change the settings of access point as necessary > [Next]

The network is configured.

Wireless LAN Connection by Using Wi-Fi Direct

1Display the screen.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [] key > [System/Network] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key >

[Network Setting] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key > [Wi-Fi Direct Set] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key >

[Wi-Fi Direct] > [OK] key

2Configure the settings.

[▲] [] key > [On] > [OK] key

3Restart the network.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [] key > [System/Network] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key >

[Network Setting] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key > [Restart Network] > [OK] key > [Yes]

4Connect a computer or a handheld device with the machine.

5Insert the DVD.

NOTE

• Only one machine can be searched using Wi-Fi Setup Tool. It may take times to search

the machine.

• If the machine is not detected, select [Advanced setup] > [Next]. Select [Express] or

[Custom] as device discovery method and specify the IP address or host name to

search the machine.

Setting Wi-Fi Direct (page 2-24)

NOTE

• Installation on Windows must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges.

• If the "Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard" dialog box displays, select

[Cancel].

• If the autorun screen is displayed, click [Run setup.exe].

• If the user account management window appears, click [Yes] ([Allow]).

2-23

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Network Setup

6Display the screen.

7Select [Maintenance].

8[Wi-Fi Setup Tool] > [OK]

9Configure the settings.

1[Do not use automatic configuration] > [Next] > [Next]

2[Wi-Fi Direct] > [Next] > [Next]

3[Advanced setup] > [Next]

Select [Express] or [Custom] as device discovery method and specify the IP address or

host name to search the machine.

4Select the machine > [Next]

5Select [Use the device settings.] on [Authentication mode], and enter the login user

name and password. Login user name and Password are both Admin.

6Configure the communication settings > [Next]

7Change the settings of access point as necessary > [Next]

The network is configured.

1Click [View License Agreement]

and read the License Agreement.

2Click [Accept].

2-24

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Network Setup

Setting Wi-Fi Direct

Configuring the Connection from the Operation Panel on This Machine

Connecting to Computers or Handheld Devices that Support Wi-Fi Direct

1Display the screen.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [] key > [System/Network] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key >

[Network Setting] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key > [Wi-Fi Direct Set] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key >

[Wi-Fi Direct] > [OK] key

2Configure the settings.

[▲] [] key > [On] > [OK] key

3Restart the network.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [] key > [System/Network] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key >

[Network Setting] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key > [Restart Network] > [OK] key > [Yes]

4Specify the machine name from the computer or handheld

device.

If a confirmation message appears on the operation panel of the machine, select [Yes].

The network between this machine and the handheld device is configured.

Connecting to Computers or Handheld Devices Unsupported Wi-Fi Direct

Here, we'll explain the procedures for connecting to iOS handheld devices.

1Display the screen.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [] key > [System/Network] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key >

[Network Setting] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key > [Wi-Fi Direct Set] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key >

[Wi-Fi Direct] > [OK] key

2Configure the settings.

[▲] [] key > [On] > [OK] key

3Restart the network.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [] key > [System/Network] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key >

[Network Setting] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key > [Restart Network] > [OK] key > [Yes]

4[Wi-Fi Direct] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Detail Info] > [OK] key

5Note the network name (SSID), IP address, and password.

6Configure the handheld device.

1[Settings] > [Wi-Fi]

When the wireless network function is available on the machine, setting Wi-Fi Direct enables you to print from the Wi-Fi

Direct environment. The configuration methods are as follows:

2-25

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Network Setup

2Select the network name (SSID) appeared in step 5 from the list.

3Enter the password that was provided in step 5 > [Connect]

The network between this machine and the handheld device is configured.

Configuring the Connection by Using Push Button

When your computer or handheld device does not support Wi-Fi Direct but supports WPS, you can configure the

network using push button.

1Display the screen.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [] key > [System/Network] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key >

[Network Setting] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key > [Wi-Fi Direct Set] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key >

[Wi-Fi Direct] > [OK] key

2Configure the settings.

[▲] [] key > [On] > [OK] key

3Restart the network.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [] key > [System/Network] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key >

[Network Setting] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key > [Restart Network] > [OK] key > [Yes]

4[Wi-Fi Direct] key > [▲] [▼] key > [PushButton Setup] > [OK] key

5Press the push button on the computer or handheld device and

select [Push Button] on the screen of operation panel

simultaneously > [Next].

The network between this machine and the computer or handheld device is configured.

IMPORTANT

You can connect up to three handheld devices at the same time using Wi-Fi Direct setting. When the devices

that support Wi-Fi Direct are connected, if you want to connect other device, disconnect the already-

connected devices from the network. The disconnection methods are as follows:

• Disconnect the network from the computer or handheld computer

• Disconnecting all devices from the network on the operation panel

Select [Wi-Fi Direct] key > [▲] [▼] key > [ConnectionStatus] > [OK] key > [Menu] > [▲] [▼] key >

[Disconnect All] > [OK] key

• Configuring auto disconnecting time from the System menu

Wi-Fi Direct Set (page 8-7)

• Configuring auto disconnecting time from the Command Center RX

Command Center RX User Guide

2-26

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Energy Saver function

Energy Saver function

If a certain period of time elapses after the machine is last used, the machine automatically enters sleep mode, which

minimizes power consumption. If the machine is not used while in sleep mode, the power automatically turns off.

Sleep

To enter Sleep, select the [Energy Saver] key. Message display and all indicators on the operation panel will go out to

save a maximum amount of power except the Energy Saver indicator. This status is referred to as Sleep.

If print data is received during Sleep, the machine automatically wakes up and starts printing.

Also when fax data arrives while the machine is in Sleep, the machine automatically wakes up and starts printing.

To resume, perform the following actions.

• Select the [Energy Saver] key.

Recovery time from Sleep Mode is as follows.

• Within 10 seconds

Note that ambient environmental conditions, such as ventilation, may cause the machine to respond more slowly.

NOTE

If user login administration is enabled, you can only change the settings by logging in with administrator privileges.

If user login administration is disabled, the user authentication screen appears. Enter a login user name and

password, and select [Login].

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

Model Name Login User Name Login Password

ECOSYS M2135dn/ECOSYS M2635dn/

ECOSYS M2635dw

3500 3500

ECOSYS M2040dn/ECOSYS M2540dn/

ECOSYS M2540dw

4000 4000

Energy Saver indicator

2-27

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Energy Saver function

Auto Sleep

Auto Sleep automatically switches the machine into Sleep if left idle for a preset time.

The amount of time before entering Sleep is as follows.

• 1 minute (default setting)

To change the preset sleep time, refer to the following:

1Display the screen.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [] key > [Common Settings] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key >

[Timer Setting] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key > [Sleep Timer] > [OK] key

2Set the Sleep time.

1Enter the Sleep time.

2Select the [OK] key.

Sleep Rules (models for Europe)

You can set whether sleep mode operates for each function. When the machine enters sleep mode, the ID card cannot

be recognized.

For more information on Sleep Rules settings, refer to the following:

Sleep Rules (models for Europe) (page 8-26)

1Display the screen.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [] key > [Common Settings] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key >

[Timer Setting] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key > [Sleep Rules] > [OK] key

2Set the Sleep rule.

1Select the function to be set, and select the [OK] key.

[Card Reader] is displayed when the optional Card Authentication Kit is activated.

2[▲] [] key > [Off] or [On] > [OK] key

Repeat steps 2-1 to 2-2 to set for a different function.

NOTE

You can set any value below.

• For Europe: 1 to 120 minutes (1 minute increments)

• Except for Europe: 1 to 240 minutes

Use the numeric keys or select the [▲] or [▼] key to enter a number.

2-28

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Energy Saver function

Sleep Level (Energy Saver and Quick Recovery)

(models except for Europe)

For sleep level, you can toggle between the following two modes: Energy Saver mode and Quick Recovery mode. The

default setting is Energy Saver mode.

Energy Saver mode reduces power consumption even more than Quick Recovery mode, and allows Sleep Mode to be

set separately for each function. The ID card cannot be recognized.

To resume, select the [Energy Saver] key on the operation panel. If print data is received during Sleep, the machine

automatically wakes up and starts printing.

For more information on Sleep Level settings, refer to the following:

Sleep Level (models except for Europe) (page 8-26)

1Display the screen.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [] key > [Common Settings] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key >

[Timer Setting] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key > [Sleep Level] > [OK] key

2Select the Sleep level.

[▲] [] key > [Quick Recovery] or [Energy Saver] > [OK] key

When [Energy Saver] is set, next go on to set whether or not to use Energy Saver mode for

each function.

3Set the Sleep rule.

1Select the function to be set, and select the [OK] key.

[Card Reader] is displayed when the optional Card Authentication Kit is activated.

[FAX] is displayed only on products with the fax function installed.

2[▲] [] key > [Off] or [On] > [OK] key

Repeat steps 3-1 to 3-2 to set for a different function.

Power Off Rule (models for Europe)

The Power Off Rule is used to stop the power from automatically turning off.

The default preset time is 3 days.

For more information on Power Off Rule settings, refer to the following:

Power Off Rule (models for Europe) (page 8-27)

2-29

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Quiet Mode

Quiet Mode

Lower print speed for quiet processing. Select this mode when the running noise is uncomfortable.

When the [

Quiet Mode

] key is selected, the [

Quiet Mode

] key blinks and Quiet Mode is enabled.

NOTE

The processing speed will be slower than normal when in Quiet Mode.

[Quiet Mode] key

2-30

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software

Installing Software

Install appropriate software on your PC from the included DVD (Product Library) if you want to use the printer function of

this machine or perform TWAIN / WIA transmission or Network FAX transmission from your PC.

Software on DVD (Windows)

You can use either [

Express Install

] or [

Custom Install

] can be selected for the installation method. [

Express Install

] is

the standard installation method. To install components that cannot be installed by [

Express Install

], use [

Custom Install

For details on Custom Installation, refer to the following:

Custom Install (page 2-33)

Software Description Express

Install

KX DRIVER This driver enables files on a computer to be printed by the machine.

Multiple page description languages (PCL XL, KPDL, etc.) are supported by

a single driver. This printer driver allows you to take full advantage of the

features of the machine.

Use this driver to create PDF files.

KX XPS DRIVER This printer driver supports the XPS (XML Paper Specification) format

developed by Microsoft Corporation.

KPDL mini-driver/PCL mini-

driver

This is a Microsoft MiniDriver that supports PCL and KPDL. There are some

restrictions on the machine features and option features that can be used

with this driver.

FAX Driver This makes it possible to send a document created in a computer software

application as a fax via the machine.

Kyocera TWAIN Driver This driver enables scanning on the machine using a TWAIN-compliant

software application.

Kyocera WIA Driver WIA (Windows Imaging Acquisition) is a function of Windows that enables

reciprocal communication between an imaging device such as a scanner

and an image processing software application. An image can be acquired

using a WIA-compliant software application, which is convenient when a

TWAIN-compliant software application is not installed in the computer.

KYOCERA Net Viewer This is a utility that enables monitoring of the machine on the network. -

Status Monitor This is a utility that monitors the printer status and provides an ongoing

reporting function.

KYOCERA Net Direct Print This makes it possible to print a PDF file without starting Adobe Acrobat/

Reader.

FONTS These are display fonts that enable the machine's built-in fonts to be used in

a software application.

NOTE

• Installation on Windows must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges.

• Fax functionality can only be used on products equipped with fax capability.

• WIA Driver and KX XPS DRIVER cannot be installed on Windows XP.

2-31

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software

Installing Software in Windows

Express Install

The following procedure is an example for installing the software in Windows 8.1 using [Express Install].

For details on Custom Installation, refer to the following:

Custom Install (page 2-33)

1Insert the DVD.

2Display the screen.

3Select [Express Install].

NOTE

• Installation on Windows must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges.

• If the "Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard" dialog box displays, select

[Cancel].

• If the autorun screen is displayed, click [Run setup.exe].

• If the user account management window appears, click [Yes] ([Allow]).

1Click [View License Agreement]

and read the License Agreement.

2Click [Accept].

2-32

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software

4Install the software.

You can also select [Use host name for port name] and set to use the host name of the

standard TCP/IP port. (A USB connection cannot be used.)

IMPORTANT

If Wi-Fi or Wi-Fi Direct is enabled, be sure to specify the IP address for the port name.

Installation may fail if the host name is specified.

NOTE

• The machine cannot be detected unless it is on. If the computer fails to detect the

machine, verify that it is connected to the computer via a network or USB cable and that it

is turned on and click (Reload).

• If the Windows security window appears, click [Install this driver software anyway].

• To install Status Monitor on Windows versions preceding Windows 8, it is necessary to

install Microsoft .NET Framework 4.0 beforehand.

2-33

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software

5Finish the installation.

When "Your software is ready to use" appears, you can use the software. To print a test

page, click the "Print a test page" checkbox and select the machine.

Click [Finish] to exit the wizard.

If a system restart message appears, restart the computer by following the screen prompts.

This completes the printer driver installation procedure.

If you are installing the TWAIN driver, continue by configuring the following:

Custom Install

The following procedure is an example for installing the software in Windows 8.1 using [Custom Install].

1Insert the DVD.

NOTE

When you have selected [Device settings] in Windows XP, the dialog box for device setting

will appear after [Finish] is clicked. Configure the settings for options installed on the

machine. Device settings can be configured after the installation is completed.

Printer Driver User Guide

Setting TWAIN Driver (page 2-40)

NOTE

• Installation on Windows must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges.

• If the "Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard" dialog box displays, select

[Cancel].

• If the autorun screen is displayed, click [Run setup.exe].

• If the user account management window appears, click [Yes] ([Allow]).

2-34

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software

2Display the screen.

3Select [Custom Install].

4Install the software.

1Select the device to be installed.

IMPORTANT

If Wi-Fi or Wi-Fi Direct is enabled, be sure to specify the IP address for the port

name. Installation may fail if the host name is specified.

NOTE

• The machine cannot be detected unless it is on. If the computer fails to detect the

machine, verify that it is connected to the computer via a network or USB cable and

that it is turned on and click (Reload).

• If the desired device does not appear, select [Add custom device] to directly select

the device.

1 Click [View License Agreement]

and read the License Agreement.

2 Click [Accept].

2-35

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software

2Select the driver to be installed.

3Click [Utility] tab and select the utility to be installed.

4Click [Install].

2-36

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software

5Finish the installation.

When "Your software is ready to use" appears, you can use the software. To print a test

page, click the "Print a test page" checkbox and select the machine.

Click [Finish] to exit the wizard.

If a system restart message appears, restart the computer by following the screen prompts.

This completes the printer driver installation procedure.

If you are installing the TWAIN driver, continue by configuring the following:

NOTE

To install Status Monitor on Windows versions preceding Windows 8, it is necessary to

install Microsoft .NET Framework 4.0 beforehand.

NOTE

When you have selected [Device settings] in Windows XP, the dialog box for device setting

will appear after [Finish] is clicked. Configure the settings for options installed on the

machine. Device settings can be configured after the installation is completed.

Printer Driver User Guide

Setting TWAIN Driver (page 2-40)

2-37

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software

Uninstalling the Software

Perform the following procedure to delete the Software from your computer.

1Display the screen.

Click [Search] in charms, and enter "Uninstall Kyocera Product Library" in the search box.

Select [Uninstall Kyocera Product Library] in the search list.

2Uninstall the software.

Place a check in the check box of the software to be deleted.

3Finish uninstalling.

If a system restart message appears, restart the computer by following the screen prompts.

This completes the software uninstallation procedure.

NOTE

Uninstallation on Windows must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges.

NOTE

In Windows 7, click [Start] button on the Windows and then select [All Programs],

[Kyocera], and [Uninstall Kyocera Product Library] to display the Uninstall Wizard.

NOTE

The software can also be uninstalled using the Product Library.

In the Product Library screen, click [Uninstall], and follow the on-screen instructions to

uninstall the software.

2-38

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software

Installing Software in Mac Computer

The machine's printer functionality can be used by a Mac computer.

1Insert the DVD.

Double-click the [Kyocera] icon.

2Display the screen.

Double-click [Kyocera OS X x.x] depending on your Mac OS version.

3Install the Printer Driver.

Install the printer driver as directed by the instructions in the installation software.

This completes the printer driver installation.

If a USB connection is used, the machine is automatically recognized and connected.

If an IP connection is used, the settings below are required.

NOTE

• Installation on Mac OS must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges.

• When printing from a Macintosh computer, set the machine's emulation to [KPDL] or [KPDL(Auto)].

Printer (page 8-33)

• If connecting by Bonjour, enable Bonjour in the machine's network settings.

Bonjour (page 8-12)

• In the Authenticate screen, enter the name and password used to log in to the operating system.

• When printing via AirPrint, you do not have to install the software.

2-39

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software

4Configure the printer.

1Open System Preferences and add the printer.

Select [

Default

] and click the item that appears in "Name" and then select the driver in

"Use".

3Select the options available for the machine.

4The selected machine is added.

NOTE

When using

an IP

connection,

click the IP icon for an IP connection and then enter the

host name or IP address.

The number entered in "Address" will automatically appear in

"Name". Change if needed.

2-40

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software

Setting TWAIN Driver

1Display the screen.

1Click [Search] in charms, and enter "TWAIN Driver Setting" in the search box. Select

[TWAIN Driver Setting] in the search list.

2Click [Add].

2Configure TWAIN Driver.

NOTE

In Windows 7, select [Start] button on the Windows, [All Programs], [Kyocera] and then

[TWAIN Driver Setting]. TWAIN Driver screen appears.

1 Enter the machine name.

2 Select this machine from the list.

3 Enter the machine's IP address or host

name.

4 Set units of measurement.

5 When using SSL, select the checkbox

beside SSL.

6 Click [OK].

1 Enter the machine name.

2 Select this machine from the list.

3 Set units of measurement.

4 Set Compression Level.

5 Click [OK].

NOTE

When the machine's IP address or host name is unknown, contact Administrator.

(Network)

(USB)

2-41

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software

3Finish registering.

NOTE

Click [Delete] to delete the added machine. Click [Edit] to change names.

2-42

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software

Setting WIA Driver

1Display the screen.

1Click [Search] in charms, and enter "View scanners and cameras" in the search box.

Select [View scanners and cameras] in the search list then the Scanners and Cameras

screen appears.

2Select the same name as this machine from WIA Drivers, and click [Properties].

2Configure WIA Driver.

NOTE

In Windows 7, click [Start] button on the Windows and enter [Scanner] in [Program and

File Search]. Click [View scanners and cameras] in the search list then the Scanners

and Cameras screen appears.

1 Click the [Settings] tab.

2 Enter the machine IP addresses or host

name.

3 When using SSL, select the checkbox

beside SSL.

4 Set units of measurement.

5 Click [OK].

1 Click the [Settings] tab.

2 Set the Compression Level.

3 Set units of measurement.

4 Click [OK].

(Network) (USB)

2-43

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Checking the Counter

Checking the Counter

Check the number of sheets printed and scanned.

1Display the screen.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Counter] > [OK] key

2Check the counter.

Select the item you want to check, and select the [OK] key.

2-44

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Additional Preparations for the Administrator

Additional Preparations for the Administrator

In addition to the information provided in this chapter, the administrator of this machine should check the following, and

configure the settings as needed.

Sending Documents to a PC

To Send to a Shared Folder (Send to Folder (SMB))

To send a document that has been loaded, you need to create a shared folder to receive the document on your computer.

Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC (page 3-8)

To E-mail Scanned Images (Send as E-mail)

You can send a scanned original image as an E-mail attachment.

E-mail Settings (page 2-51)

Strengthening the Security

This machine is shipped with two default users registered one with Machine Administrator rights, and another with

Administrator rights.Logging in as this user will allow you to configure all settings; therefore, please change the login

user name and password.

In addition, this machine is equipped with user authentication function, which can be configured to limit the access to this

machine to only those who have a registered login name and password.

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) (page 9-1)

I want to... Function Reference page

Restrict the users of the machine. User Login page 9-2

Auto Panel Reset page 8-26

ID Card Settings*1

*1 The optional Card Authentication Kit is required.

page 9-20

Restrict the basic functions that can be used. Group Authorization Set. page 9-15

Prevent the data stored in the machine from

being leaked.

PDF Encryption Functions page 6-26

Protect the transmission from interception and

wiretapping.

IPP over SSL page 8-14

HTTPS page 8-14

LDAP Security Refer to the

Command Center

RX User Guide.

SMTP Security Refer to the

Command Center

RX User Guide.

POP3 Security Refer to the

Command Center

RX User Guide.

FTP Encrypted TX page 6-29

IPSec page 8-12

SNMPv3 page 8-12

2-45

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Command Center RX

Command Center RX

If the machine is connected to the network, you can configure various settings using Command Center RX.

This section explains how to access Command Center RX, and how to change security settings and the host name.

Command Center RX User Guide

Settings that the administrator and general users can configure in Command Center RX are as follows.

NOTE

To fully access the features of the Command Center RX pages, enter the User Name and Password and click [Login].

Entering the predefined administrator password allows the user to access all pages, including Document Box,

Address Book, and Settings on the navigation menu. The factory default setting for the default user with administrator

privileges is shown below. (Upper case and lower case letters are distinguished (case sensitive).)

Setting Description Administ-

rator

General

User

Device

Information

The machine's structure can be checked.

Job Status Displays all device information, including print and scan jobs, storing jobs,

scheduled jobs, and job log history.

Document Box Configures settings related to the Job Box. -

Address Book Create, edit, or delete addresses and address groups. *1

*1 The logged in user may not be able to configure some settings, depending on the permissions of the user.

Device Settings Configure the advanced settings of the machine. -

Function Settings Configure the advanced function settings. -

Network Settings Configure the network advanced settings. -

Security Settings Configure the security advanced settings. -

Management

Settings

Configure the advanced management settings. -

NOTE

• FAX functions are available only on products with the fax function installed.

• Here, information on the FAX settings has been omitted.

FAX Operation Guide

2-46

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Command Center RX

Accessing Command Center RX

1Display the screen.

1Launch your Web browser.

2In the address or location bar, enter the machine's IP address or the host name.

Click in the following order to check the machine's IP address and the host name.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Report] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Report Print] >

[OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Status Page] > [OK] key > [Yes]

Examples: https://192.168.48.21/ (for IP address)

https://MFP001 (if the host name is "MFP001")

The web page displays basic information about the machine and Command Center RX as well

as their current status.

2Configure the function.

Select a category from the navigation bar on the left of the screen.

NOTE

If the screen "There is a problem with this website's security certificate." is displayed,

configure the certificate.

Command Center RX User Guide

You can also continue the operation without configuring the certificate.

NOTE

To fully access the features of the Command Center RX pages, enter the User Name and

Password and click [Login]. Entering the predefined administrator password allows the user

to access all pages, including Document Box, Address Book, and Settings on the navigation

menu. The factory default setting for the default user with administrator privileges is shown

below. (Upper case and lower case letters are distinguished (case sensitive).)

2-47

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Command Center RX

Changing Security Settings

1Display the screen.

1Launch your Web browser.

2In the address or location bar, enter the machine's IP address or the host name.

Click in the following order to check the machine's IP address and the host name.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Report] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Report Print] >

[OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Status Page] > [OK] key > [Yes]

3Log in with administrator privileges.

The factory default setting for the default user with administrator privileges is shown below. (Upper

case and lower case letters are distinguished (case sensitive).)

4Click [Security Settings].

2-48

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Command Center RX

2Configure the Security Settings.

From the [Security Settings] menu, select the setting you want to configure.

NOTE

For details on settings related to certificates, refer to the following:

Command Center RX User Guide

2-49

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Command Center RX

Changing Device Information

1Display the screen.

1Launch your Web browser.

2In the address or location bar, enter the machine's IP address or the host name.

Click in the following order to check the machine's IP address and the host name.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Report] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Report Print] >

[OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Status Page] > [OK] key > [Yes]

3Log in with administrator privileges.

The factory default setting for the default user with administrator privileges is shown below. (Upper

case and lower case letters are distinguished (case sensitive).)

4From the [Device Settings] menu, click [System].

2-50

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Command Center RX

2Specify the host name.

Enter the device information, and then click [Submit].

IMPORTANT

After changing the setting, restart the network or turn the machine OFF and then ON.

To restart the network, click [Reset] in the [Management Settings] menu, and then

click [Restart Network] in "Restart".

2-51

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Command Center RX

E-mail Settings

By configuring the SMTP settings, it is possible to send the images scanned by the machine as E-mail attachments and

to send E-mail notices when jobs have been completed.

To use this function, this machine must be connected to a mail server using the SMTP protocol.

In addition, configure the following.

•SMTP settings

Item: "SMTP Protocol" and "SMTP Server Name" in "SMTP"

• The sender address when the machine sends E-mails

Item: "Sender Address" in "E-mail Send Settings"

• The setting to limit the size of E-mails

Item: "E-mail Size Limit" in "E-mail Send Settings"

The procedure for specifying the SMTP settings is explained below.

1Display the screen.

Display the SMTP Protocol screen.

1Launch your Web browser.

2In the address or location bar, enter the machine's IP address or the host name.

Click in the following order to check the machine's IP address and the host name.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Report] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Report Print] >

[OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Status Page] > [OK] key > [Yes]

3Log in with administrator privileges.

The factory default setting for the default user with administrator privileges is shown below. (Upper

case and lower case letters are distinguished (case sensitive).)

2-52

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Command Center RX

4From the [Network Settings] menu, click [Protocol].

2Configure the settings.

Set "SMTP (E-mail TX)" to [On] in the "Send Protocols".

2-53

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Command Center RX

3Display the screen.

Display the E-mail Settings screen.

From the [Function Settings] menu, click [E-mail].

2-54

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Command Center RX

4Configure the settings.

Enter "SMTP" and "E-mail Send Settings" items.

5Click [Submit].

Setting Description

SMTP Set to send e-mail from the machine.

SMTP Protocol Displays the SMTP protocol settings. Check that "SMTP

Protocol" is set to [On]. If [Off] is set, click [Protocol] and set

the SMTP protocol to [On].

SMTP Server Name*1

*1 Be sure to enter the items.

Enter the host name or IP address of the SMTP server.

SMTP Port Number Specify the port number to be used for SMTP. The default port

number is 25.

SMTP Server Timeout Set the amount of time to wait before time-out in seconds.

Authentication

Protocol

To use SMTP authentication, enter the user information for

authentication.

SMTP Security Set SMTP security.

Turn on "SMTP Security" in "SMTP (E-mail TX)" on the

[Protocol Settings] page.

Connection Test Tests to confirm that the E-mail function is operating under the

settings without sending a mail.

Domain Restriction To restrict the domains, click the [Domain List] and enter the

domain names of addresses to be allowed or rejected.

Restriction can also be specified by e-mail address.

POP3 POP3 Protocol You don't need to set the following items when you only

enable the function of sending e-mail from the machine. Set

the following items if you want to enable the function of

receiving e-mail on the machine.

Command Center RX User Guide

Check Interval

Run once now

Domain Restriction

POP3 User Settings

E-mail

Send

Settings

E-mail Size Limit Enter the maximum size of E-mail that can be sent in

kilobytes. When E-mail size is greater than this value, an error

message appears and E-mail sending is cancelled. Use this

setting if you have set E-mail Size Limit for SMTP server. If

not, enter a value of 0 (zero) to enable E-mail sending

regardless of the size limit.

Sender Address*1 Specify the sender address for when the machine sends E-

mails, such as the machine administrator, so that a reply or

non-delivery report will go to a person rather than to the

machine. The sender address must be entered correctly for

SMTP authentication. The maximum length of the sender

address is 128 characters.

Signature Enter the signature. The signature is free form text that will

appear at the end of the E-mail body. It is often used for

further identification of the machine. The maximum length of

the signature is 512 characters.

Function Defaults Change the function default settings in [Common/Job

Default Settings] page.

2-55

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Command Center RX

Registering Destinations

1Display the screen.

1Launch your Web browser.

2In the address or location bar, enter the machine's IP address or the host name.

Click in the following order to check the machine's IP address and the host name.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Report] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Report Print] >

[OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Status Page] > [OK] key > [Yes]

3Log in with administrator privileges.

The factory default setting for the default user with administrator privileges is shown below. (Upper

case and lower case letters are distinguished (case sensitive).)

4From the [Address Book] menu, click [Machine Address Book].

5Click [Add].

2Populate the fields.

1Enter the destination information.

Enter the information for the destination you want to register. The fields to populate are the same as

when registering via operation panel.

2Click [Submit].

Registering Destinations in the Address Book (page 3-18)

2-56

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Transferring Data from Our Other Products

Transferring Data from Our Other Products

By using the machine's utility, you can smoothly migrate address books when the machine is to be replaced.

This section explains how to transfer data between our products.

Migrating the Address Book

The Address Book registered on the machine can be backed up or migrated using the KYOCERA Net Viewer on the

included DVD.

For details on operating the KYOCERA Net Viewer, refer to the following:

KYOCERA Net Viewer User Guide

Backing Up Address Book Data to PC

1Launch the KYOCERA Net Viewer.

2Create a backup.

1Right-click on the model name from which you want to back up the Address Book, and

select [Advanced] - [Set multiple devices].

2Select [Custom Mode] and click [Next].

2-57

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Transferring Data from Our Other Products

3Select destination device group and click [Next].

4Select [Device Address Book] and click [Next].

5Select [Create from device] and remove the checkmark from [Overwrite settings on

target device], and then click [Next].

2-58

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Transferring Data from Our Other Products

6Select the model you want to back up, and click [Next].

7Click on [Save to file].

8Specify the location to save the file, enter the file name, and then click [Save].

For "Save as type", make sure to select "XML File".

NOTE

If the "Admin Login" screen appears, enter the "Admin Login" and "Login Password", and

then click [OK]. The default settings are as follows (Upper case and lower case letters

are distinguished (case sensitive)).

2-59

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Transferring Data from Our Other Products

9After saving the file, always click [Cancel] to close the screen.

Please note that selecting [Finish] will write the data to the machine's Address Book.

Writing Address Book Data to the Machine

1Launch the KYOCERA Net Viewer.

2Load the Address Book data.

1Right-click on the model name to which you want to transfer the Address Book, and select

[Advanced] - [Set multiple devices].

2Select [Custom Mode] and click [Next].

2-60

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Transferring Data from Our Other Products

3Select destination device group and click [Next].

4Select [Device Address Book] and click [Next].

5Select [Create from file] and remove the checkmark from [Overwrite settings on target

device], and then click [Next].

Selecting the [Overwrite settings on target device] checkbox will overwrite the machine's

Address Book from entry No.1.

2-61

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Transferring Data from Our Other Products

6Click [Browse] and select the backup Address Book file, and then click [Next].

7Click [Finish].

The write process of the Address Book data starts.

8Once the write process is complete, click [Close].

3-1

Preparation before Use

This chapter explains the following operations.

Loading Paper .................................................................................................................................................... 3-2

Precaution for Loading Paper .................................................................................................................. 3-2

Selecting the Paper Feeder Units ............................................................................................................ 3-3

Loading in the Cassette ........................................................................................................................... 3-4

Precautions for Outputting Paper ....................................................................................................................... 3-7

Paper Stopper .......................................................................................................................................... 3-7

Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC ..................................................................... 3-8

Making a note of the computer name and full computer name ................................................................ 3-8

Making a note of the user name and domain name ................................................................................ 3-9

Creating a Shared Folder, Making a Note of a Shared Folder ............................................................... 3-10

Configuring Windows Firewall ............................................................................................................... 3-13

Registering Destinations in the Address Book ................................................................................................. 3-18

Adding a Destination (Address Book) .................................................................................................... 3-18

Adding a Destination on One Touch Key (One Touch Key) ................................................................... 3-25

3-2

Preparation before Use > Loading Paper

Loading Paper

Precaution for Loading Paper

When you open a new package of paper, fan the sheets to separate them slightly prior to loading in the following steps.

Fan the paper, then tap it on a level surface.

In addition, note the following points.

• If the paper is curled or folded, straighten it before loading. Paper that is curled or folded

may cause a jam.

• Avoid exposing opened paper to high humidity as dampness can be a cause of problems.

Seal any remaining paper after loading in the multipurpose tray or cassettes back in the

paper storage bag.

• If the machine will not be used for a prolonged period, protect all paper from humidity by

removing it from the cassettes and sealing it in the paper storage bag.

IMPORTANT

If you copy onto used paper (paper already used for printing), do not use paper that is

stapled or clipped together. This may damage the machine or cause poor image

quality.

NOTE

If you use special paper such as letterhead, paper with holes or paper with pre-prints like

logo or company name, refer to the following:

Paper (page 11-13)

3-3

Preparation before Use > Loading Paper

Selecting the Paper Feeder Units

Select the paper feeder units according to the size and type of paper.

No. Name Paper Size Paper Type Capacity Page

1Cassette 1 A4, B5, A5-R, A5, A6, Legal,

Oficio II, Letter, Executive,

Statement, Folio, 16K,

216mm×340mm, B5(ISO), Custom

Plain, Preprinted, Bond, Recycled,

Vellum, Rough, Letterhead, Color,

Prepunched, Thick, High Quality,

Custom 1 to 8

250 sheets

(80 g/m2)

page 3-4

2Cassette 2

3Cassette 3

NOTE

• The number of sheets that can be held varies depending on your environment and paper type.

• You should not use inkjet printer paper or any paper with a special surface coating. (Such paper may cause paper

jams or other faults.)

3-4

Preparation before Use > Loading Paper

Loading in the Cassette

Load paper in the cassettes. The procedures here represent the cassette 1.

1Pull the cassette completely out of the machine.

2Adjust the paper length guide to the paper size required.

NOTE

If the bottom plate is up, press the bottom plate down until it locks.

3-5

Preparation before Use > Loading Paper

When using Folio, Oficio II or Legal

Adjust the position of the paper width guides located on the left

and right sides of the Cassette.

Load paper.

IMPORTANT

• Load the paper with the print side facing down.

• After removing new paper from its packaging, fan the paper before loading it in the

multipurpose tray.

Precaution for Loading Paper (page 3-2)

• Before loading the paper, be sure that it is not curled or folded. Paper that is curled

or folded may cause paper jams.

• Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the level indicator (see illustration

above).

• If paper is loaded without adjusting the paper length guide and paper width guide,

the paper may skew or become jammed.

3-6

Preparation before Use > Loading Paper

5Gently push the Cassette 1 back in.

6Display the screen.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Common Settings] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key >

[Orig./Paper Set.] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Cassette 1 (to3) Set.] > [OK] key

7Configure the function.

Select the paper size and paper type.

IMPORTANT

Push all cassettes all the way in. Paper jams may result if a cassette is not pushed all

the way in.

NOTE

There is a paper gauge on the left side of the front of the cassette to indicate the remaining

paper supply.

Cassette 1 (to 3) Set. (page 8-21)

3-7

Preparation before Use > Precautions for Outputting Paper

Precautions for Outputting Paper

Paper Stopper

When using paper A4/Letter or larger, open the paper stopper shown in the figure.

3-8

Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC

Preparation for Sending a Document to a

Shared Folder in a PC

Check the information that needs to be set on the machine and create a folder to receive the document on your

computer. Screens of Windows 8.1 are used in the following explanation. The details of the screens will vary in other

versions of Windows.

Making a note of the computer name and full

computer name

Check the name of the computer name and full computer name.

1Display the screen.

In Windows 8.1, right-click [PC] in the Start screen and select [Properties]. Or, right-click the

Window icon and select [System].

In Windows 8, select the desktop in the Start screen, right-click [Computer] from [Libraries],

and then select [Properties].

2Check the computer name.

Check the computer name and full computer name.

Screen example:

Computer name: PC001

Full computer name: PC001.abcdnet.com

Windows XP:

If the full computer name does not have a dot (.), the full computer name and the computer

name are the same.

If the full computer name has a dot (.), the text string in front of the dot (.) in the full computer

name is the computer name.

Example: PC001.abcdnet.com

PC001 is the computer name

PC001.abcdnet.com is the full computer name

After checking the computer name, click the [Close] button to close the

"System Properties" screen.

In Windows XP, after checking the computer name, click the [Cancel] button to close the

"System Properties" screen.

NOTE

Log on to Windows with administrator privileges.

NOTE

In Windows XP, right-click [My Computer] and select [Properties]. The [System

Properties] dialog box appears. Click the [Computer Name] tab in the window that

appears.

In Windows 7, from [Start] button on the Windows, select [Computer] and then [System

Properties].

In Windows 10, right-click [Start] button on the Windows and select [System].

3-9

Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC

Making a note of the user name and domain name

Check the domain name and user name for logging onto Windows.

1Display the screen.

Click [Search] in charms, and enter "Command Prompt" in the search box. Select [Command

Prompt] in the search list.

In Windows 7, from [Start] button on the Windows, select [All Programs] (or [Programs]),

[Accessories] and then [Command Prompt].

In Windows 10, right-click [Start] button on the Windows and select [Command Prompt].

The Command Prompt window appears.

2Check the domain name and user name.

At the Command Prompt, enter "net config workstation" and then press [Enter].

Check the user name and domain name.

Screen example:

User Name: james.smith

Domain Name: ABCDNET

3-10

Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC

Creating a Shared Folder, Making a Note of a Shared

Folder

Create a shared folder to receive the document in the destination computer.

1Create a folder.

Create a folder on your computer.

For example, create a folder with the name "scannerdata" on the desktop.

NOTE

If there is a workgroup in System Properties, configure the settings below to limit folder access to a specific user or group.

1Select [Settings] in charms on Desktop, and select [Control Panel], [Appearance and

Personalization], and then [Folder Options].

In Windows XP, click [My Computer] and select [Folder Options] in [Tools].

In Windows 7, from [Start] button on the Windows, select [Control Panel], [Appearance

and Personalization], and then [Folder Options].

In Windows 10, open up a window in File Explorer and select [View], [Options], and then

[Folder Options].

Remove the checkmark from [Use Sharing Wizard (Recommended)] in "Advanced

settings".

In Windows XP, click the [View] tab and remove the checkmark from

[Use Simple File Sharing (Recommended)] in "Advanced settings".

Make sure that the [View] tab is selected.

3-11

Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC

2Configure permission settings.

1Right-click the "scannerdata" folder, select [Property], and click [Sharing] and

[Advanced Sharing].

In Windows XP, right-click the "scannerdata" folder and select [Sharing and Security] (or

[Sharing]).

2Select the [Share this folder] checkbox and click the [Permissions] button.

In Windows XP, select [Share this folder] and click the [Permissions] button.

3Make a note of the [Share name].

4Click the [Add] button.

3-12

Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC

5Specify the location.

6Set the access permission for the user selected.

In Windows XP, go to step 7.

7Click the [OK] button in the "Advanced Sharing" screen to close the screen.

1 If the computer name that you made a note of on page is the same as the domain

name:

If the computer name is not shown in "From this location", click the [Locations] button,

select the computer name, and click the [OK] button.

Example: PC001

If the computer name that you made a note of on page is not the same as the domain

name:

If the text after the first dot (.) in the full computer name that you made a note of does

not appear in "From this location", click the [Locations] button, select the text after the

dot (.), and click the [OK] button.

Example: abcdnet.com

Making a note of the user name and domain name (page 3-9)

2 Enter the user name that you made a note of on page in the text box, and click the [OK]

button.

Also the user name can be made by clicking the [Advanced] button and selecting a

user.

NOTE

"Everyone" gives sharing permission to everyone on the network. To strengthen

security, it is recommended that you select "Everyone" and remove the "Read" [Allow]

checkmark.

1 Select the user you entered.

2 Select the [Allow] checkbox of the

"Change" and "Read" permissions

3 Press [OK].

3-13

Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC

8Check the details set in the [Security] tab.

In Windows XP, make sure that checkmarks appear on [Allow] checkbox for the "Modify"

and "Read & execute" permissions, and click the [OK] button.

Configuring Windows Firewall

Permit sharing of files and printers and set the port used for SMB transmission.

1Check file and printer sharing.

1In charms on Desktop, click [Settings], [Control Panel], [System and Security], and then

[Windows Firewall].

NOTE

Log on to Windows with administrator privileges.

NOTE

If the User Account Control dialog box appears, click the [Continue] button.

1 Select the [Security] tab.

2 Select the user you entered.

If the user does not appear on "Group or

user names", click [Edit] button to add user

in a similar way of "configuration of

permission settings".

3 Make sure that checkmarks appear on

[Allow] checkbox for the "Modify" and

"Read & execute" permissions.

4 Click the [Close] button.

3-14

Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC

2Select the [File and Printer Sharing] checkbox.

2Add a port.

1In charms on Desktop, click [Settings], [Control Panel], [System and Security], and

[Check firewall status].

2Select [Advanced settings].

3Select [Inbound Rules].

3-15

Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC

4Select [New Rules].

5Select [Port].

6Select [TCP] as the port to apply the rule to. Then select [Specific local ports] and enter

"445" then click [Next].

3-16

Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC

7Select [Allow the connection] and click the [Next] button.

8Make sure all checkboxes are selected and click the [Next] button.

9Enter "Scan to SMB" in "Name" and click [Finish].

3-17

Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC

In Windows 7

1From [Start] button on the Windows, select [Control Panel], [System and Security], and

[Allow a program through Windows Firewall].

If the User Account Control dialog box appears, click the [Continue] button.

2Configure the settings.

In Windows XP or Windows Vista

1In Windows XP, from [Start] button on the Windows, select [Control Panel], and then

[Windows Firewall].

In Windows Vista, from [Start] button on the Windows, select [Control Panel], [Security],

and then [Turn Windows Firewall on or off].

If the User Account Control dialog box appears, click the [Continue] button.

2Click the [Exceptions] tab and then the [Add port...] button.

3Specify Add a Port settings.

Enter any name in "Name" (example: Scan to SMB). This will be the name of the new port.

Enter "445" in "Port Number". Select [TCP] for "Protocol".

4Click [OK] button.

In Windows 10

1Right-click [Start] button on the Windows and select [Control Panel], [System and

Security], and then [Allow an app through Windows Firewall].

If the User Account Control dialog box appears, click the [Continue] button.

2Configure the settings.

Configuring Windows Firewall (page 3-13)

3-18

Preparation before Use > Registering Destinations in the Address Book

Registering Destinations in the Address Book

Save frequently used destinations to the Address Book or One Touch Keys. The saved destinations can be changed.

The destinations are available for Send as E-mail, Send to Folder, and Fax Transmission (Only on products with the fax

function installed).

Adding a Destination (Address Book)

Add a new destination to the Address Book. There are two registering methods, contacts and groups. When adding a

group, enter the group name and select group members from the Address Book.

Registering a contact address

A maximum of 200 contact addresses can be registered.Each address can include the information such as destination

name, E-mail address, FTP server folder path, computer folder path, and FAX No. (Only on products with the fax

function installed).

1Display the screen.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [] key > [Edit Destination] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key >

[Address Book] > [OK] key > [Menu] > [▲] [] key > [Add Address] > [OK] key >

[▲][]key > [Contact] > [OK] key

2Add the name.

1[◄] [►] key > [Contact Name] > [Edit]

2Enter the destination name displayed on the Address Book and select the [OK] key.

3Add the address.

E-mail Address

1[◄] [►] key > [E-mailAddress] > [Edit]

2Enter the E-mail address > [OK] key

NOTE

Registering and editing of the Address Book can also be done in Command Center RX.

Registering Destinations (page 2-55)

NOTE

If user login administration is enabled, you can only edit destinations in the Address Book by logging in with

administrator privileges.

NOTE

Up to 32 characters can be entered.

Refer to the following for details on entering characters.

Character Entry Method (page 11-8)

NOTE

Up to 128 characters can be entered.

Refer to the following for details on entering characters.

Character Entry Method (page 11-8)

3-19

Preparation before Use > Registering Destinations in the Address Book

The Folder (SMB) Address

1[◄] [►] key > [Folder (SMB)] > [Edit]

2Enter the information for "Host Name (SMB)", "Path", "Login User Name" and "Login

Password" > [OK] key

The table below explains the items to be entered.

3The connection confirmation screen appears. Select [Yes] to check the connection and

[No] to not check it.

"Connected." appears when connection to the destination is correctly established. If "Cannot

connect." appears, review the entry.

NOTE

For the computer name, share name, domain name, and user name, enter the

information that you noted when you created the shared folder. For details on creating

shared folders, refer to the following:

Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC (page 3-8)

Item Description Max. No. of

Characters

Host Name (SMB)*1

*1 To specify a port number different from the default (445), enter using the format

"Host name: port number" (Example: SMBhostname:140).

To enter the IPv6 address, enclose the address in brackets [ ].

(Example: [3ae3:9a0:cd05:b1d2:28a:1fc0:a1:10ae]:140)

Computer name Up to

64 characters

Path Share name

For example:

scannerdata

If saving in a folder in the shared folder:

share name\folder name in shared folder

Up to

128 characters

User Name

For example: james.smith

If the computer name and domain name are different:

Domain name\User name

For example: abcdnet\james.smith

Up to

64 characters

(Case sensitive.)

Up to

64 characters

NOTE

Refer to the following for details on entering characters.

Character Entry Method (page 11-8)

3-20

Preparation before Use > Registering Destinations in the Address Book

The Folder (FTP) Address

1[◄] [►] key > [Folder (FTP)] > [Edit]

2Enter the information for "Host Name (FTP)", "Path", "Login User Name" and "Login

Password" > [OK] key

The table below explains the items to be entered.

3The connection confirmation screen appears. Select [Yes] to check the connection and

[No] to not check it.

If [SSL] is enabled in [Secure Settings], "Connect with encrypt communication?" will appear after

you select [Yes]. If [Yes] is selected, the FTP encrypted communication connection will be confirmed.

If [No] is selected, you will return to the regular connection confirmation screen.

"Connected." appears when connection to the destination is correctly established. If "Cannot

connect." appears, review the entry.

4Specify the address number.

1[◄] [►] key > [Address Number] > [Edit]

2Enter an address number.

3Select the [OK] key.

Item Descriptions Max. No. of

Characters

Host Name (FTP)*1

*1 If you specify a port number other than the default (21), use the "Host name: port number" (Example:

FTPhostname:140).

To enter the IPv6 address, enclose the address in brackets [ ].

(Example: [3ae3:9a0:cd05:b1d2:28a:1fc0:a1:10ae]:140)

Host name or IP address of FTP server Up to

64 characters

Path*2

*2 When the FTP server is based on Linux/UNIX, the path including the sub-folder is combined by the

slash "/" not using the back-slash.

Path for the file to be stored

For example: User\ScanData

If no path is entered, the file is stored in the home directory.

Up to

128 characters

64 characters

NOTE

Refer to the following for details on entering characters.

Character Entry Method (page 11-8)

NOTE

You can set any value between 1 and 250.

Use the numeric keys or select the [▲] or [▼] key to enter a number.

Address Number is an ID for a destination. You can select any available number.

If you specify an address number that is already in use, an error message appears when

you select the [OK] key and the number cannot be registered.

3-21

Preparation before Use > Registering Destinations in the Address Book

5Check if the destination entry is correct and select the [OK]

key.

The destination is added to the Address Book.

Registering a Group

Compile two or more contacts into a group. Designations in the group can be added at the same time. When adding a

group, a maximum of 50 groups can be added in the Address Book.

1Display the screen.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [] key > [Edit Destination] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key >

[Address Book] > [OK] key > [Menu] > [▲] [] key > [Add Address] > [OK] key >

[▲][]key > [Group] > [OK] key

2Add the name.

1[◄] [►] key > [Group Name] > [Edit]

2Enter the group name displayed on the Address Book and select the [OK] key.

3 Select the members (destinations).

[◄] [►] key > [

Group Member

] > [

Edit

] > [

] > [▲] [



] key > [

Add Member

] > [

] key

2Select the member you want to add, and select the [OK] key.

3Select the destination to be registered in the group from the destinations registered in the

contact addresses and select the [OK] key.

The selected member is added to group member.

Members can be added by repeating steps 3-1 to 3-3.

4Select the [Back] key.

NOTE

To add a group, you need individually added destinations. Register one or more individual destinations as needed

before proceeding. Up to 100 individually registered destinations and a combined total of up to 5 SMB and FTP

destination folders can be registered in a single group.

NOTE

Up to 32 characters can be entered.

Refer to the following for details on entering characters.

Character Entry Method (page 11-8)

NOTE

Select [Menu] and select [Search(Name)] to search using a name.

3-22

Preparation before Use > Registering Destinations in the Address Book

4Specify the address number.

1[◄] [►] key > [Address Number] > [Edit]

2Enter an address number.

3Select the [OK] key.

5Select the [OK] key.

The group is added to the Address Book.

NOTE

• You can set any value between 1 and 250.

• Use the numeric keys or select the [▲] or [▼] key to enter a number.

• Address Number is an ID for a destination. A free number can be selected.

• If you specify an address number that is already in use, an error message appears

when you select the [OK] key and the number cannot be registered.

3-23

Preparation before Use > Registering Destinations in the Address Book

Editing Address Book Entries

Edit the destinations (contacts) you added to the Address Book.

1Display the screen.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [] key > [Edit Destination] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key >

[Address Book] > [OK] key

2Edit the destination.

Editing a Contact

1Select the destination (contacts) to edit, and select the [OK] key.

2Change "Contact Name", destination type and address, and "Address Number".

3After you have completed the changes, [OK] key > [Yes]

Editing a Group

1Select the group to edit, and select the [OK] key.

2Change "Group Name" and "Address Number".

3[◄] [►] key > [Group Member] > [Edit]

4To delete the destination from the group, select the destination > [Menu] > [▲] [] key >

[Delete] > [OK] key

To add the destination, select [Add Member].

5Select [Yes].

6After you have completed the changes, [OK] key > [Yes]

NOTE

Select [Menu] and select [Search(Name)] to search using a name.

Registering a contact address (page 3-18)

Registering a Group (page 3-21)

NOTE

Select the destination and select the [OK] key to show the detailed information of the

destination.

Registering a Group (page 3-21)

3-24

Preparation before Use > Registering Destinations in the Address Book

Deleting Address Book Entries

Delete the destinations (contacts) you added to the Address Book.

1Display the screen.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Address Book/One Touch] > [Address Book]

2Delete the destination.

Select the destination (contacts) or group to delete, [Menu] > [▲] [▼] key > [Delete] >

[OK]key > [Yes]

3-25

Preparation before Use > Registering Destinations in the Address Book

Adding a Destination on One Touch Key (One Touch

Key)

Assign a new destination (contact or group) to an one touch key. A maximum of 22 destinations can be registered.

1Select the One Touch Key to be registered.

1In the Send or FAX screen, press the One Touch Key that you want to register and hold it

(2 seconds or more).

2[▲] [] key > key number > [OK] key

Select a One Touch Key number with no registered destination.

2Select the destinations.

Select the destination to be registered to the One touch key from the destinations registered in

the addresses and select the [OK] key.

The destination will be added to the One Touch Key.

NOTE

• Numbers 1 to 11 are the One Touch Key numbers while the [Shift Lock] indicator is switched off. Numbers 12 to 22

are the One Touch Key numbers while the [Shift Lock] indicator is switched on by selecting the [Shift Lock] key.

• Refer to the following for use of One Touch Key.

Checking and Editing Destinations (page 5-33)

• You can add One Touch keys and change their settings on Command Center RX.

Registering Destinations (page 2-55)

NOTE

Select [Menu] and select [Search(Name)] to search using a name.

3-26

Preparation before Use > Registering Destinations in the Address Book

Editing One Touch Key

1Select the One Touch Key to edit.

1Press the One Touch Key to edit and hold it (2 seconds or more).

2[▲] [] key > key number > [OK] key

When an unregistered One Touch Key number is selected, the Address Book appears. The One

Touch Key can be registered by selecting the destination from the Address Book.

2Edit the destination.

1[▲] [] key > [Edit] > [OK] key

2Select the new destination, and select the [OK] key > [Yes]

Deleting One Touch Key

1Select the One Touch Key to delete.

1Press the One Touch Key to delete and hold it (2 seconds or more).

2[▲] [] key > key number > [OK] key

When an unregistered One Touch Key number is selected, the Address Book appears. The One

Touch Key can be registered by selecting the destination from the Address Book.

2Delete the destination.

[▲] [] key > [Delete] > [OK] key > [Yes]

Deletion of the data registered in the One Touch Key.

NOTE

Select [Detail] and select the [OK] key to show the detailed information of the

destination.

4-1

4 Printing from PC

This chapter explains the following topics:

Printer Driver Properties Screen ........................................................................................................................ 4-2

Displaying the Printer Driver Help ............................................................................................................ 4-3

Changing the Default Printer Driver Settings (Windows 8.1) ................................................................... 4-3

Printing from PC ................................................................................................................................................. 4-4

Printing on Standard Sized Paper ............................................................................................................ 4-4

Printing on Non-standard Sized Paper .................................................................................................... 4-6

Canceling Printing from a Computer ........................................................................................................ 4-8

Printing from the Handheld Device .................................................................................................................... 4-9

Printing by AirPrint ................................................................................................................................... 4-9

Printing by Google Cloud Print ................................................................................................................ 4-9

Printing by Mopria .................................................................................................................................... 4-9

Printing with Wi-Fi Direct ......................................................................................................................... 4-9

Printing Data Saved in the Printer .................................................................................................................... 4-10

Specifying the Job Box from a Computer and Storing the Job .............................................................. 4-10

Printing Documents from Private Print Box ............................................................................................. 4-11

Deleting the Documents Stored in the Private Print Box ......................................................................... 4-11

Printing Document from Stored Job Box ................................................................................................ 4-12

Deleting the Documents Stored in the Stored Job Box .......................................................................... 4-13

Printing Document from Quick Copy Box .............................................................................................. 4-14

Deleting the Documents Stored in the Quick Copy Box ......................................................................... 4-14

Printing Document from Proof and Hold Box ......................................................................................... 4-15

Deleting the Documents Stored in the Proof and Hold Box ................................................................... 4-16

Monitoring the Printer Status (Status Monitor) ................................................................................................. 4-17

Accessing the Status Monitor ................................................................................................................ 4-17

Exiting the Status Monitor ...................................................................................................................... 4-17

Quick View State .................................................................................................................................... 4-17

Printing Progress Tab ............................................................................................................................ 4-18

Paper Tray Status Tab ........................................................................................................................... 4-18

Toner Status Tab .................................................................................................................................... 4-18

Alert Tab ................................................................................................................................................. 4-19

Status Monitor Context Menu ................................................................................................................ 4-19

Status Monitor Notification Settings ....................................................................................................... 4-20

Configuration Tool ............................................................................................................................................ 4-21

Accessing the Configuration Tool .......................................................................................................... 4-21

Exiting the Configuration Tool ................................................................................................................ 4-22

Configuration Tool Settings Screen ....................................................................................................... 4-23

4-2

Printing from PC > Printer Driver Properties Screen

Printer Driver Properties Screen

The printer driver properties screen allows you to configure a variety of print-related settings.

Printer Driver User Guide

No. Description

1 [Quick Print] tab

Provides icons that can be used to easily configure frequently used functions. Each time you click an icon, it

changes to an image resembling the print results and applies the settings.

[Basic] tab

This tab groups basic functions that are frequently used. You can use it to configure the paper size and duplex

printing.

[Layout] tab

This tab lets you configure settings for printing various layouts, including booklet printing, combine mode,

poster printing, and scaling.

[Imaging] tab

This tab lets you configure settings related to the quality of the print results.

[Publishing] tab

This tab lets you create covers and inserts for print jobs and put inserts between sheets of OHP film.

[Job] tab

This tab lets you configure settings for saving print data from the computer to the machine. Regularly used

documents and other data can be saved to the machine for easy printing later. Since saved documents can

be printed directly from the machine, this function is also convenient when you wish to print a document that

you don't want others to see.

[Advanced] tab

This tab lets you configure settings for adding text pages or watermarks to print data.

2 [Profiles]

Printer driver settings can be saved as a profile. Saved profiles can be recalled at any time, so it's a

convenient practice to save frequently used settings.

3[Reset]

Click to revert settings to their initial values.

4-3

Printing from PC > Printer Driver Properties Screen

Displaying the Printer Driver Help

The printer driver includes Help. To learn about print settings, open the printer driver print settings screen and display

Help as explained below.

Changing the Default Printer Driver Settings

(Windows 8.1)

The default printer driver settings can be changed. By selecting frequently used settings, you can omit steps when

printing. For the settings, refer to the following:

Printer Driver User Guide

1In charms on Desktop, click [Settings], [Control Panel], and

then [Devices and Printers].

2Right-click the printer driver icon of the machine, and click the

[Printer properties] menu of the printer driver.

3Click the [Basic] button on the [General] tab.

4Select the default settings and click the [OK] button.

NOTE

You can also display the printer driver help when you click the desired item and press the [F1] key on your keyboard.

1 Click the [?] button in the upper right corner of the

screen.

2 Click the item you want to know about.

4-4

Printing from PC > Printing from PC

Printing from PC

This section provides the printing method using the KX DRIVER.

Printing on Standard Sized Paper

If you loaded a paper size that is included in the print sizes of the machine, select the paper size in the [Basic] tab of the

print settings screen of the printer driver.

1Display the screen.

Click [File] and select [Print] in the application.

2Configure the settings.

1Select the machine from the "Printer" menu and click the [Properties] button.

NOTE

• To print the document from applications, install the printer driver on your computer from the supplied DVD

(Product Library).

• In some environments, the current settings are displayed at the bottom of the printer driver.

• When printing the cardstock or envelopes, load the cardstock or envelopes in the multipurpose tray before

performing the following procedure.

Loading Paper in the Multipurpose Tray (page 5-5)

NOTE

Specify the paper size and media type to print from the operation panel.

Orig./Paper Set. (page 8-20)

4-5

Printing from PC > Printing from PC

2Select the [Basic] tab.

3Click "Print size" menu and select the paper size to use for printing.

To load the paper of size that is not included in print sizes of the machine such as cardstock or

envelopes, the paper size needs to be registered.

To print on the special paper such as thick paper or transparency, click "Media type" menu and select

the media type.

4Click [OK] button to return to the Print dialog box.

3Start printing.

Click the [OK] button.

Printing on Non-standard Sized Paper (page 4-6)

4-6

Printing from PC > Printing from PC

Printing on Non-standard Sized Paper

If you loaded a paper size that is not included in the print sizes of the machine, register the paper size in the [Basic] tab

of the print settings screen of the printer driver.

The registered size can be selected from the "Print size" menu.

1Display the print settings screen.

1Select [Settings] in charms on Desktop, and select [Control Panel], and then [Devices

and Printers].

2Right-click the printer driver icon of the machine, and click the [Printer properties] menu of

the printer driver.

3Click the [Basic] button on the [General] tab.

2Register the paper size.

1Click the [Basic] tab.

2Click the [Page Size...] button.

3Click the [New] button.

4Enter the paper size.

5Enter the name of the paper.

NOTE

To execute printing at the machine, set the paper size and type in the following:

Orig./Paper Set. (page 8-20)

NOTE

In Windows 8, click [

Start

] button on the Windows, and then click [

Devices and Printers

4-7

Printing from PC > Printing from PC

6Click the [Save] button.

7Click the [OK] button.

8Click the [OK] button.

3Display the screen.

Click [File] and select [Print] in the application.

4Select the paper size and type of non-standard size paper.

1Select the machine from the "Printer" menu and click the [Properties] button.

2Select the [Basic] tab.

4-8

Printing from PC > Printing from PC

3Click "Print size" menu and select the paper size registered in step 2.

To print on the special paper such as thick paper or transparency, click "Media type" menu and select

the media type.

4Select the paper source in the "Source" menu.

5Click [OK] button to return to the Print dialog box.

5Start printing.

Click the [OK] button.

Canceling Printing from a Computer

To cancel a print job executed using the printer driver before the printer begins printing, do the following:

1Double-click the printer icon ( ) displayed on the taskbar at

the bottom right of the Windows desktop to display a dialog

box for the printer.

2Click the file for which you wish to cancel printing and select

[Cancel] from the "Document" menu.

NOTE

If you loaded a postcard or envelope, select [Cardstock] or [Envelope] in the "Media

type" menu.

NOTE

When canceling printing from this machine, refer to the following:

Canceling Jobs (page 5-13)

4-9

Printing from PC > Printing from the Handheld Device

Printing from the Handheld Device

This machine supports the AirPrint, Google Cloud Print, Mopria and Wi-Fi Direct.

According to the supported OS and application, you can print the job from any handheld device or computer without

installing a printer driver.

Printing by AirPrint

AirPrint is a printing function that is included standard in iOS 4.2 and later products, and Mac OS X 10.7 and later

products.

To use the AirPrint, make sure that the AirPrint setting is enabled in the Command Center RX.

Command Center RX User Guide

Printing by Google Cloud Print

Google Cloud Print is a printing service provided by Google. This service enables a user with a Google account to print

from a machine connected to the Internet.

The machine can be configured in the Command Center RX.

Command Center RX User Guide

Printing by Mopria

Mopria is a standard on printing function included in Android 4.4 or later products. Mopria Print Service needs to be

installed and enabled in advance.

For details on how to use, refer to a Web site of Mopria Alliance.

Printing with Wi-Fi Direct

Wi-Fi Direct is a wireless LAN standard that Wi-Fi Alliance has been established. This is one of the functions of the

wireless LAN, without a wireless LAN access point or wireless LAN router, between devices can communicate directly

on a peer to peer basis.

The printing procedure by the Wi-Fi Direct is the same as that from the normal handheld devices.

When you use a printer name or Bonjour name on the port settings of the printer property, you can print the job by

specifying the name at Wi-Fi Direct connection.

When you use an IP address for the port, specify the IP address of this machine.

NOTE

A Google account is necessary to use Google Cloud Print. Obtain a Google account if you do not have one.

It is also necessary to register the machine with the Google Cloud Print service in advance. The machine can be

registered from a PC connected to the same network.

4-10

Printing from PC > Printing Data Saved in the Printer

Printing Data Saved in the Printer

You can save the print job into the Job Box of this device and print it as necessary. To use the Stored Job Box and the

Quick Copy Box, an SD/SDHC memory card must be installed in the device.

If you configure settings in the [Job] tab of the printer driver and then print, the print job will be saved in the Job Box

(memory) and printing can be executed at the machine.

Follow the work flow below when using Job Box.

Specifying the Job Box from a computer and sending the print job. (page 4-10)

Using the operation panel to specify a file within a Box and printing it.

You can print the documents from the following boxes.

Printing Documents from Private Print Box (page 4-11)

Printing Document from Stored Job Box (page 4-12)

Printing Document from Quick Copy Box (page 4-14)

Printing Document from Proof and Hold Box (page 4-15)

Specifying the Job Box from a Computer and Storing

the Job

1Click [File] and select [Print] in the application.

The Print dialog box displays.

2Select the machine from the "Name" menu.

3Click the [Properties] button.

The Properties dialog box displays.

4Click the [Job] tab and select the [Job storage (e-MPS)] check

box to set the function.

IMPORTANT

Unencrypted data is saved on the SD/SDHC memory card.

Exercise caution when saving sensitive documents.

NOTE

• To use the Private Print Box and the Proof and Hold Box, [RAM Disk Mode] must be [On].

RAM Disk Mode (page 8-30)

• If you are using an SD/SDHC memory card to use a Job Box, set [RAM Disk Mode] to [Off].

NOTE

For information on how to use the printer driver software, refer to the following:

Printer Driver User Guide

4-11

Printing from PC > Printing Data Saved in the Printer

Printing Documents from Private Print Box

In Private Printing, you can specify that a job is not to be printed until you operate the machine. When sending the job

from the application software, specify a 4-digit access code in the printer driver. The job is released for printing by

entering the access code on the operation panel, ensuring confidentiality of the print job. The data will be deleted upon

completion of the print job or after the power switch is turned off.

1Display the screen.

1[Document Box/USB] key > [▲] [] key > [Job Box] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key >

[Private/Stored] > [OK] key

2Select the creator of the document, and select the [OK] key.

2Print the document.

1Select the document to print, and [Select] > [OK] key.

The file is selected. A checkmark will be placed on the right of the selected file.

Select the checkmarked file and select [Select] again to cancel the selection.

2[▲] [] key > [Print] > [OK] key

3Enter the access code.

4Specify the number of copies to print as desired, and the [OK] key > [Yes].

Printing starts.

Upon completion of printing, the Private Print job is automatically deleted.

Deleting the Documents Stored in the Private Print

Box

1Display the screen.

1[Document Box/USB] key > [▲] [] key > [Job Box] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key >

[Private/Stored] > [OK] key

2Select the creator of the document, and select the [OK] key.

NOTE

Select [Menu] to perform the following operations.

• [Select All]: Select all files.

• [Clear All]: Cancel all the file selections.

• [Detail]: Display the details for the selected document.

4-12

Printing from PC > Printing Data Saved in the Printer

2Delete the document.

1Select the document to delete, and [Select] > [OK] key.

The file is selected. A checkmark will be placed on the right of the selected file.

Select the checkmarked file and select [Select] again to cancel the selection.

2[▲] [] key > [Delete] > [OK] key > Enter the access code > [OK] key > [Yes]

The document is deleted.

Printing Document from Stored Job Box

In Stored Job, the print data sent from the application is saved to the machine. You can set up an access code as

necessary. If you set up an access code, enter the access code when printing. Print data will be stored in the Stored Job

Box after printing. This will allow printing of the same print data repeatedly.

1Display the screen.

1[Document Box/USB] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Job Box] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key >

[Private/Stored] > [OK] key

2Select the creator of the document, and select the [OK] key.

2Print the document.

1Select the document to print, and [Select] > [OK] key.

The file is selected. A checkmark will be placed on the right of the selected file.

Select the checkmarked file and select [Select] again to cancel the selection.

2[▲] [] key > [Print] > [OK] key

3Specify the number of copies to print as desired, and the [OK] key > [Yes].

Printing starts.

NOTE

Select [Menu] to perform the following operations.

• [Select All]: Select all files.

• [Clear All]: Cancel all the file selections.

• [Detail]: Display the details for the selected document.

NOTE

Select [Menu] to perform the following operations.

• [Select All]: Select all files.

• [Clear All]: Cancel all the file selections.

• [Detail]: Display the details for the selected document.

NOTE

If the document is protected by an access code, the password entry screen will be

displayed. Enter the password using the numeric keys.

4-13

Printing from PC > Printing Data Saved in the Printer

Deleting the Documents Stored in the Stored Job Box

1Display the screen.

1[Document Box/USB] key > [▲] [] key > [Job Box] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key >

[Private/Stored] > [OK] key

2Select the creator of the document, and select the [OK] key.

2Print and delete the document.

1Select the document to delete, and [Select] > [OK] key.

The file is selected. A checkmark will be placed on the right of the selected file.

Select the checkmarked file and select [Select] again to cancel the selection.

2[▲] [▼] key > [Delete] > [OK] key > [Yes]

The document is deleted.

NOTE

Select [Menu] to perform the following operations.

• [Select All]: Select all files.

• [Clear All]: Cancel all the file selections.

• [Detail]: Display the details for the selected document.

NOTE

If the document is protected by an access code, the password entry screen will be

displayed. Enter the password using the numeric keys.

4-14

Printing from PC > Printing Data Saved in the Printer

Printing Document from Quick Copy Box

Quick Copy feature facilitates additional prints of a document already printed. Activating Quick Copy and printing a

document using the printer driver allow the print data to be stored in the Quick Copy Job Box. When additional copies

are required, you can reprint the required number of copies from the operation panel. By default, up to 32 documents

can be stored. When power is turned off, all stored jobs will be deleted.

1Display the screen.

1[Document Box/USB] key > [▲] [] key > [Job Box] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key >

[Quick/Proof] > [OK] key

2Select the creator of the document, and select the [OK] key.

2Print the document.

1Select the document to print, and [Select] > [OK] key.

The file is selected. A checkmark will be placed on the right of the selected file.

Select the checkmarked file and select [Select] again to cancel the selection.

2[▲] [] key > [Print] > [OK] key

3Specify the number of copies to print as desired, and the [OK] key > [Yes].

Printing starts.

Deleting the Documents Stored in the Quick Copy Box

1Display the screen.

1[Document Box/USB] key > [▲] [] key > [Job Box] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key >

[Quick/Proof] > [OK] key

2Select the creator of the document, and select the [OK] key.

NOTE

• When the number of jobs reaches the limit, the oldest job will be overwritten by the new one.

• To maintain free space on the box, you can set the maximum number of stored jobs.

Quick Copy Jobs (page 8-36)

NOTE

Select [Menu] to perform the following operations.

• [Select All]: Select all files.

• [Clear All]: Cancel all the file selections.

• [Detail]: Display the details for the selected document.

4-15

Printing from PC > Printing Data Saved in the Printer

2Delete the document.

1Select the document to delete, and [Select] > [OK] key.

The file is selected. A checkmark will be placed on the right of the selected file.

Select the checkmarked file and select [Select] again to cancel the selection.

2[▲] [] key > [Delete] > [OK] key > [Yes]

The document is deleted.

Printing Document from Proof and Hold Box

The Proof and Hold feature produces only a single proof print of multiple-print job and holds printing of the remaining

copies. Printing a multiple-print job in Proof and Hold using the printer driver allows only a single copy to be printed while

maintaining the document data in the Job Box. To continue to print the remaining copies, use the operation panel. You

can change the number of copies to print.

1Display the screen.

1[Document Box/USB] key > [▲] [] key > [Job Box] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key >

[Quick/Proof] > [OK] key

2Select the creator of the document, and select the [OK] key.

2Print the document.

1Select the document to print, and [Select] > [OK] key.

The file is selected. A checkmark will be placed on the right of the selected file.

Select the checkmarked file and select [Select] again to cancel the selection.

2[▲] [] key > [Print] > [OK] key

3Specify the number of copies to print as desired, and the [OK] key > [Yes].

Printing starts.

NOTE

Select [Menu] to perform the following operations.

• [Select All]: Select all files.

• [Clear All]: Cancel all the file selections.

• [Detail]: Display the details for the selected document.

NOTE

Select [Menu] to perform the following operations.

•[Select All]: Select all files.

•[Clear All]: Cancel all the file selections.

•[Detail]: Display the details for the selected document.

4-16

Printing from PC > Printing Data Saved in the Printer

Deleting the Documents Stored in the Proof and Hold

Box

1Display the screen.

1[Document Box/USB] key > [▲] [] key > [Job Box] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key >

[Quick/Proof] > [OK] key

2Select the creator of the document, and select the [OK] key.

2Delete the document.

1Select the document to delete, and [Select] > [OK] key.

The file is selected. A checkmark will be placed on the right of the selected file.

Select the checkmarked file and select [Select] again to cancel the selection.

2[▲] [] key > [Delete] > [OK] key > [Yes]

The document is deleted.

NOTE

Select [Menu] to perform the following operations.

•[Select All]: Select all files.

•[Clear All]: Cancel all the file selections.

•[Detail]: Display the details for the selected document.

4-17

Printing from PC > Monitoring the Printer Status (Status Monitor)

Monitoring the Printer Status (Status

Monitor)

The Status Monitor monitors the machine status and provides an ongoing reporting function.

Accessing the Status Monitor

The Status Monitor also starts up when printing is started.

Exiting the Status Monitor

Use either of the methods listed below to exit the Status Monitor.

• Exit manually:

Click the settings icon and select Exit in the menu to exit the Status Monitor.

• Exit automatically:

The Status Monitor automatically shuts down after 7 minutes if it is not being used.

Quick View State

The status of the machine is displayed using icons. Detailed information is displayed when the Expand button is clicked.

Detailed information is displayed by clicking on each icon tab.

NOTE

When you activate Status Monitor, check the status below.

• KX DRIVER is installed.

•Either [Enhanced WSD] or [EnhancedWSD(SSL)] is enabled.

Network Setting (page 8-7)

1 Printing Progress Tab

2 Paper Tray Status Tab

3 Toner Status Tab

4Alert Tab

5 Expand button

6 Settings icon

12345 6

4-18

Printing from PC > Monitoring the Printer Status (Status Monitor)

Printing Progress Tab

The status of the print jobs is displayed.

Select a job on the job list and it can be canceled using the menu displayed with a right-click.

Paper Tray Status Tab

Information is displayed about the paper in the printer and about the amount of paper remaining.

Toner Status Tab

The amount of toner remaining is displayed.

1Status icon

2 Job list

4-19

Printing from PC > Monitoring the Printer Status (Status Monitor)

Alert Tab

If an error occurs, a notice is displayed using a 3D image and a message.

Status Monitor Context Menu

The following menu is displayed when the settings icon is clicked.

• Command Center RX

If the printer is connected to a TCP/IP network and has its own IP address, use a web browser to access the

Command Center RX to modify or confirm the network settings.This menu is not displayed when using USB

connection.

Command Center RX User Guide

• Notification…

This sets the display of the Status Monitor.

Status Monitor Notification Settings (page 4-20)

• www.kyoceradocumentsolutions.com

Open our website.

•Exit

Exits the Status Monitor.

4-20

Printing from PC > Monitoring the Printer Status (Status Monitor)

Status Monitor Notification Settings

Click the setting icon to display valid events in the status monitor notification screen.

Select whether notification is performed when an error in the event list occurs.

1Select Enable event notification.

If this setting is set to Off, then the Status Monitor will not start up even when printing is

executed.

2Select an event to use with the text to speech function in

Available events.

3Click Sound file / Text to Speech column.

Click the browse (...) button to notify the event by sound file.

When customizing the message texts to read on the screen aloud, enter the texts in the text

box.

NOTE

The available file format is WAV.

4-21

Printing from PC > Configuration Tool

Configuration Tool

You can use the Configuration Tool to check and change settings on the machine.

Accessing the Configuration Tool

1Insert the DVD.

2Display the screen.

3Select [Maintenance].

4[Configuration Tool] > [OK]

5Select the driver of the machine. > [OK]

The Configuration Tool window appears.

NOTE

• Installation on Windows must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges.

• If the "Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard" dialog box displays, select [Cancel].

• If the autorun screen is displayed, click [Run setup.exe].

• If the user account management window appears, click [Yes] ([Allow]).

1Click [View License Agreement]

and read the License Agreement.

2Click [Accept].

4-22

Printing from PC > Configuration Tool

Exiting the Configuration Tool

Use either of the methods listed below to exit the Configuration Tool.

• Exit using the Close button:

Click in the top-right corner of the Configuration Tool window.

• Exit using the OK or Cancel button:

Clicking OK exits the Configuration Tool after applying the modified printer settings. Clicking Cancel exits the

Configuration Tool without applying the modified printer settings.

4-23

Printing from PC > Configuration Tool

Configuration Tool Settings Screen

Device Defaults Settings

Configure printer driver default settings and the energy save function of the machine.

Item Description

Print density Adjust print density.

Value: Light, Medium light, Normal, Medium dark, Dark

MP tray priority If paper is set in the multipurpose tray then it is possible for priority to be given to that

multipurpose tray in the paper feed.

Values

Off: The printer driver settings are followed.

Auto Feed: If Auto is selected in the printer driver and there is paper in the multipurpose

tray then the paper feed will be from the multipurpose tray.

Always: If there is paper in the multipurpose tray then the paper feed will be from the

multipurpose tray regardless of what is set in the printer driver.

Default emulation Select the emulation for operating this machine by commands oriented to other types of

printers.

Values: Line Printer, IBM Proprinter, EPSON LQ-850, PCL 6, KPDL, KPDL(Auto)

Power off timer

(models for Europe)

Select whether to turn off the power automatically after a period of inactivity.

Value: 1 hour, 2 hours, 3 hours, 4 hours, 5 hours, 6 hours, 9 hours, 12 hours, 1 day,

2 days, 3 days, 4 days, 5 days, 6 days, 1 week

Auto error clear If an error occurs during processing, processing stops to wait for the next step to be taken by

the user. In the Auto Error Clear mode, automatically clear the error after a set amount of time

elapses.

Value: Off, On (5 to 495 seconds (in 5 second increments))

Auto sleep Set amount of time before entering Sleep.

Value

For Europe

1 to 120 minutes (1 minute increments)

Except for Europe

1 to 240 minutes (1 minute increments)

4-24

Printing from PC > Configuration Tool

Form feed timeout Receiving print data from the computer, the machine may sometimes wait if there is no

information signaling that the last page does not have any more data to be printed. When the

preset timeout passes, the machine automatically prints paper. The options are between 5 and

495 seconds.

Value: 5 to 495 seconds (in 5 second increments)

Paper source Select the default paper source.

Values: MP Tray, Cassette 1 (to3)

NOTE

[Casette 2] and [Casette 3] are shown when the optional paper feeder is installed.

Paper size Select the paper size to be used.

Values:

Cassette 1 (to3): Letter, Legal, Statement, Executive, A4, A5, A5-R, A6, Folio, B5 (JIS),

B5 (ISO), Oficio II, 216 × 340 mm, 16K, Custom

Bypass Tray: Letter, Legal, Statement, Executive, A4, A5, A5-R, A6, B6, Folio, B5 (JIS),

B5 (ISO), Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6, Envelope Monarch,

Envelope C5, Envelope DL, Oficio II, 216 × 340 mm, 16K,

Hagaki (Cardstock), OufukuHagaki (Return postcard), Youkei 2, Youkei 4,

Custom

Paper capacity Show the maximum number of sheets that can be loaded in the selected paper source.

Media type Select the media type of paper to be used.

Values: Plain, Transparency, Preprinted, Labels, Bond, Recycled, Vellum, Rough,

Letterhead, Color, Prepunched, Envelope, Cardstock, Thick, High quality, Custom 1 to 8

NOTE

You can select [Custom 1] to [Custom 8] to change the paper type name and duplex printing

settings.

Custom name When [Custom 1] to [Custom 8] is selected in "Media Type", you can assign a name to the set

paper type. Names should be not more than 16 characters.

Duplex When [Custom 1] to [Custom 8] is selected in "Media Type", you can select duplex printing

settings.

Value: Off, On

Paper weight Set the paper weight (thickness) of the paper type selected in "Media type".

Value: Light, Normal 1 to 3, Heavy 1 to 3, Extra Heavy

Item Description

4-25

Printing from PC > Configuration Tool

Device Overview

Display machine information.

Item Description

Model name Displays the machine's model name.

System firmware Displays the version of the machine's system firmware.

Engine firmware Displays the version of the machine's engine firmware.

Serial number Displays the machine's serial number.

Total memory Displays the machine's memory capacity in bytes.

Total printed pages Displays the total number of pages printed on the machine.

5-1

Operation on the Machine

This chapter explains the following topics:

Loading Originals .......................................... 5-2

Placing Originals on the Platen ........... 5-2

Loading Originals in the Document

Processor ............................................ 5-3

Loading Paper in the Multipurpose Tray ....... 5-5

Program ........................................................ 5-8

Registering Programs ......................... 5-8

Recalling Program .............................. 5-9

Overwriting Program ......................... 5-10

Deleting Program .............................. 5-10

Select Key Settings ...................................... 5-11

Copying ....................................................... 5-12

Basic Operation ................................ 5-12

Canceling Jobs ................................. 5-13

Frequently-Used Sending Method .............. 5-14

Sending Document via E-mail ..................... 5-15

Configuring Settings before Sending .... 5-15

Sending Scanned Document via

E-mail ................................................ 5-15

Sending Document to Desired Shared Folder

on a Computer (Scan to PC) ....................... 5-16

Configuring Settings before Sending .... 5-16

Sending Document to Desired Shared

Folder on a Computer ....................... 5-16

Sending Document to Folder on an FTP Server

(Scan to FTP) .............................................. 5-18

Configuring Settings before Sending .... 5-18

Sending Document to Folder on an FTP

Server ............................................... 5-18

Scanning using TWAIN or WIA ................... 5-20

Configuring Settings before Sending .... 5-20

Scanning Document Using

Application ........................................ 5-20

Useful Sending Method ............................... 5-21

WSD Scan .................................................. 5-22

Installing Driver Software .................. 5-22

WSD scan ......................................... 5-23

Using fax server to send a fax (fax server

transmission) ............................................... 5-25

Configuring Settings before Sending 5-25

Using fax server to send a fax .......... 5-25

Sending to Different Types of Destinations

(Multi Sending) ............................................ 5-27

Send to Me (E-mail) .................................... 5-28

Sending a document to the mail address

of the logged in user ......................... 5-28

Canceling Sending Jobs ............................. 5-29

Handling Destination ................................... 5-30

Specifying Destination ...................... 5-30

Choosing from the Address Book ..... 5-30

Choosing from the External

Address Book ................................... 5-31

Choosing from the One Touch Key ... 5-32

Checking and Editing Destinations ... 5-33

Confirmation Screen of Destinations .... 5-34

Recall ................................................ 5-34

How to use the FAX Function ..................... 5-35

Using Document Boxes .............................. 5-36

What is Job Box? .............................. 5-36

What is Removable Memory Box? .... 5-36

What is Sub Address

Box/Polling Box? ............................... 5-36

Operating using Removable USB Memory ...... 5-37

Printing Documents Stored

in Removable USB Memory ............. 5-37

Saving Documents to USB Memory

(Scan to USB) ................................... 5-39

Check the USB Memory Information .... 5-40

Removing USB Memory ................... 5-40

5-2

Operation on the Machine > Loading Originals

Loading Originals

Load the originals on the platen or document processor, depending on the original size, type, volume, and function.

• Platen: Place the sheet, book, postcards, and envelopes.

• Document Processor: Place the multiple originals. You can also place the two sided originals. (Only on models with a

duplex scanning function.)

Placing Originals on the Platen

You may place books or magazines on the platen in addition to ordinary sheet originals.

When you place envelopes or cardstock on the platen

NOTE

For details on Original Orientation, refer to the following:

Original Orientation (page 6-16)

NOTE

For the procedure for feeding envelopes or cardstock, refer to the following:

When you load envelopes or cardstock in the multipurpose tray (page 5-7)

CAUTION

Do not leave the document processor open as there is a danger of personal injury.

IMPORTANT

• Do not push the document processor forcefully when you close it. Excessive pressure may crack the platen glass.

• When placing books or magazines on the machine, do so with the document processor in the open position.

1 Put the scanning side facedown.

2 Align it flush against the original

size indicator plates with the back

left corner as the reference point.

1 Put the scanning side facedown.

2 Align it flush against the original

size indicator plates with the back

left corner as the reference point.

5-3

Operation on the Machine > Loading Originals

Loading Originals in the Document Processor

The document processor automatically scans each sheet of multiple originals. Both sides of two-sided originals are

scanned. (Only on models with a duplex scanning function.)

The document processor supports the following types of originals.

Do not use the document processor for the following types of originals. Otherwise, the originals may be jammed or the

document processor may become dirty.

• Originals bound with clips or staples (Remove the clips or staples and straighten curls, wrinkles or creases before

loading. Failure to do so may cause the originals to jam.)

• Originals with adhesive tape or glue

• Originals with cut-out sections

• Curled original

• Originals with folds (Straighten the folds before loading. Failure to do so may cause the originals to jam.)

• Carbon paper

• Crumpled paper

1Open the original table and then adjust the original width

guides.

Weight 50 to 160 g/m2

(duplex: 50 to 160 g/m2)*1

*1 Only on models with a duplex scanning function.

Sizes Maximum Folio (Legal) to Minimum A6 (Statement)

No. of sheets Plain paper (80 g/m2): 50 sheets (Mixed size originals: 50 sheets)

Thick (120 g/m2): 25 sheets

IMPORTANT

• Before loading originals, be sure that there are no originals left on the original eject table. Originals left on

the original eject table may cause the new originals to jam.

• Do not make an impact on the document processor top cover, such as aligning the originals on the top

cover. It may cause an error in the document processor.

5-4

Operation on the Machine > Loading Originals

2Place the originals.

1Put the side to be scanned (or the first side of two-sided originals) face-up. Slide the

leading edge into the document processor as far as it will go.

2Open the original stopper to fit the size of the original set (Original size: Folio/Legal).

NOTE

For details on Original Orientation, refer to the following:

Original Orientation (page 6-16)

IMPORTANT

Confirm that the original width guides exactly fit the originals. If there is a gap,

readjust the original width guides. The gap may cause the originals to jam.

Ensure that loaded originals do not exceed the level indicator. Exceeding the

maximum level may cause the originals to jam.

Originals with punched holes or perforated lines should be placed in such a way

that the holes or perforations will be scanned last (not first).

5-5

Operation on the Machine > Loading Paper in the Multipurpose Tray

Loading Paper in the Multipurpose Tray

For details of the supported paper sizes, refer to the following:

Choosing the Appropriate Paper (page 11-14)

For the paper type setting, refer to the following:

Media Type Setting (page 8-24)

Be sure to use the multipurpose tray when you print on any special paper.

The capacity of the multipurpose tray is as follows.

• Plain paper (80 g/m2) or recycled paper: 100 sheets

• Thick paper (209 g/m2): 5 sheets

• Thick paper (157 g/m2): 5 sheets

• Thick paper (104.7 g/m2): 70 sheets

• Hagaki (Cardstock): 15 sheets

• Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6 3/4, Envelope Monarch, Youkei 4, Youkei 2:

5 sheets

• OHP film: 1 sheet

1Open the multipurpose tray.

IMPORTANT

• If you are using a paper weight of 106 g/m2 or more, set the media type to Thick and set the weight of the

paper you are using.

• Remove each transparency from the inner tray as it is printed. Leaving transparencies in the inner tray may

cause a paper jam.

NOTE

• When you load custom size paper, enter the paper size by referring to the following:

Orig./Paper Set. (page 8-20)

• When you use special paper such as transparencies or thick paper, select the media type by referring to the

following:

MP Tray Set. (Multipurpose Tray Settings) (page 8-23)

5-6

Operation on the Machine > Loading Paper in the Multipurpose Tray

2Adjust the multipurpose tray size.

Paper sizes are marked on the multipurpose tray.

3Load paper.

Insert the paper along the paper width guides into the tray until it stops.

After removing new paper from its packaging, fan the paper before loading it in the

multipurpose tray.

4Specify the type of paper loaded in the multipurpose tray using

the operation panel.

Precaution for Loading Paper (page 3-2)

IMPORTANT

• When loading the paper, keep the print side facing down.

• Curled paper must be uncurled before use.

• When loading paper into the multipurpose tray, check that there is no paper left

over in the tray from a previous job before loading the paper. If there is just a small

amount of paper left over in the multipurpose tray and you want to add more, first

remove the left-over paper from the tray and include it with the new paper before

loading the paper back into the tray.

• If there is a gap between the paper and the paper width guides, readjust the guides

to fit the paper in order to prevent skewed feeding and paper jams.

• Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the load limits.

MP Tray Set. (Multipurpose Tray Settings) (page 8-23)

5-7

Operation on the Machine > Loading Paper in the Multipurpose Tray

When you load envelopes or cardstock in the multipurpose tray

Load the paper with the print side facing up. For the procedure for printing, refer to the following:

Printer Driver User Guide

Example: When printing the address.

1 Oufuku hagaki (Return postcard)

2 Hagaki (Cardstocks)

3 Portrait form envelopes

4 Landscape form envelopes

IMPORTANT

• Use unfolded Oufuku hagaki (Return postcard).

• How to load envelopes (orientation and facing) will differ depending on the type of envelope. Be sure to

load it in correctly, otherwise printing may be done in the wrong direction or on the wrong face.

NOTE

When you load envelopes in the multipurpose tray, select the envelope type by referring to the following:

MP Tray Set. (Multipurpose Tray Settings) (page 8-23)

1234

5-8

Operation on the Machine > Program

Program

By registering sets of frequently used functions as a single program, you can simply select one of the [Program I] to

[Program IV] keys as needed to recall those functions.

The following functions are already registered in [Program I] key. This function allows you to copy the front and back

sides of ID card or other document that is smaller than Statement or A5/Statement size onto a single page. Although the

functions are deleted by overwriting [Program I] key, you can register the same settings using the [Function Menu] key.

• Paper Selection: Cassette 1

• Same size

• Combine: 2 in 1

• Original size: A5/Statement

• Continuous scanning: ON

Registering Programs

1Configure the settings of the functions.

Configure the settings of the functions you want to register in a program.

For the settings of functions, refer to the following:

NOTE

• It is possible to register the copy function, sending function and fax function in a program. (The fax function can be

registered or recalled only on products with the fax function installed)

• If user login administration is enabled, you can only register functions by logging in with administrator privileges.

Using Various Functions (page 6-1)

NOTE

In the case of the sending function and fax function, a destination is also registered in the

program.

5-9

Operation on the Machine > Program

2Register the program.

Press the one of the [Program I] to [Program IV] keys where you want to register the settings

and hold it (2 seconds or more).

The current settings are registered to the selected program key.

Recalling Program

Select the one of the [Program I] to [Program IV] keys where the settings you want to recall are registered. The current

settings of various functions are replaced with the registered settings.

Place the originals and press the [Start] key.

5-10

Operation on the Machine > Program

Overwriting Program

1Configure the settings of the functions.

Set the function to change.

For the settings of functions, refer to the following:

2Overwrite the program.

1Press the one of the [Program I] to [Program IV] keys to change and hold it (2 seconds or

more).

2[▲] [] key > [Overwrite] > [OK] key > [Yes]

Deleting Program

1Display the screen.

Press the one of the [Program I] to [Program IV] keys to delete and hold it (2 seconds or

more).

2Delete the program.

[▲] [] key > [Delete] > [OK] key > [Yes]

Using Various Functions (page 6-1)

NOTE

In the case of the sending function and fax function, a destination is also registered in the

program.

5-11

Operation on the Machine > Select Key Settings

Select Key Settings

Commonly used functions can be registered to the Select key. Functions can be easily configured by selecting the

Select key.

Functions can be registered in Select keys from the system menu.

Copy (page 8-32)

Send (page 8-35)

Document Box (page 8-36)

5-12

Operation on the Machine > Copying

Copying

The procedures here represent the basic copy operation and how to cancel the copy.

Basic Operation

1Select the [Copy] key.

2Place the originals.

Check the original size and the paper size.

3Select the functions.

Select the [Function Menu] key to select the copier functions to use.

4Use the numeric keys to enter the copy quantity.

Specify the desired number up to 999.

5Press the [Start] key.

Copying begins.

Loading Originals (page 5-2)

NOTE

For selecting the original size, refer to the following:

Original Size (page 6-16)

For selecting the paper source, refer to the following:

Paper Selection (page 6-8)

Copy (page 6-3)

Ready to copy.

A4 A4

Zoom Paper

Copies

100%

1 Original size

2 Paper size

5-13

Operation on the Machine > Copying

Canceling Jobs

1Select the [Stop] key with the copy screen displayed.

2Cancel a job.

1[▲] [] key > [Cancel Print Job] > [OK] key

2Select the job to cancel, and [Menu].

3[▲] [] key > [Cancel Job] > [OK] key

4Select [Yes].

The job is canceled.

NOTE

Select [Detail] and the [OK] key to show the detailed information of the job.

NOTE

During scanning, the job can be canceled by selecting the [Stop] key or [Cancel].

5-14

Operation on the Machine > Frequently-Used Sending Method

Frequently-Used Sending Method

This machine can send a scanned image as an attachment of an E-mail message or to a PC linked to the network. In

order to do this, it is necessary to register the sender and destination (recipient) address on the network.

A network environment which enables the machine to connect to a mail server is required in order to send E-mail. It is

recommended that a Local Area Network (LAN) be used to assist with transmission speed and security issues.

Follow the steps below for basic sending. The following four options are available.

• Send as E-mail (E-mail Addr Entry): Sends a scanned original image as an E-mail attachment.

Sending Document via E-mail (page 5-15)

• Send to Folder (SMB): Stores a scanned original image in a shared folder of any PC.

Sending Document to Desired Shared Folder on a Computer (Scan to PC) (page 5-16)

• Send to Folder (FTP): Stores a scanned original image in a folder of an FTP server.

Sending Document to Folder on an FTP Server (Scan to FTP) (page 5-18)

• Image Data Scanning with TWAIN / WIA: Scan the document using a TWAIN or WIA compatible application program.

Scanning using TWAIN or WIA (page 5-20)

NOTE

• Different sending options can be specified in combination.

Sending to Different Types of Destinations (Multi Sending) (page 5-27)

• The fax function can be used on products equipped with fax capability.

FAX Operation Guide

5-15

Operation on the Machine > Sending Document via E-mail

Sending Document via E-mail

When transmitting using wireless LAN, select the interface dedicated to the send function in advance.

Primary Network (page 8-16)

Configuring Settings before Sending

Before sending an E-mail, configure the SMTP and E-mail settings using the Command Center RX.

E-mail Settings (page 2-51)

Sending Scanned Document via E-mail

1Select the [Send] key.

2Place the originals.

3[▲] [▼] key > [E-mail] > [OK] key

4Enter destination E-mail address > [OK] key

Up to 128 characters can be entered.

To enter multiple destinations, select [Confirm/Add Destination] key and enter the next

destination. Up to 100 E-mail addresses can be specified.

Destinations can be changed later.

5Select the functions.

Select the [Function Menu] key to select the send functions to use.

6Press the [Start] key.

Sending starts.

Loading Originals (page 5-2)

Character Entry Method (page 11-8)

Confirmation Screen of Destinations (page 5-34)

Send (page 6-4)

5-16

Operation on the Machine > Sending Document to Desired Shared Folder on a Computer (Scan to PC)

Sending Document to Desired Shared

Folder on a Computer (Scan to PC)

Configuring Settings before Sending

Before sending an document, configure the following settings.

• Make a note of the computer name and full computer name

• Make a note of the user name and domain name

• Create a shared folder and make a note of a shared folder

• Configure the Windows firewall

Sending Document to Desired Shared Folder on a

Computer

1Select the [Send] key.

2Place the originals.

3[▲] [▼] key > [Folder(SMB)] > [OK] key

4Enter the destination information.

Enter the information for each item and select the [OK] key.

Making a note of the computer name and full computer name (page 3-8)

Making a note of the user name and domain name (page 3-9)

Creating a Shared Folder, Making a Note of a Shared Folder (page 3-10)

Configuring Windows Firewall (page 3-13)

Loading Originals (page 5-2)

Character Entry Method (page 11-8)

5-17

Operation on the Machine > Sending Document to Desired Shared Folder on a Computer (Scan to PC)

The table below lists the items to be set.

5Check the status.

The connection confirmation screen appears. Select [Yes] to check the connection and [No] to

not check it.

"Connected." appears when connection to the destination is correctly established. If "Cannot

connect." appears, review the entry.

To send to multiple destinations, repeat steps 3 to 4.

Destinations can be changed later.

6Select the functions.

Select the [Function Menu] key to select the send functions to use.

7Press the [Start] key.

Sending starts.

Item Detail Max.

characters

Host Name *1

*1 You can also specify the port number. Enter the following format separated by a colon.

"Host name: port number" or "IP address: port number"

To enter the IPv6 address, enclose the address in brackets [ ].

(Example: [2001:db8:a0b:12f0::10]:445)

If the port number is not specified, the default port number is 445.

Computer name Up to

64 characters

Path Share name

For example:

scannerdata

If saving in a folder in the shared folder:

share name\folder name in shared folder

Up to

128 characters

User Name

For example: james.smith

If the computer name and domain name are different:

Domain name\User name

For example: abcdnet\james.smith

Up to

64 characters

(Case sensitive.)

Up to

64 characters

Confirmation Screen of Destinations (page 5-34)

Send (page 6-4)

5-18

Operation on the Machine > Sending Document to Folder on an FTP Server (Scan to FTP)

Sending Document to Folder on an FTP

Server (Scan to FTP)

Configuring Settings before Sending

Before sending an document, configure the FTP Client (Transmission).

ProtocolSettings (page 8-12)

Sending Document to Folder on an FTP Server

1Select the [Send] key.

2Place the originals.

3[▲] [▼] key > [Folder(FTP)] > [OK] key

Loading Originals (page 5-2)

5-19

Operation on the Machine > Sending Document to Folder on an FTP Server (Scan to FTP)

4Enter the destination information.

Enter the information for each item and select the [OK] key.

The table below lists the items to be set.

5Check the status.

The connection confirmation screen appears. Select [Yes] to check the connection and [No] to

not check it.

"Connected." appears when connection to the destination is correctly established. If "Cannot

connect." appears, review the entry.

To send to multiple destinations, repeat steps 3 to 4.

Destinations can be changed later.

6Select the functions.

Select the [Function Menu] key to select the send functions to use.

7Press the [Start] key.

Sending starts.

Character Entry Method (page 11-8)

Item Data to be entered Max.

characters

Host Name *1

*1 You can also specify the port number. Enter the following format separated by a colon.

"Host name: port number" or "IP address: port number"

To enter the IPv6 address, enclose the address in brackets [ ].

(Example: [2001:db8:a0b:12f0::10]:21)

If the port number is not specified in [Host Name], the default port number is 21.

Host name or IP address of FTP server Up to

64 characters

Path*2

*2 When the FTP server is based on Linux/UNIX, the path including the sub-folder is combined by the

slash "/" not using the back-slash.

Path to the receiving folder

For example: User\ScanData

Otherwise the data will be saved in the home directory.

Up to

128 characters

64 characters

(Case sensitive.)

Up to

64 characters

Checking and Editing Destinations (page 5-33)

Send (page 6-4)

5-20

Operation on the Machine > Scanning using TWAIN or WIA

Scanning using TWAIN or WIA

Configuring Settings before Sending

Before sending an document, confirm that TWAIN/WIA driver is installed on a computer and the settings are configured.

Setting TWAIN Driver (page 2-40)

Setting WIA Driver (page 2-42)

Scanning Document Using Application

This subsection explains how to scan an original using TWAIN. The WIA driver is used in the same way.

1Display the screen.

1Activate the TWAIN compatible application software.

2Select the machine using the application and display the dialog box.

2Configure the scan settings.

Select scanning settings in the dialog box that opens.

3Place the originals.

4Scan the originals.

Click the [Scan] button. The document data is scanned.

NOTE

For selecting the machine, see the Operation Guide or Help for each application

software.

NOTE

For the settings, refer to Help in the dialog box.

Loading Originals (page 5-2)

5-21

Operation on the Machine > Useful Sending Method

Useful Sending Method

You can specify the following useful scanning (sending) methods.

• WSD Scan: Saves images of originals scanned on this machine as files on a WSD-compatible computer.

WSD Scan (page 5-22)

• Sending to different types of destinations (Multi sending): Sends to different types of destination (E-mail addresses,

folders, etc.) in a single operation.

Sending to Different Types of Destinations (Multi Sending) (page 5-27)

• Send to Me (E-mail): Sends to the E-mail address of the logged in user when user login is enabled.

Send to Me (E-mail) (page 5-28)

5-22

Operation on the Machine > WSD Scan

WSD Scan

WSD Scan saves images of originals scanned on this machine as files on a WSD-compatible computer.

Installing Driver Software

In Windows 8, Windows 8.1 and Microsoft Windows Server 2012

1Click [Search] in charms, [Control Panel], and then [View

devices and printers].

2Install the driver.

Click [Add a device]. Select the machine's icon and then click [Next].

When the machine's icon is displayed in "Printers" on the [Devices and Printers] screen, the

installation is completed.

In Windows 7

1Display [Network] in the Start menu.

Click [Start] button on the Windows and then select [Network].

2Install the driver.

Right-click the machine's icon and then click [Install].

During the installation, double-click the icon shown on the task bar to display the "Driver

Software Installation" screen. When "Your devices are ready to use" is displayed on the

[Driver Software Installation] screen, the installation is completed.

NOTE

• To use WSD Scan, confirm that the computer used for WSD scanning and the machine is network-connected, and

"WSD Scan" is set to [On] in the network settings.

WSD-SCAN (page 8-15)

• For information on operating the computer, refer to the computer's help or the operation guide of your software.

NOTE

When [Network] does not appear in the Start menu, perform the following procedure.

1Right-click [Start] and click [Property] in the menu that appears.

2Select the [[Start] menu] tab in the "Task bar and [Start] menu properties" screen, and

click [Customize].

3When the "Customize [Start] menu" screen appears, select the "Network" check box

and click [OK].

NOTE

If the "User Account Control" window appears, click [Continue].

If the "Found New Hardware" window appears, click [Cancel].

5-23

Operation on the Machine > WSD Scan

For Windows 10

1Right-click [Start] button on the Windows and select [Control

Panel] and then [View devices and printer].

2Install the driver.

Click [Add a device]. Select the machine's icon and then click [Next].

When the machine's icon is displayed in "Printers" on the [Devices and Printers] screen, the

installation is completed.

WSD scan

1Select the [Send] key.

2Place the originals.

3Display the screen.

[▲] [▼] key > [WSD Scan] > [OK] key

Loading Originals (page 5-2)

5-24

Operation on the Machine > WSD Scan

4Scan the originals.

Procedure using this machine

1[▲] [▼] key > [From Oper. Panel] > [OK] key

2Select the destination computer, and select the [OK] key.

You can view information on the selected computer by selecting [Detail].

3Select the [Function Menu] key to set the type of original, file format, etc., as desired.

4Press the [Start] key.

Sending begins and the software installed on the computer is activated.

Procedure from Your Computer

1[▲] [▼] key > [From Computer] > [OK] key

2Use the software installed on the computer to send the images.

5-25

Operation on the Machine > Using fax server to send a fax (fax server transmission)

Using fax server to send a fax

(fax server transmission)

You can send a scanned document through a fax server.

Configuring Settings before Sending

Before sending a fax, the following setting is required.

• Configure the fax server settings.

FAX Server Settings (page 8-18)

Command Center RX User Guide

Using fax server to send a fax

1Select the [Send] key.

2Place the originals.

Place the originals.

3[▲] [▼] key > [FAX Server] > [OK] key

NOTE

To use this function, you must have a fax server. For information on your fax server, ask your administrator.

Loading Originals (page 5-2)

5-26

Operation on the Machine > Using fax server to send a fax (fax server transmission)

4Specifying destination.

Entering the destination fax number with the numeric keys

1Select [Fax No. Entry].

2Enter the fax number.

3Select [OK] key.

Destinations can be changed later.

Choosing from the Address Book

1Select [Address Book].

2Select the destination.

3Select [OK] key.

Destinations can be changed later.

5Select the functions.

Select the [Function Menu] key to select the send functions to use.

6Press the [Start] key.

Sending starts.

NOTE

Use the numeric keys to enter a number.

Confirmation Screen of Destinations (page 5-34)

NOTE

The address book set in [AddrBookDefaults] of "FAX Server Set." is displayed.

Choosing from the Address Book (page 5-30)

Confirmation Screen of Destinations (page 5-34)

Send (page 6-4)

5-27

Operation on the Machine > Sending to Different Types of Destinations (Multi Sending)

Sending to Different Types of Destinations

(Multi Sending)

You can specify destinations that combine E-mail addresses, folders (SMB or FTP) and fax numbers (Fax functionality

can only be used on products equipped with fax capability.). This is referred to as Multi Sending. This is useful for

sending to different types of destination (E-mail addresses, folders, etc.) in a single operation.

No. of broadcast items: Up to 100

However, number of items are restricted for the following sending options.

Folders (SMP, FTP): Total of 5 SMB and FTP

Procedures are the same as used in specifying the destinations of respective types. Continue to enter E-mail address or

folder path so that they appear in the destination list. Press the [Start] key to start transmission to all destinations at one

time.

NOTE

If the destinations include a fax, the images sent to all destinations will be black and white.

5-28

Operation on the Machine > Send to Me (E-mail)

Send to Me (E-mail)

When user login is enabled, the document is sent to the E-mail address of the logged in user.

Sending a document to the mail address of the logged

in user

1In the basic screen for sending, select [▲] [▼] key >

[Me(E-mail)] > [OK] key

NOTE

• To use this function, user control must be set to network authentication and the e-mail address of the user must be

registered in the network authentication server.

• For the procedure for setting an e-mail address, check with the administrator for network authentication server

users.

NOTE

If the e-mail address is not registered in the network authentication server, e-mail cannot be

sent.

5-29

Operation on the Machine > Canceling Sending Jobs

Canceling Sending Jobs

1Select the [Stop] key with the send screen displayed.

The [Job Cancel List] menu appears.

2Cancel jobs.

1[▲] [▼] key > [Cancel Send Job] > [OK] key

2Select the job to cancel, and [Menu].

3[▲] [▼] key > [Cancel Job] > [OK] key

4Select [Yes].

The job is canceled.

NOTE

Selecting the [

Stop

] key will not temporarily stop a job that you have already started sending.

NOTE

Select [Detail] and the [OK] key to show the detailed information of the job.

NOTE

During scanning, the job can be canceled by selecting the [Stop] key or [Cancel].

5-30

Operation on the Machine > Handling Destination

Handling Destination

This section explains how to select and confirm the destination.

Specifying Destination

Select the destination using either of the following methods except entering address directly:

• Choosing from the Address Book

• Choosing from the External Address Book

For details on the External Address Book, refer to the following:

• Choosing from One Touch key.

• Choosing from the FAX

Choosing from the Address Book

Registering Destinations in the Address Book (page 3-18)

1In the basic screen for sending, select the [Address Book] key.

2Select the destinations.

1[▲] [] key > [Address Book] > [OK] key

2Select the destination.

Choosing from the Address Book (page 5-30)

Command Center RX User Guide

Choosing from the One Touch Key (page 5-32)

FAX Operation Guide

NOTE

• You can set the machine up so that the address book screen appears when you select the [Send] key.

Default Screen (page 8-35)

• If you are using the products equipped with the fax function, you can specify the fax destination. Enter the other

party number using the numeric keypad.

NOTE

For details on the External Address Book, refer to the following:

Command Center RX User Guide

NOTE

When checking information of the destination, select [Menu] > [Details] > [OK] key

5-31

Operation on the Machine > Handling Destination

Destination Search

The destination can be searched by name.

1[Menu] > [▲] [] key > [Search (Name)] > [OK] key

2Enter characters to search using the numeric keys.

3Select the [OK] key.

The searched destination is displayed.

3Select the [OK] key.

To send to multiple destinations, repeat steps 1 to 3. You can send to as many as 100

destinations at once.

Destinations can be changed later.

Choosing from the External Address Book

1Display the screen.

1In the basic screen for sending, select[Address Book] key [Menu] > [▲] [▼] key >

[Switch Addr Book] > [OK] key

2[▲] [▼] key > Select external address book > [OK] key

2Select the destinations.

1Select the destination.

NOTE

For details on entering characters, refer to the following:

Character Entry Method (page 11-8)

Confirmation Screen of Destinations (page 5-34)

NOTE

For details on the External Address Book, refer to the following:

Command Center RX User Guide

NOTE

When checking information of the destination, select [Menu] > [Details] > [OK] key

5-32

Operation on the Machine > Handling Destination

Destination Search

The destination can be searched by name.

1[Menu] > [▲] [] key > [Search (Name)] > [OK] key

2Enter characters to search using the numeric keys.

3Select the [OK] key.

The searched destination is displayed.

3Select the [OK] key.

To send to multiple destinations, repeat steps 1 to 3. You can send to as many as 100

destinations at once.

Destinations can be changed later.

Choosing from the One Touch Key

In the basic screen for sending, select the One Touch Keys where the destination is registered.

When selecting One Touch Key numbers 12 to 22, the One touch Key needs to be selected after switching on the [Shift

Lock] indicator by selecting the [Shift Lock] key.

Destinations can be changed later.

Confirmation Screen of Destinations (page 5-34)

NOTE

For details on entering characters, refer to the following:

Character Entry Method (page 11-8)

Confirmation Screen of Destinations (page 5-34)

NOTE

This procedure assumes that One Touch Keys have already been registered.

For more information on adding One Touch keys, refer to the following:

Adding a Destination on One Touch Key (One Touch Key) (page 3-25)

5-33

Operation on the Machine > Handling Destination

Checking and Editing Destinations

1Display the screen.

Specify the destination.

2Check and edit the destination.

Select the [Confirm/Add Destination] key.

Add the destination

1Select [Add].

2Set the destinations to be added.

Edit the destination

1Select the destination you want to edit, and select the [OK] key.

2[▲] [▼] key > [Detail/Edit] > [OK] key

3Edit the destinations > [OK] key

Delete the destination

1Select the destination you want to delete, and select the [OK] key.

2[▲] [▼] key > [Delete] > [OK] key > [Yes]

3Select [Exit].

Specifying Destination (page 5-30)

NOTE

To edit a destination registered in the address book or a One Touch Key, refer to the

following:

Editing Address Book Entries (page 3-23)

Editing One Touch Key (page 3-26)

NOTE

When selecting [On] for Destination Check before Send, the confirmation screen appears

after pressing the [Start] key.

Check beforeSend (page 8-35)

Confirmation Screen of Destinations (page 5-34)

5-34

Operation on the Machine > Handling Destination

Confirmation Screen of Destinations

When selecting [On] for Destination Check before Send, the confirmation screen of destinations appears after pressing

the [Start] key.

DestinationCheck (page 8-35)

1Confirm all destination.

To show the detailed information of the destination, select the destination and [OK] key >

[▲][▼]key> [Detail] > [OK] key

To delete the destination, select the destination you want to delete and [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key >

[Delete] > [OK] key > [Yes]

The destination is deleted.

2Select [Next].

Recall

Recall is a function allowing you to send the last entered destination once again. When you want to send the image to

the same destination, select the [Address Recall/Pause] key, and you can call the destination you sent on the

destination list.

1Select the [Address Recall/Pause] key.

The destination you sent is displayed on the destination list.

2Press the [Start] key.

Sending starts.

NOTE

Be sure to confirm all destination by displaying them on the message display. You cannot

select [Next] unless you have confirmed all destination.

NOTE

The products without the fax function have the [Address Recall] key instead of the [Address Recall/Pause] key.

NOTE

When the last sending included FAX, folders and E-mail destinations, they are also

displayed. If necessary, add or delete the destination.

NOTE

• When [On] is selected in "Check beforeSend", a destination confirmation screen is

displayed when you press the [Start] key.

Confirmation Screen of Destinations (page 5-34)

• Recall information is canceled in the following conditions.

- When you turn the power off

- When you send a next image (new recall information is registered)

- When you log out

5-35

Operation on the Machine > How to use the FAX Function

How to use the FAX Function

On products with a FAX function, it is possible to use the FAX function.

FAX Operation Guide

5-36

Operation on the Machine > Using Document Boxes

Using Document Boxes

The available Document Boxes are as follows: Job Box, removal USB memory, Subaddress Box, and Polling Box.

What is Job Box?

Job Box is a generic name for the "Private Print/Stored Job Box" and "Quick Copy/Proof and Hold Box". These Job

Boxes cannot be created or deleted by a user.

What is Removable Memory Box?

A USB memory stick can be connected to the USB memory slot on the machine to print a saved file. You can print data

directly from the USB memory without a PC. Image files scanned using this machine can also be saved to USB memory

in the PDF, TIFF, JPEG, XPS, OpenXPS or high compression PDF format (Scan to USB).

What is Sub Address Box/Polling Box?

Sub Address Box/Polling Box store the fax data.

FAX Operation Guide

NOTE

• To use the Stored Job Box and the Quick Copy Box, an SD/SDHC memory card must be installed in the device.

• You can set up the machine so that temporary documents in job boxes are automatically deleted.

JobRet. Deletion (page 8-36)

• For details on operating the Job Box, refer to the following:

Printing Data Saved in the Printer (page 4-10)

IMPORTANT

Unencrypted data is saved on the SD/SDHC memory card.

Exercise caution when saving sensitive documents.

5-37

Operation on the Machine > Operating using Removable USB Memory

Operating using Removable USB Memory

Plugging USB memory directly into the machine enables you to quickly and easily print the files stored in the USB

memory without having to use a computer.

The following file types can be printed:

• PDF file (Version 1.7 or older)

• TIFF file (TIFF V6/TTN2 format)

• JPEG file

• XPS file

• OpenXPS file

• Encrypted PDF file

In addition, you can store scanned image files in USB memory connected to the machine.

The following file types can be stored:

• PDF file format

• TIFF file format

• JPEG file format

• XPS file format

• OpenXPS file format

• High-compression PDF file format

Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB

Memory

1Plug the USB memory.

Plug the USB memory into the USB Memory Slot.

NOTE

• PDF files you wish to print should have an extension (.pdf).

• Files to be printed should be saved no further down than the top 3 folder levels, including the root folder.

• Use USB memory properly formatted by this machine.

• Plug the USB memory directly into the USB Memory Slot.

5-38

Operation on the Machine > Operating using Removable USB Memory

2Display the screen.

[Document Box/USB] key > [▲] [▼] key > [USB Memory] > [OK] key

3Print the document.

1Select the folder containing the file to be printed, and select the [OK] key.

The machine will display documents in the top 3 folder levels, including the root folder.

2Select the document you want to print, and [Select].

A checkmark will be placed on the right of the selected file.

Select the checkmarked file and select [Select] again to cancel the selection.

3[OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Print] > [OK] key

4Change the number of copies, duplex printing, etc. as desired.

For the features that can be selected, refer to the following:

5Press the [Start] key.

Printing of the selected file begins.

NOTE

• 1,000 documents can be displayed.

• To return to a higher level folder, select the [Back] key.

NOTE

Select [Menu] to perform the following operations.

•[Select All]: Select all files.

•[Clear All]: Cancel all the file selections.

•[Detail]: Display the details for the selected file.

•[Memory Detail]: Display the detail for the USB memory.

•[Remove Memory]: Remove the USB memory.

Removable Memory (Store File, Printing Documents) (page 6-5)

5-39

Operation on the Machine > Operating using Removable USB Memory

Saving Documents to USB Memory (Scan to USB)

1Place the originals.

2Plug the USB memory.

Plug the USB memory into the USB Memory Slot.

3Display the screen.

[Document Box/USB] key > [▲] [▼] key > [USB Memory] > [OK] key

NOTE

The maximum number of the storable files is 1,000.

Loading Originals (page 5-2)

5-40

Operation on the Machine > Operating using Removable USB Memory

4Store the document.

1Select the folder where the file will be stored, and the [OK] key.

The machine will display the top 3 folder levels, including the root folder.

2[▲] [▼] key > [Store File] > [OK] key

3Set the type of original, file format, etc., as desired.

For the features that can be set, refer to the following:

4Press the [Start] key.

The original is scanned and the data is stored in the USB memory.

Check the USB Memory Information

1Display the screen.

[Document Box/USB] key > [▲] [▼] key > [USB Memory] > [OK] key > [Menu] >

[▲][▼]key> [Memory Detail] > [OK] key

2Check the information.

Select the [►] key to view the next screen. Select the [◄] key to return to the previous screen.

Once you confirm the information, select the [OK] key.

Removing USB Memory

1Display the screen.

[Reset] key > [▲] [▼] key > [USB Memory] > [OK] key

2Select [Remove Memory].

[Menu] > [▲] [▼] key > [Remove Memory] > [OK] key

3Remove the USB memory.

When "USB memory can be safely removed." is displayed, select [OK] and then remove the

USB memory.

Removable Memory (Store File, Printing Documents) (page 6-5)

IMPORTANT

Be sure to follow the proper procedure to avoid damaging the data or USB memory.

NOTE

USB memory can also be removed after checking the status of the device.

Device/Communication (page 7-14)

6-1

Using Various Functions

This chapter explains the following topics:

Functions Available on the Machine .................................................................................................................. 6-2

About Functions Available on the Machine .............................................................................................. 6-2

How to Select Functions .......................................................................................................................... 6-2

Copy ........................................................................................................................................................ 6-3

Send ........................................................................................................................................................ 6-4

Removable Memory (Store File, Printing Documents) ............................................................................. 6-5

Functions ........................................................................................................................................................... 6-7

Paper Selection ....................................................................................................................................... 6-8

Collate ...................................................................................................................................................... 6-9

Duplex ...................................................................................................................................................... 6-9

Zoom ...................................................................................................................................................... 6-12

Combine ................................................................................................................................................ 6-14

Original Size .......................................................................................................................................... 6-16

Original Orientation ................................................................................................................................ 6-16

Mixed Size Originals .............................................................................................................................. 6-17

Original Image ....................................................................................................................................... 6-17

Density ................................................................................................................................................... 6-18

EcoPrint ................................................................................................................................................. 6-18

Continuous Scan ................................................................................................................................... 6-18

File Name Entry ..................................................................................................................................... 6-19

Job Finish Notice ................................................................................................................................... 6-19

Priority Override ..................................................................................................................................... 6-19

Color Selection ...................................................................................................................................... 6-20

Sharpness .............................................................................................................................................. 6-20

Contrast ................................................................................................................................................. 6-21

Background Density Adj. (Background Density Adjustment) ................................................................. 6-21

Skip Blank Page .................................................................................................................................... 6-22

Scan Resolution ..................................................................................................................................... 6-22

Sending Size .......................................................................................................................................... 6-23

File Format ............................................................................................................................................. 6-24

Subject/Body .......................................................................................................................................... 6-28

Duplex (2-sided Original) ....................................................................................................................... 6-28

FTP Encrypted TX ................................................................................................................................. 6-29

File Separation ....................................................................................................................................... 6-29

Storing Size ............................................................................................................................................ 6-30

Encrypted PDF ...................................................................................................................................... 6-30

JPEG/TIFF Print .................................................................................................................................... 6-31

XPS Fit to Page ..................................................................................................................................... 6-31

6-2

Using Various Functions > Functions Available on the Machine

Functions Available on the Machine

About Functions Available on the Machine

This machine provides the various functions available.

How to Select Functions

To configure the settings for functions, select the [Function Menu] key.

1 Displays the function menu.

2 Selects the item displayed or

changes the numeric value.

3 Confirms the selected setting.

4 Cancels the current menu setting to

return to the menu one level higher.

Operation Method (page 2-13)

6-3

Using Various Functions > Functions Available on the Machine

Copy

For details on each function, see the table below.

Key Function Description Reference

page

Paper Selection Select the cassette or multipurpose tray that contains

the required paper size.

page 6-8

Collate Offsets the output by page or set. page 6-9

Duplex Produces two-sided prints. You can also create

single-sided copies from two-sided originals.

page 6-9

Zoom Adjust the zoom to reduce or enlarge the image. page 6-12

Combine Combines 2 or 4 original sheets into 1 printed page. page 6-14

Original Size Specify the original size to be scanned. page 6-16

Orig. Orientation Select the orientation of the original document top

edge to scan correct direction.

page 6-16

Mixed Size Originals Scan the documents of different sizes that are set in

the document processor all at once.

page 6-17

Original Image Select original image type for best results. page 6-17

Density Adjust density. page 6-18

EcoPrint EcoPrint saves toner when printing. page 6-18

Continuous Scan Scans a large number of originals in separate batches

and then produce as one job.

page 6-18

File Name Entry Adds a file name. page 6-19

JobFinish Notice Sends E-mail notice when a job is complete. page 6-19

Priority Override Suspends the current job and gives a new job top

priority.

page 6-19

Sharpness Adjusts the sharpness of image outlines. page 6-20

Contrast You can adjust the contrast between light and dark

areas of the image.

page 6-21

Backgrnd Density Removes dark background from originals, such as

newspapers.

page 6-21

Skip Blank Page When there are blank pages in a scanned document,

this function skips the blank pages and prints only

pages that are not blank.

page 6-22

6-4

Using Various Functions > Functions Available on the Machine

Send

For details on each function, see the table below.

Key Function Description Reference

page

Color Selection Select the color mode setting. page 6-20

Original Size Specify the original size to be scanned. page 6-16

Original Image Select original image type for best results. page 6-17

Scan Resolution Select fineness of scanning resolution. page 6-22

Sending Size Select size of image to be sent. page 6-23

Zoom Adjust the zoom to reduce or enlarge the image. page 6-12

Orig. Orientation Select the orientation of the original document top

edge to scan correct direction.

page 6-16

Mixed Size Originals Scan the documents of different sizes that are set in

the document processor all at once.

page 6-17

Continuous Scan Scans a large number of originals in separate

batches and then produce as one job.

page 6-18

File Format Specify the image file format. Image quality level

can also be adjusted.

page 6-24

File Name Entry Adds a file name. page 6-19

Subject/Body Adds subject and body when sending a document. page 6-28

JobFinish Notice Sends E-mail notice when a job is complete. page 6-19

FAX Resolution Select fineness of images when sending FAX. Refer to the

FAX

Operation

Guide.

FAX Delayed TX Set a send time.

FAX Direct TX Sends FAX directly without reading original data

into memory.

FAX RX Polling Dial the destination and receive documents for

Polling Transmission stored in the polling box.

FAX TX Report Print a report of fax transmission results.

Density Adjust density. page 6-18

Duplex Select the type and orientation of the binding based

on the original.

page 6-28

FTP Encrypted TX Encrypts images when sending via FTP. page 6-29

File Separation Creates several files by dividing scanned original

data page by page, and sends the files.

page 6-29

Sharpness Adjusts the sharpness of image outlines. page 6-20

Contrast You can adjust the contrast between light and dark

areas of the image.

page 6-21

Backgrnd Density Removes dark background from originals, such as

newspapers.

page 6-21

Skip Blank Page When there are blank pages in a scanned

document, this function skips the blank pages and

prints only pages that are not blank.

page 6-22

NOTE

Funtions that can be used with fax server transmission are as follows:

Original Size, Duplex, Density, Original Image, FAX TX Resolution, Continuous Scan

6-5

Using Various Functions > Functions Available on the Machine

Removable Memory (Store File, Printing Documents)

For details on each function, see the table below.

Store File

Key Function Description Reference

page

Color Selection Select the color mode setting. page 6-20

Original Size Specify the original size to be scanned. page 6-16

Original Image Select original image type for best results. page 6-17

Scan Resolution Select fineness of scanning resolution. page 6-22

Storing Size Select size of image to be stored. page 6-30

Zoom Adjust the zoom to reduce or enlarge the image. page 6-12

Orig. Orientation Select the orientation of the original document top

edge to scan correct direction.

page 6-16

Mixed Size Originals Scan the documents of different sizes that are set in

the document processor all at once.

page 6-17

Continuous Scan Scans a large number of originals in separate

batches and then produce as one job.

page 6-18

File Format Specify the image file format. Image quality level

can also be adjusted.

page 6-24

File Separation Creates several files by dividing scanned original

data page by page, and sends the files.

page 6-29

File Name Entry Adds a file name. page 6-19

JobFinish Notice Sends E-mail notice when a job is complete. page 6-19

Density Adjust density. page 6-18

Duplex Select the type and orientation of the binding based

on the original.

page 6-28

Sharpness Adjusts the sharpness of image outlines. page 6-20

Contrast You can adjust the contrast between light and dark

areas of the image.

page 6-21

Backgrnd Density Removes dark background from originals, such as

newspapers.

page 6-21

Skip Blank Page When there are blank pages in a scanned

document, this function skips the blank pages and

prints only pages that are not blank.

page 6-22

6-6

Using Various Functions > Functions Available on the Machine

Printing Documents

Key Function Description Reference

page

Collate Offsets the output by page or set. page 6-9

Paper Selection Select the cassette or multipurpose tray that

contains the required paper size.

page 6-8

Duplex Print a document on both sides of the paper. page 6-11

EcoPrint EcoPrint saves toner when printing. page 6-18

File Name Entry Adds a file name. page 6-19

JobFinish Notice Sends E-mail notice when a job is complete. page 6-19

Priority Override Suspends the current job and gives a new job top

priority.

page 6-19

Encrypted PDF Enter the preassigned password to print the PDF

data.

page 6-30

JPEG/TIFF Print Select the image size when printing JPEG or TIFF

files.

page 6-31

XPS Fit to Page Reduces or enlarges the image size to fit to the

selected paper size when printing XPS file.

page 6-31

6-7

Using Various Functions > Functions

Functions

On pages that explain a convenient function, the modes in which that function can be used are indicated by icons.

Printing:

Sending:

Storing:

Copy

Print from

USB

Send

Scan to

USB

6-8

Using Various Functions > Functions

Paper Selection

Select the cassette or multipurpose tray that contains the required paper size.

If [Auto] is selected, the paper matching the size of the original is selected automatically.

Before selecting [MP Tray], you need to select [MP Tray Set.] and specify the paper size and media type. The available

paper sizes and media types are shown in the table below.

NOTE

• Specify in advance the size and type of the paper loaded in the cassette.

Cassette 1 (to 3) Set. (Cassette 1 (to 3) Settings) (page 8-23)

MP Tray Set. (Multipurpose Tray Settings) (page 8-23)

• Cassettes 2 to 3 are displayed when the optional paper feeder is installed.

Item Value Description

Auto The paper matching the size of the

original is selected automatically.

Cassette 1 (to 3) *1

*1 Cassette 2 to Cassette 3 are displayed when the optional paper feeder is installed.

Feed paper from cassette 1 (to 3).

MP Tray Feed paper from the multipurpose tray.

MP Tray Set. ―Before selecting [MP Tray], you need to

select [MP Tray Set.] and specify the

paper size and media type.

Standard Size A4, A5-R, A5, A6, B5, B6, Folio, 216 × 340 mm, Letter,

Legal, Statement, Executive, Oficio II, 16K, ISO B5,

Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6,

Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5,

Hagaki (Cardstock), Oufuku Hagaki (Return postcard),

Youkei 4, Youkei 2, Custom*2

*2 For instructions on how to specify the custom paper sizes, refer to the following:

Custom PaperSize (page 8-21)

Select from the standard sizes and

custom size.

Size Entry

Set the sizes of [

] (vertical).

Metric: 148 to 356 mm (in 1 mm increments)

Inch: 5.83 to 14.02" (in 0.01" increments)

Enter the size not included in the

standard size.*3

When you have selected [Size Entry],

use [▲]/[▼] or the numeric keys to set

the sizes of "X" (horizontal) and "Y"

(vertical).

*3 The input units can be changed in System Menu.

Measurement (page 8-24)

Set the sizes of [

] (horizontal).

Metric: 70 to 216 mm (in 1 mm increments)

Inch: 2.76 to 8.50" (in 0.01" increments)

Media Type Plain (60 to 105 g/m2), Transparency, Rough,

Vellum (60 to 220 g/m2), Labels, Recycled,*4

Preprinted*4, Bond, Cardstock, Color, Prepunched*4,

Letterhead*4, Envelope, Thick (106 to 220 g/m2),

High Quality, Custom 1 to 8*4

*4 For instructions on how to specify the custom paper types 1 to 8, refer to the following:

Media Type Setting (page 8-24)

To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead, refer to the following:

SpecialPaper Act. (page 8-22)

Select the media type.

Displayed after [Standard Size] or [Size

Entry] is set in [MP Tray Set.].

Copy

Print from

USB

6-9

Using Various Functions > Functions

Collate

Offsets the output by page or set.

(Value: [Off] / [On])

Duplex

Produces two-sided prints. You can also create single-sided copies from two-sided originals.

The following modes are available.

One-sided to Two-sided

NOTE

• You can conveniently select in advance the size and type of paper that will be used often and set them as default.

MP Tray Set. (Multipurpose Tray Settings) (page 8-23)

• If the specified size of paper is not loaded in the paper source cassette or multipurpose tray, a confirmation screen

appears. Load the required paper in the multipurpose tray and select [

] to start copying.

Produces two-sided copies from one-sided originals. In case of an odd

number of originals, the back side of the last copy will be blank.

The following binding options are available.

A Binding Left/Right: Images on the second sides are not rotated.

B Binding Top: Images on the second sides are rotated 180 degrees.

Copies can be bound on the top edge, facing the same orientation

when turning the pages.

Copy

Print from

USB

Copy

Print from

USB

Original Copy

ghi

def

abc

ghi

abc

def

ghi

abc

def

Original Copy

6-10

Using Various Functions > Functions

Two-sided to One-sided (Only on models with a duplex scanning function.)

Two-sided to Two-sided (Only on models with a duplex scanning function.)

Copying

Prints 1-sided originals to 2-sided. Select the binding orientation for original and finished documents.

Copies each side of a two-sided original onto two individual sheets.

The following binding options are available.

• Binding Left/Right: Images on the second sides are not rotated.

• Binding Top: Images on the second sides are rotated 180 degrees.

Produces two-sided copies from two-sided originals.

NOTE

The paper sizes supported in Two-sided to Two-sided mode are A4, B5, A5-R, Legal, Letter, Executive, Statement,

Oficio II, 216 × 340 mm, Folio, ISO B5 and 16K.

Item Value Description

1-sided>>1-sided ―Disables the function.

1-sided>>2-sided ―Select the [OK] key to copy the original with the default setting.

For the default settings, refer to the following:

Function Defaults (page 8-28)

Finish. Binding Left/Right, Top Select [Detail] to display the [Finish. Binding] screen.

Select the binding orientation of copies, and select the [OK] key.

Orig. Orientation Top Edge on Top,

Top Edge on Left

Select the orientation of the original document top edge to scan correct direction.

Choose orientation of the originals, either [Top Edge on Top] or [Top Edge on

Left]. Then select the [OK] key.

2-sided>>1-sided*1 ―Select the [OK] key to copy the original with the default setting.

For the default settings, refer to the following:

Function Defaults (page 8-28)

Orig. Binding Left/Right, Top Select [Detail] to display the [Orig. Binding] screen.

Select the binding orientation of originals, and select the [OK] key.

Orig. Orientation Top Edge on Top,

Top Edge on Left

Select the orientation of the original document top edge to scan correct direction.

Choose orientation of the originals, either [Top Edge on Top] or [Top Edge on

Left]. Then select the [OK] key.

Original Copy

6-11

Using Various Functions > Functions

When placing the original on the platen, consecutively replace each original and press the [Start] key.

After scanning all originals, select [End Scan] to start copying.

Printing

Print a document on both sides of the paper.

2-sided>>2-sided*1 ―Select the [OK] key to copy the original with the default setting.

For the default settings, refer to the following:

Function Defaults (page 8-28)

Orig. Binding Left/Right, Top Select [Detail] to display the [Orig. Binding] screen.

Select the binding direction of originals, and select the [OK] key.

Finish. Binding Left/Right, Top Select the binding orientation of copies, and select the [OK] key.

Orig. Orientation Top Edge on Top,

Top Edge on Left

Select the orientation of the original document top edge to scan correct direction.

Choose orientation of the originals, either [Top Edge on Top] or [Top Edge on

Left]. Then select the [OK] key.

*1 Only on models with a duplex scanning function.

Item Value Description

1-sided ―Disables the function.

2-sided ―Select the [OK] key to print a 2-sided document with the default setting.

For the default settings, refer to the following:

Function Defaults (page 8-28)

Finish. Binding Left/Right, Top Select [Detail] to display the [Finish. Binding] screen.

Select the binding orientation of copies, and select the [OK] key.

Item Value Description

6-12

Using Various Functions > Functions

Zoom

Adjust the zoom to reduce or enlarge the image.

Copying

The following zoom options are available.

Auto

Adjusts the image to match the paper size.

Standard Zoom

Reduces or enlarges at preset magnifications.*1

*1 LTR=Letter

LGL=Legal

STMT=Statement

FOL=Folio

Others

Reduces or enlarges at magnifications other than the Standard Zoom.*1

*1 LTR=Letter

LGL=Legal

STMT=Statement

FOL=Folio

Model Zoom Level (Original Copy) Model Zoom Level (Original Copy)

Metric Models 400%

200%

141% A5 >> A4

115% B5 >> A4

100%

90% FOL >> A4

86% A4 >> B5

70% A4 >> A5

50%

25%

Inch Models 400%

200%

129% STMT>>LTR

100%

78% LGL>>LTR

64% LTR>>STMT

50%

25%

Model Zoom Level (Original Copy) Model Zoom Level (Original Copy)

Metric Models 129% STMT>>LTR

78% LGL>>LTR

64% LTR>>STMT

Inch Models 141% A5 >> A4

115% B5 >> A4

90% FOL>>A4

86% A4 >> B5

70% A4 >> A5

Copy

Send

Scan to

USB

A4: 141%

A6: 70%

6-13

Using Various Functions > Functions

Zoom Entry

Manually reduces or enlarges the original image in 1% increments between 25% and 400%. Use the numeric keys or

select [▲] or [▼] to enter the any magnification.

Sending/Storing

Item Description

100% Reproduces the original size.

Auto Reduces or enlarges original to sending/storing size.

NOTE

To reduce or enlarge the image, select the paper size, sending size, or storing size.

Paper Selection (page 6-8)

Sending Size (page 6-23)

Storing Size (page 6-30)

6-14

Using Various Functions > Functions

Combine

Combines 2 or 4 original sheets into 1 printed page.

You can select the page layout and the type of boundary lines around the pages.

The following types of the boundary lines are available.

Select [2 in 1] or [4 in 1], select [Detail], and configure the function.

Item Value Description

Off ―Disables the function.

2 in 1 ―Select the [OK] key to copy the original with the default setting. For the default

settings, refer to the following:

Function Defaults (page 8-28)

2 in 1 Layout L to R T to B,

R to L, B to T

Select the page layout of scanned originals, and select the [OK] key.

Border Line None, Solid Line,

Dotted Line,

Positioning Mark

Select the page boundary line, and select the [OK] key.

Orig. Orientation Top Edge on Top,

Top Edge on Left

Select the orientation of the original document top edge to scan correct direction.

Choose orientation of the originals, either [Top Edge on Top] or [Top Edge on

Left]. Then select the [OK] key.

4 in 1 ―Select the [OK] key to copy the original with the default setting. For the default

settings, refer to the following:

Function Defaults (page 8-28)

4 in 1 Layout Right then Down,

Down then Right,

Left then Down,

Down then Left

Select the page layout of scanned originals, and select the [OK] key.

Border Line None, Solid Line,

Dotted Line,

Positioning Mark

Select the page boundary line, and select the [OK] key.

Orig. Orientation Top Edge on Top,

Top Edge on Left

Select the orientation of the original document top edge to scan correct direction.

Choose orientation of the originals, either [Top Edge on Top] or [Top Edge on

Left]. Then select the [OK] key.

Copy

None Dotted LineSolid Line Positioning Mark

6-15

Using Various Functions > Functions

Layout image

Item Image

2 in 1 L to R/T to B

R to L/B to T

4 in 1 Right then Down

Left then Down

Down then Right

Down then Left

NOTE

• The paper sizes supported in Combine mode: A4, A5-R, B5, Folio, 216 × 340 mm, Letter, Legal, Statement, Oficio II,

16K

• When placing the original on the platen, be sure to copy the originals in page order.

6-16

Using Various Functions > Functions

Original Size

Specify the original size to be scanned.

Original Orientation

Select the orientation of the original document top edge to scan correct direction.

To use any of the following functions, the document's original orientation must be set.

•Duplex

• Combine

• Duplex (2-sided Original)

Select original orientation from [Top Edge on Top] or [Top Edge on Left].

Item Description

Auto (DP)*1, A4, A5, A6, B5, B6, Folio, 216 × 340 mm,

Letter, Legal*2, Statement, Executive, Oficio II, 16K, ISO B5,

Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6,

Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5,

Hagaki (Cardstock), Oufuku Hagaki (Return postcard),

Youkei 4, Youkei 2, Custom*3

*1 This function is displayed when [Auto Detect] in [Detect Orig.(DP)] is set to [On].

Detect Orig.(DP) (page 8-20)

*2 In regions other than North America, the original can only be placed in the document feeder.

*3 For instructions on how to specify the custom original size, refer to the following:

Custom Orig. Size (page 8-20)

Select from standard sizes and custom size.

NOTE

Be sure to always specify the original size when using custom size original.

Item Image

Top Edge on Top

Top Edge on Left

NOTE

The default setting for Original Orientation can be changed.

Original Orientation (page 8-28)

Copy

Send

Scan to

USB

Copy

Send

Scan to

USB

Original Original orientation

6-17

Using Various Functions > Functions

Mixed Size Originals

Scan the documents of different sizes that are set in the document processor all at once.

This function cannot be used if platen is used.

(Value: [Off] / [On])

Supported Combinations of Originals

Legal and Letter (Folio and A4)

Original Image

Select original image type for best results.

Copying

Sending/Storing

Item Description

Text+Photo*1

*1 If gray text is not printed completely using [Text + Photo], selecting [Text] may improve the result.

Best for mixed text and photo documents.

Photo Best for photos taken with a camera.

Text Best for documents that are mostly text.

Graphic/Map Best for graphics and maps.

Item Description

Text+Photo Best for mixed text and photo documents.

Photo Best for photos taken with a camera.

Text Best for documents that are mostly text.

For OCR*1

*1 This function is only available when "Color Selection" is set to [Black & White]. For details, refer to the following:

Color Selection (page 6-20)

Scanning produces an image that is suitable for OCR.

Light Text/Fine Line Clearly reproduces faint characters written in pencil, etc., and thin lines on map originals or diagrams.

Copy

Send

Scan to

USB

Copy

Send

Scan to

USB

6-18

Using Various Functions > Functions

Density

Adjust density.

(Value: [-4] to [+4] (Lighter to Darker))

EcoPrint

EcoPrint saves toner when printing.

Use this function for test prints or any other occasion when high quality print is not required.

(Value: [Off] / [On])

Continuous Scan

Scans a large number of originals in separate batches and then produce as one job.

Originals will be scanned continuously until you select [End Scan].

(Value: [Off] / [On])

Copy

Send

Scan to

USB

Copy

Print from

USB

Copy

Send

Scan to

USB

1~10

1~30

11~20

21~30

6-19

Using Various Functions > Functions

File Name Entry

Adds a file name.

Additional information such as job number and date and time can also be set. You can check a job history or job status

using the file name, date and time, or job number specified here.

Enter the file name (up to 32 characters), and select [OK].

To add date and time, select [Date] and the [OK] key. To add job number, select [Job No.] and the [OK] key. To add

both, select [Job No. + Date] or [Date + Job No.] and the [OK] key.

Job Finish Notice

Sends E-mail notice when a job is complete.

Users can be notified of the completion of a job while working at a remote desk, saving the time spent waiting beside the

machine to finish.

Priority Override

Suspends the current job and gives a new job top priority.

The suspended job resumes after the other job is finished.

(Value: [Off] / [On])

NOTE

PC should be configured in advance so that E-mail can be used.

Command Center RX (page 2-45)

E-mail can be sent to a single destination.

Item Description

Off Disables the function.

On Address Book Select the notification destination from the Address Book or External Address Book*1.

Select the destination on the Address Book or Ext Address Book screen, then select the [OK] key.

*1 For details on the External Address Book, refer to the following:

Command Center RX User Guide

Address Entry Enter E-mail address directly. Enter the address (up to 128 characters) and select the [OK] key.

NOTE

• This function is not available if current job was an override.

• Priority override may not be available depending on the status of the current print job and memory usage.

Copy

Print from

USB

Send

Scan to

USB

Copy

Print from

USB

Send

Scan to

USB

Copy

Print from

USB

6-20

Using Various Functions > Functions

Color Selection

Select the color mode setting.

Sharpness

Adjusts the sharpness of image outlines.

When copying penciled originals with rough or broken lines, clear copies can be taken by adjusting sharpness toward

"Sharpen". When copying images made up of patterned dots such as magazine photos, in which moire*1 patterns

appear, edge softening and weakening of the moire effect can be obtained by setting the sharpness toward "Blur".

Item Description

Auto (Color/Gray) Automatically recognizes whether the document is color or black and white, and

scan color documents in Full Color and black and white documents in Grayscale.

Auto (Color/B & W) Automatically recognizes whether the document is color or black and white, and

scan color documents in Full Color and black and white documents in Black and

White.

Full Color Scans the document in full color.

Grayscale Scans the document in grayscale. Produces a smooth, detailed image.

Black & White Scans the document in black and white.

Item Description

[1] to [3] (Sharpen) Emphasizes the image outline.

[-1] to [-3] (Blur) Blurs the image outline. Can weaken a Moire*1 effect.

*1 Patterns that are created by irregular distribution of halftone dots.

Send

Scan to

USB

Copy

Send

Scan to

USB

Original More SharpLess Sharp

6-21

Using Various Functions > Functions

Contrast

You can adjust the contrast between light and dark areas of the image.

Background Density Adj. (Background Density

Adjustment)

Removes dark background from originals, such as newspapers.

If the ground color is obtrusive, select [Auto]. If [Auto] does not remove the ground color, select [Manual] and adjust the

density of the ground color.

Item Description

[1] to [4] Increases the sharpness of colors.

[-1] to [-4] Creates smoother colors.

Item Description

Off Does not adjust the ground color.

Auto Automatically adjusts the background density based on the original.

Manual Select [1] to [5] (Lighter - Darker) to adjust the background density manually.

Copy

Send

Scan to

USB

Original HigherLower

Copy

Send

Scan to

USB

6-22

Using Various Functions > Functions

Skip Blank Page

When there are blank pages in a scanned document, this function skips the blank pages and prints only pages that are

not blank.

When set to [High], the level at which blank paper is recognized is higher.

The machine detects blank pages, saving unnecessary printing without the need to check for blank pages in the

document.

Select [On], [Level], and then [Low], [Middle] or [High].

Scan Resolution

Select fineness of scanning resolution.

(Value: [200 × 100dpi Norm] / [200 × 200dpi Fine] / [200 × 400dpi S.Fin] / [300 × 300dpi] / [400 × 400dpi U.Fin] /

[600 × 600dpi])

NOTE

The originals with punched holes or originals printed on a colored substrate may not be recognized as blank pages.

NOTE

The larger the number, the better the image resolution. However, better resolution also means larger file sizes and

longer send times.

Copy

Send

Scan to

USB

Send

Scan to

USB

6-23

Using Various Functions > Functions

Sending Size

Select size of image to be sent.

Relationship between Original Size, Sending Size, and Zoom

Original Size, Sending Size and Zoom are related to each other. For details, see the table below.

Item Description

Same as OrigSize Send an image the same size as the original.

A4, A5, A6, B5, B6, Folio, 216 × 340 mm, Letter, Legal, Statement,

Executive, Oficio II, 16K, ISO B5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9,

Envelope #6, Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5,

Hagaki (Cardstock), Oufuku Hagaki (Return postcard), Youkei 4, Youkei 2

Select from standard sizes.

Original size and sending size are the same different

Original Size (page 6-16) Specify as necessary. Specify as necessary.

Sending Size Select [Same as Original Size]. Select the desired size.

Zoom (page 6-12) Select [100%] (or [Auto]). Select [Auto].

NOTE

When you specify the sending size that is different from the original size, and select the zoom of [100%], you can send

the image as the actual size (No Zoom).

Send

6-24

Using Various Functions > Functions

File Format

Specify the image file format. Image quality level can also be adjusted.

Select the file format from [PDF], [TIFF], [JPEG], [XPS], [OpenXPS], and [High Comp. PDF].

When the color mode in scanning has been selected for Grayscale or Full Color, set the image quality.

If you selected [PDF] or [High Comp. PDF], you can specify encryption or PDF/A settings.

Item Value Description

PDF ―Select the [OK] key to save or send a PDF file. The image quality and

PDF/A settings will be the default settings.

For the default settings, refer to the following:

Function Defaults (page 8-28)

Image Quality 1 Low(High Comp) to

5 High(Low Comp)

Select [Detail] to display the [Image Quality] screen.

Select the image quality and select the [OK] key.

Encryption Off, On Set the PDF encryption and then select the [OK] key.

If [On] is selected, refer to the following:

PDF Encryption Functions (page 6-26)

PDF/A Off, PDF/A-1a, PDF/A-1b Select PDF/A-1 format type and select the [OK] key.

TIFF ―Select the [OK] key to save or send a TIFF file. The Image Quality

settings will be the default values.

For the default settings, refer to the following:

Function Defaults (page 8-28)

Image Quality 1 Low(High Comp) to

5 High(Low Comp)

Select [Detail] to display the [Image Quality] screen.

Select the image quality and select the [OK] key.

XPS ―Select the [OK] key to save or send a XPS file. The Image Quality

settings will be the default values.

For the default settings, refer to the following:

Function Defaults (page 8-28)

Image Quality 1 Low(High Comp) to

5 High(Low Comp)

Select [Detail] to display the [Image Quality] screen.

Select the image quality and select the [OK] key.

OpenXPS ―Select the [OK] key to save or send a OpenXPS file. The Image Quality

settings will be the default values.

For the default settings, refer to the following:

Function Defaults (page 8-28)

Image Quality 1 Low(High Comp) to

5 High(Low Comp)

Select [Detail] to display the [Image Quality] screen.

Select the image quality and select the [OK] key.

Send

Scan to

USB

6-25

Using Various Functions > Functions

JPEG ―Select the [OK] key to save or send a JPEG file. The Image Quality

settings will be the default values.

For the default settings, refer to the following:

Function Defaults (page 8-28)

Image Quality 1 Low(High Comp) to

5 High(Low Comp)

Select [Detail] to display the [Image Quality] screen.

Select the image quality and select the [OK] key.

High Comp. PDF ―Select the [OK] key to save or send a High Comp. PDF file. The image

quality and PDF/A settings will be the default settings.

For the default settings, refer to the following:

Function Defaults (page 8-28)

Image Quality Comp. Priority, Standard,

Quality Priority

Select [Detail] to display the [Image Quality] screen.

Select the image quality and select the [OK] key.

Encryption Off, On Set the PDF encryption and then select the [OK] key.

If [On] is selected, refer to to the following:

PDF Encryption Functions (page 6-26)

PDF/A Off, PDF/A-1a, PDF/A-1b Select PDF/A-1 format type and select the [OK] key.

NOTE

If encryption is enabled, PDF/A settings cannot be specified.

Item Value Description

6-26

Using Various Functions > Functions

PDF Encryption Functions

If you have selected PDF or High Comp. PDF for file format, you can restrict the access level for displaying, printing, and

editing PDF's by assigning a secure password.

Select [PDF] or [High Comp. PDF], and select [On] of [Encryption] in [Detail].

Items that can be set vary depending on the setting selected in [Compatibility].

Acrobat3.0&Later

Item Value Description

Password Open Document Off, On Enter the password to open the PDF file.

Select [On] and select the [OK] key.

Enter a password (up to 256 characters) and then select the [OK] key.

Enter the password again for confirmation, and select the [OK] key.

Edit/Print Doc. Off, On Enter the password to edit the PDF file.

Select [On] and select the [OK] key.

Enter a password (up to 256 characters) and then select the [OK] key.

Enter the password again for confirmation, and select the [OK] key.

Printing

Allowed

Not Allowed,

Allowed

Restricts printing of the PDF file. Then select the [OK] key.

Changes

Allowed

Not Allowed,

Commenting,

Page Layout,

Any Changes

Restricts editing of the PDF file. Select from the following restrictions

then select the [OK] key.

Not Allowed: Disables the change to the PDF file.

Commenting: Can only add commenting.

Page Layout: Can change the page layout except extracting the

pages of the PDF file.

Any Changes: Can conduct all operations except extracting the pages

of the PDF file.

Copying

Contents

Disable, Enable Restricts the copying of text and objects on the PDF file.

Then select the [OK] key.

6-27

Using Various Functions > Functions

Acrobat5.0&Later

Item Value Description

Password Open Document Off, On Enter the password to open the PDF file.

Select [On] and select the [OK] key.

Enter a password (up to 256 characters) and then select the [OK] key.

Enter the password again for confirmation, and select the [OK] key.

Edit/Print Doc. Off, On Enter the password to edit the PDF file.

Select [On] and select the [OK] key.

Enter a password (up to 256 characters) and then select the [OK] key.

Enter the password again for confirmation, and select the [OK] key.

Printing

Allowed

Not Allowed,

Allowed (Low

Res.), Allowed

Restricts printing of the PDF file. Select from the following restrictions

then select the [OK] key.

Not Allowed: Disables the printing of PDF file.

Allowed (Low Res.): Can print the PDF file only in low resolution.

Allowed: Can print the PDF file in original resolution.

Changes

Allowed

Not Allowed,

Ins./Del./Rotat,

Commenting,

Any Changes

Specifically limit the operation. Select from the following restrictions

then select the [OK] key.

Not Allowed: Disables the change to the PDF file.

Ins./Del./Rotat: Can only insert, delete, and rotate the pages of the

PDF file.

Commenting: Can only add commenting.

Any Changes: Can conduct all operations except extracting the pages

of the PDF file.

Copying

Contents

Disable, Enable Restricts the copying of text and objects on the PDF file. Then select

the [OK] key.

6-28

Using Various Functions > Functions

Subject/Body

Adds subject and body when sending a document.

Select [Subject] / [Body] to enter the E-mail subject/body.

Duplex (2-sided Original)

Select the type and orientation of the binding based on the original.

Sample image

NOTE

The subject can include up to 60 characters, and the body can include up to 500 characters.

NOTE

This function is only displayed on models that have a duplex scan function.

Item Value Description

1-sided ―Disables the function.

2-sided ―Select the [OK] key to scan the original with the default setting.

For the default settings, refer to the following:

Function Defaults (page 8-28)

Orig. Binding Left/Right, Top Select [Detail] to display the [Orig. Binding] screen.

Select the binding direction of originals, and select the [OK]

key.

Orig.

Orientation*1

*1 This does not appear when fax server transmission is performed.

Top Edge Top, Top Edge Left Select the orientation of the original document top edge to

scan correct direction, and select the [OK] key.

Value Image

2-sided Binding

Left/Right

Binding Top

Send

Scan to

USB

6-29

Using Various Functions > Functions

FTP Encrypted TX

Encrypts images when sending via FTP.

Encryption secures the document transmission.

(Value: [Off] / [On])

File Separation

Creates several files by dividing scanned original data page by page, and sends the files.

(Value: [Off] / [Each Page])

Select [Each Page] to set File Separation.

NOTE

Click [Security Settings], and then [Network Security] in the Command Center RX. Be sure that "SSL" of Secure

Settings is "On" and one or more effective encryption are selected in Client side settings.

Command Center RX User Guide

NOTE

A three-digit serial number such as "abc_001.pdf, abc_002.pdf..." is attached to the end of the file name.

Send

Scan to

USB

6-30

Using Various Functions > Functions

Storing Size

Select size of image to be stored.

Relationship between Original Size, Storing Size, and Zoom

Original Size, Storing Size and Zoom are related to each other. For details, see the table below.

Encrypted PDF

Enter the preassigned password to print the PDF data.

Enter the Password, and select [OK].

Item Description

Same as OrigSize Store an image the same size as the original.

A4, A5, A6, B5, B6, Folio, 216 × 340 mm, Letter, Legal, Statement,

Executive, Oficio II, 16K, ISO B5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9,

Envelope #6, Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5,

Hagaki (Cardstock), Oufuku Hagaki (Return postcard), Youkei 4, Youkei 2

Select from standard sizes.

Original Size and the size you wish to

store as are the same different

Original Size (page 6-16) Specify as necessary. Specify as necessary.

Storing Size Select [Same as Original Size]. Select the desired size.

Zoom (page 6-12) Select [100%] (or [Auto]). Select [Auto].

NOTE

When you select Storing Size that is different from Original Size, and select the Zoom [100%], you can store the image

as the actual size (No Zoom).

NOTE

For details on entering the password, refer to the following:

Character Entry Method (page 11-8)

Scan to

USB

Print from

USB

6-31

Using Various Functions > Functions

JPEG/TIFF Print

Select the image size when printing JPEG or TIFF files.

(Value: [Paper Size] / [Image Resolution] / [Print Resolution])

XPS Fit to Page

Reduces or enlarges the image size to fit to the selected paper size when printing XPS file.

(Value: [Off] / [On])

Item Description

Paper Size Fits the image size to the selected paper size.

Image Resolution Prints at resolution of the actual image.

Print Resolution Fits the image size to the print resolution.

Print from

USB

Print from

USB

7-1

7 Status/Job Cancel

This chapter explains the following topics:

Checking Job Status .......................................................................................................................................... 7-2

Details of the Status Screens ................................................................................................................... 7-4

Checking Job History ......................................................................................................................................... 7-8

Sending the Log History ........................................................................................................................ 7-12

Job Operation .................................................................................................................................................. 7-13

Pause and Resumption of Jobs ............................................................................................................. 7-13

Canceling of Jobs .................................................................................................................................. 7-13

Device/Communication .................................................................................................................................... 7-14

Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner and Paper (Paper/Supplies) ......................................................... 7-15

7-2

Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job Status

Checking Job Status

Check the status of jobs being processed or waiting to be printed.

Available Status Screens

The processing and waiting statuses of jobs are displayed as a list on the message display in four different screens -

Printing Jobs, Sending Jobs, Storing Jobs, and Scheduled Jobs.

The following job statuses are available.

Displaying Status Screens

1Display the screen.

[Status/Job Cancel] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Print Job Status], [Send Job Status],

[Store Job Status] or [Scheduled Job] > [OK] key

Status Display Job status to be displayed

Print Job Status • Copy

• Printer

• FAX reception

• E-mail reception

• Printing from Document Box

• Printing data from removable memory

• Job Report/List

Send Job Status • FAX transmission

• E-mail

• Folder transmission

• Application

• Multiple destination

• Fax server transmission

Store Job Status • Scan

•FAX

• Printer

Scheduled Job • Sending Job FAX using Delayed transmission

7-3

Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job Status

2Select the job you want to check.

1Select the job you want to check, and [Menu].

2[▲] [▼] key > [Detail] > [OK] key

Jobs Detail Status is displayed.

3Check the status.

Select the [►] key to view the next screen. Select the [◄] key to return to the previous screen.

NOTE

• If a FAX job is selected in [Send Job Status] then [PriorityOverride] is displayed.

Select [PriorityOverride] and select the [OK] key to suspend the current job and gives

the selected job top priority.

•For [Scheduled Job], [Start Now] is displayed. Select [Start Now] and select the [OK]

key to send the selected job immediately.

Print Job Status (page 7-4)

Send Job Status (page 7-5)

Store Job Status (page 7-6)

Scheduled Job Status (page 7-7)

7-4

Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job Status

Details of the Status Screens

Print Job Status

NOTE

You can show the job statuses of all users, or only the statuses of your own jobs.

Disp. Status/Log (page 8-31)

This setting can also be changed from Command Center RX.

Command Center RX User Guide

Item Description

Status Status of job

[Processing]:The status before starting to print.

[Pause]: Pausing print job or error

[Canceling]: Canceling the job

[-----]: The job is finished.

Accepted Time Accepted Time of job

Job Name When the job name in Job Name is displayed in a short form, select [Detail] to see the

complete job name. Select the [OK] key to return to the previous screen.

Job Type [Copy]: Copy job

[FAX]*1: FAX reception

[Box]: Job from Document Box

[Printer]: Printer job

[Report]: Report/List

[E-mail]: E-mail reception

[USB]: Data from removable memory

*1 Displayed only on products with the fax function installed.

User Name User Name for the executed job

If user login administration is disabled, [----] appears.

Page and Copy • Number of pages printed

• Number of copies printed / Total number of copies to be printed

Original Pages Number of original pages

Sender Info. The sender information is displayed.

When receiving a FAX

If the name of the sender is provided when receiving a FAX, the name is displayed. If only the

number of the sender is provided, the number is displayed.

If there is no information about the sender or if a FAX is not received, [----] appears.

For E-mails

The E-mail address is displayed.

In other cases, [----] is displayed.

NOTE

When the sender information is displayed in a short form, select [Detail] to see the complete

sender Information. Select the [OK] key to return to the previous screen.

7-5

Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job Status

Send Job Status

Item Description

Status Status of job

[Processing]:The status before starting sending such as during scanning originals

[Pause]: Pausing the job

[Canceling]: Canceling the job

Accepted Time Accepted Time of job

Job Name When the job name in Job Name is displayed in a short form, select [Detail] to see the

complete job name. Select the [OK] key to return to the previous screen.

Job Type [FAX]*1: Sending Job FAX

[E-mail]: Sending Job E-mail

[Folder]: Sending Job Folder (SMB/FTP)

[Application]:Sending Job Application

[Multi]: Multi Sending

[Fax server]: Fax server transmission

*1 Displayed only on products with the fax function installed.

User Name User Name for the executed job

If user login administration is disabled, [----] appears.

Original Pages Number of original pages

Color/B & W Color mode

[Color/B & W]

[Full Color]

[Black & White]

[Grayscale]

[Mixed]

[Auto (Color/Gray)]

[Auto (Color/B & W)]

Destination The destination is displayed.

If there is one destination:

Destination (Either destination name, FAX number, E-mail address, or server name)

NOTE

When the destination is displayed in a short form, select [Detail] to see the complete

destination. Select the [OK] key to return to the previous screen.

If there are multiple destinations:

[Broadcast] is displayed.

When [List] is selected, all destinations are displayed.

Select [Exit] to return to the original screen.

NOTE

When the destination in a short form, select the destination and then select the [OK] key to see

the complete destination. Select the [OK] key to return to the previous screen.

7-6

Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job Status

Store Job Status

Item Description

Status Status of job

[Processing]:The status before starting sending such as during scanning originals

[Canceling]: Canceling the job

Accepted Time Accepted Time of job

Job Name When the job name in Job Name is displayed in a short form, select [Detail] to see the

complete job name. Select the [OK] key to return to the previous screen.

Job Type [FAX]*1: Storing Job FAX

[SCAN]: Storing Job Scan

[Printer]: Storing Job Printer

*1 Displayed only on products with the fax function installed.

User Name User Name for the executed job

If user login administration is disabled, [----] appears.

Original Pages Number of original pages

Color/B & W Color mode

[Color/B & W]

[Full Color]

[Black & White]

[Grayscale]

[Mixed]

[Auto (Color/Gray)]

[Auto (Color/B & W)]

Sender Info. The sender information is displayed.

When receiving a FAX

If the name of the sender is provided when receiving a FAX, the name is displayed. If only the

number of the sender is provided, the number is displayed.

If there is no information about the sender or if a FAX is not received, [----] appears.

In other cases, [----] is displayed.

NOTE

When the sender Information is displayed in a short form, select [Detail] to see the complete

sender Information. Select the [OK] key to return to the previous screen.

7-7

Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job Status

Scheduled Job Status

Item Description

Status Status of job

[Waiting]: Waiting Sending

Start Time Time to start the scheduled job

Job Name When the job name in Job Name is displayed in a short form, select [Detail] to see the

complete job name. Select the [OK] key to return to the previous screen.

Job Type [FAX] is displayed.

User Name User Name for the executed job

If user login administration is disabled, [----] appears.

Original Pages Number of original pages

Color/B & W Color mode

[Black & White]

Destination The destination is displayed.

Destination (page 7-5)

7-8

Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job History

Checking Job History

Available Job History Screens

The job histories are displayed separately in four screens - Printing Jobs, Sending Jobs, Storing Jobs, and FAX Jobs.

The following job histories are available.

NOTE

• Job history is also available by Command Center RX or KYOCERA Net Viewer from the computer.

Command Center RX User Guide

KYOCERA Net Viewer User Guide

• You can show the job log of all users, or only your own job log.

Disp. Status/Log (page 8-31)

This setting can also be changed from Command Center RX.

Command Center RX User Guide

Screen Job histories to be displayed

Print Job Log • Copy

• Printer

• FAX reception

• E-mail reception

• Printing from Document Box

• Job Report/List

• Printing data from removable memory

• Application

Send Job Log • FAX

• E-mail

• Folder

• Application

• Multiple destination

• Fax server transmission

Store Job Log • Scan

•FAX

• Printer

FAX Job Log FAX Operation Guide

7-9

Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job History

Displaying Job History Screen

1Display the screen.

[Status/Job Cancel] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Print Job Log], [Send Job Log], [Store Job Log]

or [FAX Job Log] > [OK] key

2Select the job you want to check.

Select the job you want to check, and [Detail].

A job result icon is displayed on the extreme right of each job.

• : The job has been completed.

• : An error has occurred.

• : The job has been canceled.

3Check the job history.

Select the [►] key to view the next screen. Select the [◄] key to return to the previous screen.

NOTE

For [FAX Job Log], refer to the following:

FAX Operation Guide

NOTE

You can show the job log of all users, or only your own job log.

Disp. Status/Log (page 8-31)

This setting can also be changed from Command Center RX.

Command Center RX User Guide

Print Job Log (page 7-10)

Send Job Log (page 7-11)

Store Job Log (page 7-12)

7-10

Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job History

Print Job Log

Item Description

Result Result of job

[OK]: The job has been completed.

[Error]: An error has occurred.

[Cancel]: The job has been canceled.

Accepted Time Accepted Time of job

End Time Completed time of job

Job Name When the job name in Job Name is displayed in a short form, select

[Detail] to see the complete job name. Select the [OK] key to return to the

previous screen.

Job Type [Copy]: Copy job

[FAX]*1: FAX reception

[Box]: Job from Document Box

[Printer]: Printer job

[Report]: Report/List

[E-mail]: E-mail reception

[USB]: Data from removable memory

*1 Displayed only on products with the fax function installed.

User Name User Name for the executed job

If user login administration is disabled, [----] appears.

Page and Copy • Number of pages printed

• Number of copies printed / Total number of copies to be printed

Original Pages Number of original pages

Sender Info. The sender information is displayed.

Sender Info. (page 7-4)

7-11

Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job History

Send Job Log

Item Description

Result Result of job

[OK]: The job has been completed.

[Error]: An error has occurred.

[Cancel]: The job has been canceled.

Accepted Time Accepted Time of job

End Time Completed time of job

Job Name When the job name in Job Name is displayed in a short form, select

[Detail] to see the complete job name. select the [OK] key to return to the

previous screen.

Job Type [E-mail]: Sending Job E-mail

[Folder]: Sending Job Folder (SMB/FTP)

[FAX]*1: Sending Job FAX

[Application]: Sending Job Application

[Multi]: Multi Sending

[Fax server]: Fax server transmission

*1 Displayed only on products with the fax function installed.

User Name User Name for the executed job

If user login administration is disabled, [----] appears.

Original Pages Number of original pages

Color/B & W Color mode

[Color/B & W]

[Full Color]

[Black & White]

[Grayscale]

[Mixed]

Destination The destination is displayed.

Destination (page 7-5)

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, log in by referring to the

following:

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

Model Name Login User Name Login Password

ECOSYS M2135dn/ECOSYS M2635dn/

ECOSYS M2635dw

3500 3500

ECOSYS M2040dn/ECOSYS M2540dn/

ECOSYS M2540dw

4000 4000

7-12

Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job History

Store Job Log

Sending the Log History

You can send the log history by E-mail. You can either send it manually as needed or have it sent automatically

whenever a set number of jobs is reached.

Send History (page 8-6)

Item Description

Result Result of job

[OK]: The job has been completed.

[Error]: An error has occurred.

[Cancel]: The job has been canceled.

Accepted Time Accepted Time of job

End Time Completed time of job

Job Name When the job name in Job Name is displayed in a short form, select

[Detail] to see the complete job name. Select the [OK] key to return to the

previous screen.

Job Type [FAX]*1: Storing Job FAX

[SCAN]: Storing Job Scan

[Printer]: Storing Job Printer

*1 Displayed only on products with the fax function installed.

User Name User Name for the executed job

If user login administration is disabled, [----] appears.

Original Pages Number of original pages

Color/B & W Color mode

[Color/B & W]

[Full Color]

[Black & White]

[Grayscale]

[Mixed]

Sender Info. The sender information is displayed.

Sender Info. (page 7-6)

7-13

Status/Job Cancel > Job Operation

Job Operation

Pause and Resumption of Jobs

Pause/resume all printing jobs in printing/waiting.

1Display the screen.

Select the [Status/Job Cancel] key.

2Select [Pause].

Printing is paused.

When resuming the printing of jobs that have been paused, select [Resume].

Canceling of Jobs

A job in printing/waiting status can be canceled.

1Display the screen.

[Status/Job Cancel] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Print Job Status], [Send Job Status],

[Store Job Status] or [Scheduled Job] > [OK] key

2Cancel a job.

Print Job Status

1Select the job to be canceled, and [Menu].

2[▲] [▼] key > [Cancel Job] > [OK] key > [Yes]

Send Job Status, Store Job Status or Scheduled Job Status

1Select the job to be canceled, and [Cancel].

2Select [Yes].

NOTE

If the [Back] key or other function key, such as the [Copy] key, is selected during Pause,

"Resume paused jobs. Are you sure?" appears. If [Yes] is selected and then the [OK] key is

selected, the job is resumed and the following screen appears. If [No] is selected and then

the [OK] key is selected, the following screen appears while the job is paused.

NOTE

When FAX reception job is selected, [Cannot cancel FAX reception jobs.] is displayed

and the job cannot be canceled.

NOTE

A job can be canceled by selecting [Menu], selecting [Cancel Job] and then selecting

the [OK] key.

7-14

Status/Job Cancel > Device/Communication

Device/Communication

Configure the devices/lines installed or connected to this machine or check their status.

1Display the screen.

1Select the [Status/Job Cancel] key.

2Select the items you want to check. Then, select the [OK] key to show the status of the

selected device.

2Check the status.

The items you can check are described below.

"Scanner"

Statuses such as the original scanning status and standby are displayed.

"Printer"

Statuses such as waiting and printing are displayed.

"FAX"

• The information such as sending/receiving and dialing is displayed.

•Select [Line Off] to cancel a fax in sending/receiving.

USB Memory

• The usage, capacity and free space of the external media connected to this machine are

displayed.

•Select [Remove] to safely remove the external media.

"USB Keyboard"

The status of the optional USB Keyboard is displayed.

"Network"

The network connection status appears.

"Wi-Fi"

The Wi-Fi connection status and network name (SSID) of the machine appear.

This function is displayed when the wireless network function is available on the machine.

FAX Operation Guide

7-15

Status/Job Cancel > Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner and Paper (Paper/Supplies)

Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner

and Paper (Paper/Supplies)

Check the remaining amount of toner, and paper on the message display.

1Display the screen.

Select the [Status/Job Cancel] key.

2Check the status.

[▲] [▼] key > [Toner Status] or [Paper Status] > [OK] key

The items you can check are described below.

"Toner Status"

The amount of toner remaining is shown in levels.

"Paper Status"

The status of the source is displayed. Select the [►] key to view the next source. Select the

[◄] key to return to the previous screen.

8-1

Setup and Registration

(System Menu)

This chapter explains the following topics:

System Menu ..................................................................................................................................................... 8-2

Operation Method .................................................................................................................................... 8-2

System Menu Settings ............................................................................................................................. 8-3

Report ...................................................................................................................................................... 8-5

System/Network ....................................................................................................................................... 8-7

User/Job Account .................................................................................................................................. 8-18

User Property ......................................................................................................................................... 8-18

Common Settings .................................................................................................................................. 8-19

Copy ...................................................................................................................................................... 8-32

Printer .................................................................................................................................................... 8-33

Send ...................................................................................................................................................... 8-35

FAX ........................................................................................................................................................ 8-36

Document Box ....................................................................................................................................... 8-36

Edit Destination ...................................................................................................................................... 8-37

Adjust/Maint. .......................................................................................................................................... 8-38

8-2

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

System Menu

Configure settings related to overall machine operation.

Operation Method

Select the [System Menu/Counter] key to show the settings on the message display. Then, select from the settings

displayed.

Refer to System Menu Settings on the following page and configure as needed.

Operation Method (page 2-13)

NOTE

• In order to change settings that require administer privileges, you must log in with administrator privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

• If function default settings have been changed, the [Reset] key can be selected in each function screen to

immediately change the settings.

1 Displays the System Menu items.

2 Selects the item displayed or changes

the numeric value.

3 Confirms the selected setting.

4 Cancels the current menu setting to

return to the menu one level higher.

Model Name Login User Name Login Password

ECOSYS M2135dn/ECOSYS M2635dn/

ECOSYS M2635dw

3500 3500

ECOSYS M2040dn/ECOSYS M2540dn/

ECOSYS M2540dw

4000 4000

8-3

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

System Menu Settings

This section explains the functions that can be configured in System Menu. To configure the settings, select the item in

System Menu and select the setting item. For details on each function, see the table below.

Item Description Reference Page

Report Print Print reports to check the machine settings, status, and history. Settings

for printing reports can also be configured.

page 8-5

Admin Rpt Set. Refer to the FAX

Operation Guide.

Result Rpt Set. page 8-6

Job Log History page 8-6

Counter This counts the number of pages printed or scanned. page 2-43

Network Setting Configures network settings. page 8-7

Primary Network Specify the network to be used for the send function, the network

authentication and connecting to external address book.

page 8-16

I/F Block Set. This allows you to protect this machine by blocking the interface with

external devices such as USB hosts.

page 8-17

Security Level The Security Level setting is primarily a menu option used by service

personnel for maintenance work. There is no need for customers to use

this menu.

—

Restart Restart the machine without turning the power switch off. Use this to deal

with any unstable operation by the machine. (Same as the computer

restart.)

page 8-17

Op Functions You can use the optional applications installed on this machine. page 8-17

User/Job Account Configures settings related to machine management.

User Login:

Overview of User Login Administration (page 9-2)

Job Accounting:

Overview of Job Accounting (page 9-23)

—

User Property Allows you to view information about logged in users and edit some of

that information.

page 8-18

Language Select the language displayed on the message display. page 8-19

Default Screen Select the screen appearing right after start-up (default screen). page 8-19

Sound Set options for buzzer sound during the machine operations. page 8-19

Display Bright. Set the brightness of the message display. page 8-19

Orig./Paper Set. Configure settings for originals. page 8-20

Preset Limit Restrict the number of copies that can be made at one time. page 8-24

Measurement Select inch or metric for the unit for paper dimensions. page 8-24

Error Handling Select whether to cancel or continue the job when error has occurred. page 8-25

Date Setting Configure settings related to the date and time. page 8-25

Timer Setting Configure settings related to the time. page 8-26

Function Defaults Defaults are the values automatically set after the warm-up is completed

or the [Reset] key is selected.

Set the defaults for available settings such as copying and sending. Setting

the frequently-used values as defaults makes subsequent jobs easier.

page 8-28

8-4

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

logging in.

page 8-28

RAM Disk Mode A RAM disk can be created and its size can be set. page 8-30

Format SD Card Format an SD/SDHC memory card. page 8-30

Optional Memory When optional memory is installed, select the memory allocation scheme

based on the application in which you are using the equipment.

page 8-30

FAX Server Settings Configure settings for FAX Server. page 8-18

Disp. Status/Log Set the display method of the Status/Log. page 8-31

USB KeyboardType Select the type of USB keyboard that you want to use. page 8-31

Low Toner Alert Set the amount of remaining toner to notify the administrator when to

order a toner when the toner is running low.

page 8-31

Show PowerOffMsg Set the mode whether display a confirmation message in power supply

off.

page 8-31

EnergySaver Set. Select the method of recovery from energy saver. page 8-32

Copy Configures settings for copying functions. page 8-32

Printer Printing from computers, settings are generally made on the application

software screen. However, the following settings are available for

configuring the defaults to customize the machine.

page 8-33

Send Configures settings for sending functions. page 8-35

FAX Configures settings for fax functions.

FAX Operation Guide

—

Document Box Configures settings related to the Job Box, Sub Address Box and Polling

Box. For details on Sub Address Box and Polling Box, see the FAX

Operation Guide.

page 8-36

Edit Destination Configures Address Book and One Touch Key settings.

Address Book:

Adding a Destination (Address Book) (page 3-18)

One Touch Key:

Adding a Destination on One Touch Key (One Touch Key) (page 3-

25)

page 8-37

Adjust/Maint. Adjust printing quality and conduct machine maintenance. page 8-38

Item Description Reference Page

8-5

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Report

Print reports to check the machine settings, status, and history. Settings for printing reports can also be configured.

Report Print

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Report] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Report Print] > [OK] key

Item Description

Menu Map Prints Menu Map to check the settings of the machine.

Status Page Prints the status page, allowing you to check the information including current settings, memory

capacity, and optional equipment installed.

Font List Prints the font list, allowing you to check the font samples installed in the machine.

Menu Map

Status Page

8-6

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Admin Rpt Set.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Report] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Admin Rpt Set.] > [OK] key

Configure settings for Outgoing FAX report and Incoming FAX report.

FAX Operation Guide

Result Rpt Set.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Report] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Result Rpt Set.] > [OK] key

Job Log History

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Report] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Job Log History] > [OK] key

Item Description

Send Result Automatically print a report of transmission result when a transmission is complete.

E-mail/Folder Automatically print a report of transmission result when E-mail or SMB/FTP transmission is

complete.

Value: Off, On, Error Only

FAX*1

*1 Only on products with the fax function installed.

FAX Operation Guide

CancelBeforeSend*2

*2 When "E-mail/Folder" and "FAX" are set to [Off], this function will not be displayed.

Print a send result report if the job is canceled before being sent.

Value: Off, On

Dest. Info.*2 Select the Recipient Format for the send result report.

Value: Dest. or Name, Dest. and Name

FAX RX Result*1 FAX Operation Guide

JobFinish Notice Attaches sent images to job finish notices.

Value: Do Not Attach Image, Attach SendImage

Item Description

Auto Sending

This function automatically sends the log history to the specified destinations whenever a set

number of jobs has been logged.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

If [On] is selected, specify the number of job histories. The setting range is 1 to 16.

Send History You can also send the log history to the specified destinations manually.

Destination Set the destination to which log histories are sent. Only E-mail address can be set.

Subject Set the subject automatically entered when sending log histories by E-mail.

Value: Up to 60 characters

Personal Info. Select whether to include personal information in the job log.

Value: Include, Exclude

8-7

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

System/Network

Configures machine system settings.

Network Setting

[

System Menu/Counter

] key > [

▲

] [

▼

] key > [

System/Network

] > [

] key > [

▲

] [

▼

] key > [

Network Setting

] > [

] key

Configures network settings.

Host Name

Wi-Fi Direct Set

Set Wi-Fi Direct.

Item Description

Host Name

Check the host name of the machine. Host name can be changed from Command Center RX.

Changing Device Information (page 2-49)

NOTE

This function is displayed when the wireless network function is available on the machine.

Item Description

Wi-Fi Direct Select whether to use Wi-Fi Direct.

Value: Off, On

Device Name Specify the device name.

NOTE

• Up to 32 characters can be entered.

• This function is displayed when [Wi-Fi Direct] is set to [On].

IP Address Check the IP address of the machine.

TCP/IP Settings (page 8-10)

NOTE

This function is displayed when [Wi-Fi Direct] is set to [On].

Auto Disconnect Automatically disconnect devices connected through Wi-Fi Direct.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

This function is displayed when [Wi-Fi Direct] is set to [On].

Disconnect Timer If you select [ON] to Auto Disconnect, set the waiting time for automatic disconnection.

Value: Day (00 to 99), Hour (00 to 23), Minute (00 to 59)

8-8

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Wi-Fi Settings

Set Wi-Fi.

NOTE

This function is displayed when the wireless network function is available on the machine.

Item Description

Wi-Fi Select whether to use Wi-Fi.

Value:

Off, On

Setup -

ConnectionStatus Check the wireless LAN status.

Quick Setup If the machine will connect to an access point that supports the automatic wireless network

setup, connection settings can be configured by Quick Setup.

NOTE

If you are connecting to an access point that has WEP enabled, select [WEP Key Index] and

select the WEP key index.

AvailableNetwork Displays access points to which the machine can connect.

NOTE

• When [Reload] is selected, the list is reloaded.

• If the access point's security setting uses WEP, select [Menu] and set [WEP Key Index].

WEP Key Index Select the key index of the access point.

Value:

0 to 3

Push Button If the access point supports the push button method, wireless settings can be configured using

the push button. This setting executes push button, and the connection is started by pressing

the push button on the access point.

NOTE

The push button method supports only the WPS.

PIN (Device) Starts connection using the machine's PIN code. Enter the PIN code into the access point. The

PIN code of the machine is automatically generated.

8-9

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Custom Setup The detailed settings for wireless LAN can be changed.

Network Name (SSID) Set the SSID (Service Set Identifier) of the wireless LAN to which the machine connects.

NOTE

Up to 32 characters can be entered.

Netwk Authentic. Select network authentication type.

Value: Open, WPA2/WPA-PSK, WPA2-PSK, WPA2/WPA-EAP, WPA2-EAP

Encryption Select encryption method. The setting values vary depending on the Network Authentication

setting.

Item Description

Network

Authentication

Encryption

Open Disable ―

WEP WEP Key: Up to 26 characters

WEP Key Index: 0 to 3

WPA2/WPA-PSK Data Encryption: AES, Auto

Preshared Key: Up to 64 characters

WPA2-PSK Data Encryption: AES , Auto

Preshared Key: Up to 64 characters

WPA2/WPA-EAP Data Encryption: AES, Auto

WPA2-EAP Data Encryption: AES, Auto

8-10

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Item Description

TCP/IP Settings -

TCP/IP Select whether to use TCP/IP Protocol.

Value: Off, On

IPv4 Setting Set up TCP/IP (IPv4) to connect to the network. This setting is available when [TCP/IP] is set to

[On].

DHCP Select whether to use the DHCP (IPv4) server.

Value: Off, On

Auto-IP Select whether to use Auto-IP.

Value: Off, On

IP Address Set the IP address.

Value: ###.###.###.###

NOTE

When DHCP is set to [On], this item is displayed only and cannot be entered.

Subnet Mask Set the IP subnet mask.

Value: ###.###.###.###

NOTE

When DHCP is set to [On], this item is displayed only and cannot be entered.

Default Gateway Set the IP gateway address.

Value: ###.###.###.###

NOTE

When DHCP is set to [On], this item is displayed only and cannot be entered.

IMPORTANT

• When setting the Auto-IP, enter "0.0.0.0" in [IP Address].

• After changing the setting, restart the network or turn the machine OFF and then ON.

8-11

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Wired Netwk. Set

Configure wired network settings.

Item Description

IPv6 Setting Set up TCP/IP (IPv6) to connect to the network. This setting is available when [TCP/IP] is [On].

IPv6 Setting Select whether to use IPv6.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

Selecting [On] displays IP address in [Link Local] after restarting the network.

Manual Settings Manually specify the IP address, prefix length, and gateway address of TCP/IP (IPv6).

Value

IP Address: 128-bits address is expressed in eight groups consisting of four-digit

hexadecimal digits. The groups are separated by colon (:).

Prefix Length: 0 to 128

Default Gateway: 128-bits address is expressed in eight groups consisting of four-digit

hexadecimal digits. The groups are separated by colon (:).

NOTE

This function is displayed when [IPv6 Setting] is set to [On].

To enter "Default Gateway", set [RA (Stateless)] to [Off].

RA(Stateless) Select whether to use RA (Stateless).

Value: Off, On

NOTE

This function is displayed when [IPv6 Setting] is set to [On].

Selecting [On] displays IP address in [IP Address 1 (to 5)] after restarting the network.

DHCPv6 Settings Select whether to use the DHCP (IPv6) server.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

This function is displayed when [IPv6 Setting] is set to [On].

Selecting [On] displays IP address in [IP Address] after restarting the network.

Restart Network Restarts the network.

IMPORTANT

After changing the setting, restart the network or turn the machine OFF and then ON.

Item Description

TCP/IP Settings For details on setting value.

TCP/IP Settings (page 8-10)

LAN Interface Specify the settings for the LAN interface to be used.

Value: Auto, 10BASE-Half, 10BASE-Full, 100BASE-Half, 100BASE-Full, 1000BASE-T

IMPORTANT

After changing the setting, restart the network or turn the machine OFF and then ON.

8-12

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Bonjour

IPSec

ProtocolSettings

Configure protocol settings.

Item Description

Protocol Setting Select whether to use Bonjour.

Value: Off, On

Wi-Fi Direct*1

*1 Displayed only when the wireless network function is available on the machine.

Set whether to enable this function for each network.

Value: Disable, Enable

Wi-Fi*1

Wired Network

Item Description

IPSec Make this setting when you use IPSec.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

If [Bonjour] is set to [ON], set [Rule Setting].

Item Description

NetBEUI Selects whether to receive documents using NetBEUI.*1

Value: Off, On

Wi-Fi Direct*2 Set whether to enable this function for each network.

Value: Disable, Enable

NOTE

This function is displayed when [NetBEUI] is set to [On].

Wi-Fi*2

Wired Network

SNMPv3 Select whether to communicate using SNMPv3.*1

Value: Off, On

Wi-Fi Direct*2 Set whether to enable this function for each network.

Value: Disable, Enable

NOTE

This function is displayed when [SNMPv3] is set to [On].

Wi-Fi*2

Wired Network

FTP (Server) Select whether to receive documents using FTP.*1

Value: Off, On

Wi-Fi Direct*2 Set whether to enable this function for each network.

Value: Disable, Enable

NOTE

This function is displayed when [FTP (Server)] is set to [On].

Wi-Fi*2

Wired Network

FTP (Client) Select whether to send documents using FTP. When selecting [On], set the FTP Port Number.

The default port number is 21.

Value: Off, On (Port Number: 1 to 65535)

8-13

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

SMB Select whether to send documents using SMB. When selecting [On], set the SMB default Port

Number. The default port number is 445.

Value: Off, On (Port Number: 1 to 65535)

SNMP Select whether to communicate using SNMP.*1

Value: Off, On

Wi-Fi Direct*2 Set whether to enable this function for each network.

Value: Disable, Enable

NOTE

This function is displayed when [SNMP] is set to [On].

Wi-Fi*2

Wired Network

SMTP Select whether to send E-mail using SMTP.

Value: Off, On

POP3 Select whether to receive E-mail using POP3.

Value: Off, On

RAW Port Select whether to receive documents using Raw Port.*1

Value: Off, On

Wi-Fi Direct*2 Set whether to enable this function for each network.

Value: Disable, Enable

NOTE

This function is displayed when [RAW Port] is set to [On].

Wi-Fi*2

Wired Network

LPD Selects whether to receive documents using LPD.*1

Value: Off, On

Wi-Fi Direct*2 Set whether to enable this function for each network.

Value: Disable, Enable

NOTE

This function is displayed when [LPD] is set to [On].

Wi-Fi*2

Wired Network

IPP Selects whether to receive documents using IPP. To use the IPP protocol, select [Not Secure

(IPP&IPPS)] on IPP Security under Security Settings from the Command Center RX. The

default port number is 631.*1

Value: Off, On (Port Number: 1 to 32767)

Wi-Fi Direct*2 Set whether to enable this function for each network.

Value: Disable, Enable

NOTE

This function is displayed when [IPP] is set to [On].

Wi-Fi*2

Wired Network

Item Description

8-14

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

IPP Over SSL Select whether or not to use IPP over SSL.*1, *3

Value: Off, On (Port Number: 1 to 32767)

NOTE

When selecting [On], it also requires a certificate for SSL. the default certificate is the self-

certificate of the machine.

Command Center RX User Guide

Wi-Fi Direct*2 Set whether to enable this function for each network.

Value: Disable, Enable

NOTE

This function is displayed when [IPP Over SSL] is set to [On].

Wi-Fi*2

Wired Network

HTTP Select whether to communicate using HTTP.*1

Value: Off, On

Wi-Fi Direct*2 Set whether to enable this function for each network.

Value: Disable, Enable

NOTE

This function is displayed when [HTTP] is set to [On].

Wi-Fi*2

Wired Network

HTTPS Select whether to communicate using HTTPS.*1, *3

Value: Off, On

Wi-Fi Direct*2 Set whether to enable this function for each network.

Value: Disable, Enable

NOTE

This function is displayed when [HTTPS] is set to [On].

Wi-Fi*2

Wired Network

LDAP Select whether to use LDAP.

Value: Off, On

ThinPrint Select whether to use ThinPrint. To use the Thin Print protocol, set the protocol to [On]. The

default port number is 4000.*1, *3

Value: Off, On (Port Number: 1 to 32767)

NOTE

This function is displayed only when the optional ThinPrint Option is activated.

Thin Print over SSL To use the Thin Print over SSL protocol, set [Thin Print Over SSL] to [On].*1, *3

Value: Off, On

NOTE

• This function is displayed when [ThinPrint] is set to [On].

• When selecting [On], it also requires a certificate for SSL. The default certificate is the self-

certificate of the machine.

Command Center RX User Guide

Wi-Fi Direct*2 Set whether to enable this function for each network.

Value: Disable, Enable

NOTE

This function is displayed when [ThinPrint] is set to [On].

Wi-Fi*2

Wired Network

Item Description

8-15

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

WSD-SCAN Select whether to use WSD Scan.*1

Value: Off, On

Wi-Fi Direct*2 Set whether to enable this function for each network.

Value: Disable, Enable

NOTE

This function is displayed when [WSD-SCAN] is set to [On].

Wi-Fi*2

Wired Network

WSD-PRINT Set whether to use our proprietary web services. WIA driver, TWAIN driver and Network FAX

driver use this Enhanced WSD web service.*1

Value: Off, On

Wi-Fi Direct*2 Set whether to enable this function for each network.

Value: Disable, Enable

NOTE

This function is displayed when [WSD-PRINT] is set to [On].

Wi-Fi*2

Wired Network

Enhanced WSD Set whether to use our proprietary web services.*1

Value: Off, On

NOTE

Selecting [Off] will disable the functionality of WIA, TWAIN, and Network FAX driver.

Wi-Fi Direct*2 Set whether to enable this function for each network.

Value: Disable, Enable

NOTE

This function is displayed when [Enhanced WSD] is set to [On].

Wi-Fi*2

Wired Network

EnhancedWSD(SSL) Set whether to use our proprietary web services over SSL.*1, *3

Value: Off, On

NOTE

Selecting [Off] will disable the functionality of WIA, TWAIN and Network FAX drivers.

Wi-Fi Direct*2 Set whether to enable this function for each network.

Value: Disable, Enable

NOTE

This function is displayed when [EnhancedWSD(SSL)] is set to [On].

Wi-Fi*2

Wired Network

eSCL Selects whether to receive scanned documents using eSCL.*1

Value: Off, On

Wi-Fi Direct*2 Set whether to enable this function for each network.

Value: Disable, Enable

NOTE

This function is displayed when [eSCL] is set to [On].

Wi-Fi*2

Wired Network

Item Description

8-16

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Secure Settings

Ping

Restart Network

Primary Network

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [System/Network] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Primary Network] >

[OK]key

eSCL over SSL Selects whether to receive scanned documents using eSCL over SSL.*1, *3

Value: Off, On

Wi-Fi Direct*2 Set whether to enable this function for each network.

Value: Disable, Enable

NOTE

This function is displayed when [eSCL over SSL] is set to [On].

Wi-Fi*2

Wired Network

*1 The setting will be changed after restarting the device or network.

*2 Displayed only when the wireless network function is available on the machine.

*3 Set "SSL" to [On] in Secure Settings.

Secure Settings (page 8-16)

IMPORTANT

After changing the setting, restart the network or turn the machine OFF and then ON.

Item Description

SSL Select whether or not to use SSL.

Value: Off, On

Item Description

Ping Checks if communication with the destination by entering the host name or IP address of the

destination is possible.

Item Description

Restart Network Restarts the network.

NOTE

This function is displayed when the wireless network function is available on the machine.

Item Description

Primary Network Specify the network to be used for the send function, the network authentication and

connecting to external address book.

Value: Wi-Fi, Wired Network

Item Description

8-17

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

I/F Block Set.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [System/Network] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [I/F Block Set.] > [OK] key

This allows you to protect this machine by blocking the interface with external devices such as USB hosts.

Security Level

[

System Menu/Counter

] key > [

▲

] [

▼

] key > [

System/Network

] > [

] key > [

▲

] [

▼

] key > [

Security Level

] > [

] key

Restart

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [System/Network] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Restart] > [OK] key

Op Functions

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [System/Network] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Op Functions] > [OK] key

Item Description

USB Host This locks and protects the USB host.

Value: Unblock, Block

USB Device This locks and protects the USB interface connector (USB Device).

Value: Unblock, Block

USB Storage This locks and protects the USB memory slot.

Value: Unblock, Block

NOTE

This function is available when USB Host is set to [Unblock].

IMPORTANT

After changing the setting, restart the network or turn the machine OFF and then ON.

Item Description

Security Level Specify the security level.

Value

Low: This mode is used during maintenance. Do not use normally.

High: This is the security setting we recommend. Use this setting normally.

Very High: In addition to [High] setting, this setting disables the machine settings to be

changed from external command.

Item Description

Restart Restart the machine without turning the power switch off. Use this to deal with any unstable

operation by the machine. (Same as the computer restart.)

Item Description

Op Functions You can use the optional applications installed on this machine.

Optional Applications (page 11-6)

8-18

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

FAX Server Settings

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [System/Network] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [FAX Server Set.] >

[OK]key

Configure settings for FAX Server.

User/Job Account

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [User/Job Account] > [OK] key

Configure settings related to machine management.

Overview of User Login Administration (page 9-2)

Overview of Job Accounting (page 9-23)

Unknown ID Job (page 9-39)

User Property

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [User Property] > [OK] key

Allows you to view information about logged in users and edit some of that information.

Enabling User Login Administration (page 9-3)

Item Description

FAX Server Select whether or not to use FAX Server.

Value: Off, On

Address Settings Set the prefix, suffix, and domain name to be assigned to the address.

NOTE

For the fax server information, ask your fax server administrator.

File Format Select the default type of the files to be sent.

Value: PDF, TIFF, XPS

AddrBookDefaults Set the expansion address book to be used.

Value: Machine AddrBook, Ext. Address Book

NOTE

• This appears when [On] is set in fax server.

• This does not appear when extension address book is not enabled.

Command Center RX User Guide

8-19

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Common Settings

Configures overall machine operation.

Language

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Common Settings] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Language] > [OK] key

Default Screen

[

System Menu/Counter

] key > [

▲

] [

▼

] key > [

Common Settings

] > [

] key > [

▲

] [

▼

] key > [

Default Screen

] > [

] key

Sound

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Common Settings] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Sound] > [OK] key

Display Bright. (Display Brightness)

[

System Menu/Counter

] key > [

▲

] [

▼

] key > [

Common Settings

] > [

] key > [

▲

] [

▼

] key > [

Display Bright.

] > [

] key

Item Description

Language Select the language displayed on the message display.

Item Description

Default Screen Select the screen appearing right after start-up (default screen).

Value: Status, Copy, Send, FAX, Document Box

Item Description

Buzzer Set options for buzzer sound during the machine operations.

Key Confirmation Emit a sound when the operation panel keys are selected.

Value: Off, On

Job Finish Emit a sound when a print job is normally completed.

Value: Off, On, FAX RX Only*1

*1 Only on products with the fax function installed.

Ready Emit a sound when the warm-up is completed.

Value: Off, On

Warning Emit a sound when errors occur.

Value: Off, On

Keyboard Confirm Emit a sound to confirm keypresses with a sound.

Value: Off, On

FAX Speaker*1 FAX Operation Guide

FAX Monitor*1 FAX Operation Guide

Item Description

Display Bright. Set the brightness of the message display.

Value: Darker -3, Darker -2, Darker -1, Normal 0, Lighter +1, Lighter +2, Lighter +3

8-20

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Orig./Paper Set.

[

System Menu/Counter

] key > [

▲

] [

▼

] key > [

Common Settings

] > [

] key > [

▲

] [

▼

] key > [

Orig./Paper Set.

] > [

] key

Configure settings for originals.

Item Description

Custom Orig. Size Set up frequently-used custom original size.

The custom size option is displayed on the screen to select original size.

Value

Metric

X: 50 to 356 mm (in 1 mm increments)

Y: 50 to 216 mm (in 1 mm increments)

Inch

X: 1.97 to 14.02" (in 0.01" increments)

Y: 1.97 to 8.50" (in 0.01" increments)

X=Length, Y=Width

Detect Orig.(DP) Select whether to automatically detect originals of the document processor.

Auto Detect Select whether to enable automatic detection of original size.

Value: off, on

System of Units Select metric or inch for the unit of original size detection.

Value: Metric, Inch

LGL/OFII/216x340 As Legal, OficioII and 216 x 340 mm are similar in size, select either one of them for automatic

detection.

Value: Legal, OficioII, 216 x 340 mm

NOTE

When [Auto Detect] is set to [Off], this function will not be displayed.

When [System of Units] is set to [Metric], this function will not be displayed.

Def. Orig. Size Set the default original size.

Value: Off*1, A4, A5, A6, B5, B6, Letter, Statement, Executive, 16K

*1 This function is displayed when [Auto Detect] in [Detect Orig.(DP)] is set to [On].

Horizontal

8-21

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Item Description

Custom PaperSize Set up frequently-used custom paper size.

One custom paper size is set for each paper supply source. The custom size option is

displayed on the screen to select paper size.

Cassette 1 (to3) Size Register the custom paper size to be used in Cassette 1 (to 3).

Value

Metric

X: 105 to 216 mm (in 1 mm increments)

Y: 148 to 356 mm (in 1 mm increments)

Inch

X: 4.13 to 8.50" (in 0.01" increments)

Y: 5.83 to 14.02" (in 0.01" increments)

X=Length, Y=Width

MP Tray Size Register the custom paper size to be used in the multipurpose tray.

Value

Metric

X: 70 to 216 mm (in 1 mm increments)

Y: 148 to 356 mm (in 1 mm increments)

Inch

X: 2.76 to 8.50" (in 0.01" increments)

Y: 5.83 to 14.02" (in 0.01" increments)

X=Length, Y=Width

Cassette 1 (to 3) Set. Select the paper size and media type for cassettes 1 (to 3).

Cassette 1 (to 3) Set. (Cassette 1 (to 3) Settings) (page 8-23)

MP Tray Set. Select the paper size and media type for the multipurpose tray.

MP Tray Set. (Multipurpose Tray Settings) (page 8-23)

Media Type Set. Select weight for each media type.

For Custom 1 to 8, settings for duplex printing and media type name can be changed.

Media Type Setting (page 8-24)

Media for Auto Select a default media type for auto paper selection when [Auto] is selected of Paper

Selection. If [Plain] is selected, the paper source with plain paper loaded in the specific size is

selected. Select [All Media Types] for the paper source with any kind of paper loaded in the

specific size.

Value: All Media Types, Plain, Transparency, Rough, Vellum, Labels, Recycled,

Preprinted, Bond, Cardstock, Color, Prepunched, Letterhead, Envelope, Thick,

High Quality, Custom 1 to 8

Vertical

Vertical Horizontal

8-22

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Item Description

Def. PaperSource Select the default paper source from Cassette 1 to 3 and multipurpose tray.

Value: Cassette 1 (to 3), MP Tray

NOTE

[Cassette 2] to [Cassette 3] are displayed when optional paper feeder is installed.

SpecialPaper Act. When printing on Prepunched, Preprint, and Letterhead, punch-holes might not be aligned or

the print direction might be upside-down depending on how originals are set and the

combination of copying functions. In such a case, select [Adj. PrintDirect] to adjust the print

direction. When paper orientation is not important, select [Speed Priority].

If [Adj. PrintDirect] is selected, load paper according to the steps below.

Example: copying on Letterhead

Value: Adj. PrintDirect, Speed Priority

Paper Setup Msg Set whether to display the confirmation screen for the paper setting when a new paper is set for

each cassette.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

[Cassette 2] to [Cassette 3] are displayed when optional paper feeder is installed.

Cassette 1 to 3

MP Tray

Multipurpose TrayCassetteFinishedPaperOriginal

8-23

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Cassette 1 (to 3) Set. (Cassette 1 (to 3) Settings)

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Common Settings] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Orig./Paper Set.] >

[OK]key > [▲] [▼] key > [Cassette 1 (to 3) Set.] > [OK] key

Select paper size and media type for Cassettes 1 (to 3).

MP Tray Set. (Multipurpose Tray Settings)

[

System Menu/Counter

] key > [

▲

] [

▼

] key > [

Common Settings

]

> [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Orig./Paper Set.]

[

]key > [

▲

] [

▼

] key > [

MP Tray Set.

] > [

] key

Select paper size and media type for the multipurpose tray.

Item Description

Cassette 1 (to 3) Size Available options are as follows:

Value: A4, A5-R, A5, A6, B5, Folio, 216 × 340 mm, Letter, Legal, Statement, Executive, Oficio II,

16K, ISO B5, Custom

Cassette 1 (to 3) Type*1

*1 To change to a media type other than "Plain".

Media Type Setting (page 8-24).

When a paper weight that cannot be loaded in the cassette is set for a media type, that media type does not appear.

Select the media type.

Value: Plain (60 to 105 g/m2), Rough, Vellum (60 to 163 g/m2), Recycled, Preprinted*2, Bond,

Color, Prepunched*2, Letterhead*2, Thick (106 to 163 g/m2), High Quality, Custom 1 to 8

*2 To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead.

SpecialPaper Act. (page 8-22)

Item Description

MP Tray Size Available options are as follows:

Value: A4, A5-R, A5, A6, B5, B6, Folio, 216 × 340 mm, Letter, Legal, Statement, Executive,

Oficio II, 16K, ISO B5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6, Envelope Monarch,

Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Hagaki (Cardstock), Oufuku Hagaki (Return postcard), Youkei 4,

Youkei 2, Custom*1

*1 For instructions on how to specify the custom paper size.

Custom PaperSize (page 8-21)

MP Tray Type*2

*2 To change to a media type other than "Plain".

Media Type Setting (page 8-24)

Select the media type.

Values: Plain (60 to 105 g/m2), Transparency, Rough, Vellum (60 to 220 g/m2), Labels, Recycled,

Preprinted*3, Bond, Cardstock, Color, Prepunched*3, Letterhead*3, Envelope,

Thick(106to220g/m

2), High Quality, Custom 1 to 8

*3 To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead.

SpecialPaper Act. (page 8-22)

8-24

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Media Type Setting

The following media type and paper weight combinations are available.

Each media type's default weight is indicated.

For Custom 1 to 8, settings for duplex printing and media type name can be changed.

Preset Limit

[

System Menu/Counter

] key > [

▲

] [

▼

] key > [

Common Settings

] > [

] key > [

▲

] [

▼

] key > [

Preset Limit

] > [

] key

Measurement

[

System Menu/Counter

] key > [

▲

] [

▼

] key > [

Common Settings

] > [

] key > [

▲

] [

▼

] key > [

Measurement

] > [

] key

Paper Weight Weight (g/m2)Paper Weight Weight (g/m2)

Light Up to 59 g/m² Heavy 1*1

*1 The processing speed will be slower than normal.

106 g/m² to 135 g/m²

Normal 1 60 g/m² to 74 g/m² Heavy 2*1 136 g/m² to 163 g/m²

Normal 2 75 g/m² to 90 g/m² Heavy 3*1 164 g/m² to 220 g/m²

Normal 3 91 g/m² to 105 g/m² Extra Heavy*1 Transparencies

Media Type Default Media Type Default

Plain Normal 2 Color Normal 2

Rough Normal 3 Prepunched Normal 2

Vellum Heavy 1 Letterhead Normal 3

Labels Heavy 2 Envelope Heavy 3

Recycled Normal 2 Thick Heavy 2

Preprinted Normal 2 High Quality Normal 2

Bond Normal 3 Custom 1 to 8 Normal 2

Cardstock Heavy 3

Item Description

Duplex Print Permit Duplex printing allowed.

Prohibit Duplex printing not allowed.

Name Change names for Custom 1 to 8. Names should be not more than 16 characters. Selecting

media type at multipurpose tray, the name after change will be displayed.

Character Entry Method (page 11-8)

Item Description

Preset Limit Restrict the number of copies that can be made at one time.

Value: 1 to 999 copies.

Item Description

Measurement Select inch or metric for the unit for paper dimensions.

Value: inch, mm

8-25

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Error Handling

[

System Menu/Counter

] key > [

▲

] [

▼

] key > [

Common Settings

] > [

] key > [

▲

] [

▼

] key > [

Error Handling

] > [

] key

Select whether to cancel or continue the job when error has occurred.

Date Setting

[

System Menu/Counter

] key > [

▲

] [

▼

] key > [

Common Settings

] > [

] key > [

▲

] [

▼

] key > [

Date Setting

] > [

] key

Configure settings related to the date and time.

Item Description

DuplexPaperError

Select what to do when duplex printing is not possible for the selected paper size and media type.

Value

1-sided: Printed in 1-sided

Display Error: Message to cancel printing is displayed.

PaperMismatchErr Select what to do when the selected paper size or type does not match paper size or type

loaded in the specified paper source while printing from the computer by specifying the

cassette or multipurpose tray.

Value

Ignore: The setting is ignored and the job is printed.

Display Error: Message to cancel printing is displayed.

Item Description

Date/Time Set the date and time for the location where you use the machine. When you send an E-mail

using the transmission function, the date and time as set here will be printed in the header of

the E-mail message.

Value: Year (2000 to 2037), Month (01 to 12), Day (01 to 31), Hour (00 to 23),

Minute (00 to 59), Second (00 to 59)

Setting Date and Time (page 2-17)

NOTE

If you change the date/time while using the trial version of an application, you will no longer be

able to use the application.

Date Format Select the display format of year, month, and date. The year is displayed in Western notation.

Value: Month/Day/Year, Day/Month/Year, Year/Month/Day

Time Zone Set the time difference from GMT. Choose the nearest listed location from the list. If you select

a region that utilizes summer time, configure settings for summer time.

Setting Date and Time (page 2-17)

Summer Time

8-26

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Timer Setting

[

System Menu/Counter

] key > [

▲

] [

▼

] key > [

Common Settings

] > [

] key > [

▲

] [

▼

] key > [

Timer Setting

] > [

] key

Configure settings related to the time.

Item Description

Auto Panel Reset If no jobs are run for a certain period of time, automatically reset settings and return to the

default setting. Select to use Auto Panel Reset or not.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

The time allowed to elapse before the panel is reset is set with the following:

PanelReset Timer (page 8-26)

PanelReset Timer

If you select [

] for Auto Panel Reset, set the amount of time to wait before Auto Panel Reset.

Value: 5 to 495 seconds (in 5 second increments)

NOTE

This function is displayed when [Auto Panel Reset] is set to [On].

Sleep Level (models except for

Europe)

Select the Sleep level.

Set the Energy Saver mode to reduce power consumption even more than

Quick Recovery

mode.

Value: Quick Recovery, Energy Saver

(Detailed settings)

Set whether to use the Energy Saver mode for the following functions individually:

•Network

• Card Reader*1

•FAX

Value: Off, On

NOTE

When the machine enters Energy Saver, the ID card cannot be recognized.

Sleep Rules (models for

Europe)

Select whether to use the Sleep mode for the following functions individually:

•Network

• Card Reader*1

•FAX

Value: Off, On

NOTE

When the machine enters Energy Saver, the ID card cannot be recognized.

Sleep Timer Set amount of time before entering Sleep.

Value

For Europe

1 to 120 minutes (1 minute increments)

Except for Europe

1 to 240 minutes (1 minute increments)

Sleep (page 2-26)

8-27

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Power Off Rule (models for

Europe)

Select whether or not the machine enters Power Off mode for the following function. Select

[On] to set the Power Off mode.

•Network

•FAX

• USB Cable

• USB Host

• RAM Disk

• Remote Diag.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

Even when any of the functions is set to [On], if [FAX] is set to [Off], the machine does not

enter Power Off Mode.

Even when [Network] or [USB Cable] is set to [Off], if the machine does not communicate with

the other devices, the machine will enter Power Off Mode.

Power Off Timer (models for

Europe)

Select whether to turn off the power automatically after a period of inactivity.

Value: 1 hour, 2 hours, 3 hours, 4 hours, 5 hours, 6 hours, 9 hours, 12 hours, 1 day, 2

days, 3 days, 4 days, 5 days, 6 days, 1 week

Auto Err. Clear If an error occurs during processing, processing stops to wait for the next step to be taken by

the user. In the Auto Error Clear mode, automatically clear the error after a set amount of time

elapses.

Value: Off, On

Err. Clear Timer If you select [On] for Auto Error Clear, set the amount of time to wait before automatically

clearing errors.

Value: 5 to 495 seconds (in 5 second increments)

NOTE

This function is displayed when [Auto Err. Clear] is set to [On].

Unusable Time*2 Set a time period during which the machine will not print received faxes.

FAX Operation Guide

Ping Timeout Set the time until timeout occurs when [Ping] is executed in "System/Network".

Value: 1 to 30 seconds (in 1 second increments)

*1 Displayed only when the optional Card Authentication Kit is activated.

*2 Displayed only when the optional FAX Kit is installed.

Item Description

8-28

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Function Defaults

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Common Settings] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Function Defaults] >

[OK] key

Item Description

Color Selection Select the default color mode for scanning documents.

Value: Auto(Color/B&W), Auto(Color/Gray), Full Color, Grayscale, Black & White

Scan Resolution Select the default scanning resolution.

Value: 200×100dpi Norm., 200×200dpi Fine, 200×400dpi S.Fin, 300×300dpi,

400×400dpi U.Fin, 600×600dpi

FAX Resolution FAX Operation Guide

Orig.Image(Copy) Set the default original document type for copying.

Value: Text+Photo, Photo, Text, Graphic/Map

Orig.Image(Send) Set the default original document type for sending.

Value: Text+Photo, Photo, Text, for OCR, Light Text/Line

NOTE

[for OCR] is only available when "Color Selection" is set to [Black & White].

Zoom

Select the enlarged/reduced default when paper size/sending size changed after the originals set.

Value: 100%, Auto

Collate Set the defaults for Collate.

Value: Off, On

Original Orientation Set the original orientation defaults.

Value: Top Edge on Top, Top Edge on Left

Backgrnd(Copy) Set the default Backgrnd Density (Copy).

Value: Off, Auto, Manual (Darker 5)

Backgrnd(Send) Set the default Backgrnd Density (Send).

Value: Off, Auto, Manual (Darker 5)

EcoPrint Select the EcoPrint default.

Value: Off, On

Skip Blank(Copy) Set the default Skip Blank(Copy) settings.

Value: Off, On

Skip Blank(Send) Set the default Skip Blank(Send) settings.

Value: Off, On

File Name Entry Set an automatically entered name (default) for jobs. Additional information such as Date and

Job No. can also be set.

Value

File Name: Up to 32 characters can be entered.

Additional Info: None, Date, Job No., Job No. + Date, Date + Job No.

Subject/Body Set the subject and body automatically entered (default subject and body) when sending the

scanned originals by E-mail.

Value

Subject: Up to 60 characters can be entered.

Body: Up to 500 characters can be entered.

Con.scan-Copy Set the continuous scan (copy) defaults.

Value: Off, On

8-29

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Con.scan-FAX FAX Operation Guide

Con.scan-Others Set the continuous scan (excludes copy) defaults.

Value: Off, On

File Format Select the default type of the files to be sent.

Value: PDF, TIFF, XPS, JPEG, OpenXPS, High Comp. PDF

File Separation Select the default file separation setting.

Value: Off, Each Page

JPEG/TIFF Print Select the image size (resolution) when printing JPEG or TIFF file.

Value: Paper Size, Image Resolution, Print Resolution

XPS FitTo Page Set the default value for the XPS fit to page function.

Value: Off, On

Detail Settings —

2 in 1 Layout Set the default for the 2-in-1 layout of Combine copies.

Value: L to R, T to B, R to L, B to T

4 in 1 Layout Set the default for the 4-in-1 layout of Combine copies.

Value: Right then Down, Down then Right, Left then Down, Down then Left

Border Line Set the default for the border line of Combine copies.

Value: None, Solid Line, Dotted Line, Positioning Mark

Orig. Binding Set the default binding side for duplex scanning.

Value: Left/Right, Top

Finish. Binding Set the default for the binding orientation of finished two-sided copies.

Value: Left/Right, Top

Image Quality Select the default PDF/TIFF/JPEG/XPS/OpenXPS file quality.

Value: 1 Low(High Comp) to 5 High(Low Comp)

Color TIFF Comp. Select the compression method for sending the color documents in the TIFF format.

Value: TIFF V6, TTN2

PDF/A Select the default PDF/A setting.

Value: Off, PDF/A-1a, PDF/A-1b

High Comp. PDF Select the default quality setting for high compressed PDF files.

Value: Comp. Priority, Standard, Quality Priority

Blank Lvl (Copy) Select the default Blank Detection Level (Copy) settings.

Value: Low, Middle, High

Blank Lvl (Send) Select the default Blank Detection Level (Send/Store) settings.

Value: Low, Middle, High

Item Description

8-30

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Common Settings] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Login Operation] >

[OK] key

RAM Disk Mode

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Common Settings] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [RAM Disk Mode] >

[OK] key

Format SD Card

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Common Settings] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Format SD Card] >

[OK] key

Format an SD/SDHC memory card.

A new SD card must be formatted before it can be used in the machine.

Optional Memory

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Common Settings] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Optional Memory] >

[OK] key

Item Description

Value: Use Numeric Key, Select Character

Item Description

RAM Disk Mode A RAM disk can be created and its size can be set.

Creating a RAM disk makes it possible to print from a Job Box.

Value

RAM Disk Mode: Off, On

RAM Disk Size: The setting range varies depending on the amount of memory installed

and the option memory usage setting.

IMPORTANT

After changing the setting, restart the network or turn the machine OFF and then ON.

IMPORTANT

Formatting will destroy any existing data on a storage device including a used SD card.

Item Description

Optional Memory When optional memory is installed, select the memory allocation scheme based on the

application in which you are using the equipment.

Value: Normal, Printer Priority, Copy Priority

IMPORTANT

After changing the setting, restart the network or turn the machine OFF and then ON.

8-31

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Disp. Status/Log

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Common Settings] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Disp. Status/Log] >

[OK] key

Set the display method of the Status/Log.

USB KeyboardType

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Common Settings] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [USB KeyboardType] >

[OK] key

Low Toner Alert

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Common Settings] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Low Toner Alert] >

[OK]key

Show PowerOffMsg

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Common Settings] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Show PowerOffMsg] >

[OK] key

Item Description

JobsDetailStatus Value: Show All, My Jobs Only, Hide All

Jobs Log Value: Show All, My Jobs Only, Hide All

FAX Log*1

*1 Displayed only when the optional FAX Kit is installed.

Value: Show All, Hide All

Item Description

USB KeyboardType Select the type of USB keyboard that you want to use.

Value: US, Europe US, France, Germany

Item Description

Low Toner Alert Set the amount of remaining toner to notify the administrator when to order a toner when the

toner is running low.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

Selecting [Off] alerts you low toner when the amount of remaining toner becomes 5%.

If [On] is selected, set the amount of remaining toner to alert. The setting range is 5 to 100% (in

1% increments).

Item Description

Show PowerOffMsg Set the mode whether display a confirmation message in power supply off.

Value: Off, On

8-32

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

EnergySaver Set.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Common Settings] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [EnergySaver Set.] >

[OK] key

Copy

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Copy] > [OK] key

Configures settings for copying functions.

Item Description

Recovery Level Select the method of recovery from energy saver.

Value:

Full Recovery: This mode enables the use of all functions immediately.

However, this mode saves less energy.

Normal Recovery: In this mode, you can select the method from the following:

enabling the use of all functions immediately or enabling the

use of desired functions only.

If you want to use all functions immediately, press the power

switch to execute recovery.

Power Saving Recovery: This mode enables the use of desired functions only. This

mode saves energy most effectively.

Item Description

Paper Selection Set the default paper selection.

Value: Auto, Def. PaperSource

AutoPaperSelect. If [Auto] is selected for Paper Selection, set the paper size selection method when the zoom

changes.

Value

MostSuitableSize: Select paper based on the current zoom and the size of the original.

Same as OrigSize: Select paper that matches the size of the original, regardless the

zoom.

Auto % Priority When a paper source of different size from the original is selected, select whether automatic

zoom (reduce/zoom) is performed.

Value: Off, On

DP Read Action When the document processor is used, select the scanning operation for the document

processor.

Value

Speed Priority: Gives priority to scanning speed.

Quality Priority: Gives priority to image quality at a slightly slower scan speed.

Select Key Set. Commonly used copying functions can be registered to the Select key. Functions can be easily

configured by selecting the Select key.

Value: None, Paper Selection, Collate, Duplex, Zoom, Combine, Original Size,

Orig. Orientation, Mixed Size Orig., Original Image, Density, EcoPrint, Continuous Scan,

File Name Entry, JobFinish Notice, Print Override, Sharpness, Contrast,

Backgrnd Density, Skip Blank Page

8-33

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Printer

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Printer] > [OK] key

Printing from computers, settings are generally made on the application software screen. However, the following

settings are available for configuring the defaults to customize the machine.

Item Description

Emulation Set. Select the emulation for operating this machine by commands oriented to other types of

printers.

Value: Line Printer, IBM Proprinter, EPSON LQ-850, PCL6, KPDL, KPDL (Auto)

NOTE

When you have selected [KPDL] or [KPDL (Auto)], set "KPDL Error Rpt", too.

Alt. Emulation When you have selected [KPDL (Auto)] as emulation mode, you can switch between KPDL

and another emulation mode (alternative emulation) automatically according to the data to

print.

Value: Line Printer, IBM Proprinter, EPSON LQ-850, PCL6

KPDL Error Rpt When an error has occurred during printing in KPDL emulation mode, set whether or not the

error report is output.

Value: Off, On

EcoPrint EcoPrint conserves toner when printing. This is recommended for test copies where faded

printing is not a problem.

Value: Off, On

Override A4/LTR Select whether to treat A4 size and Letter, which are similar in size, as the same size when

printing.

Value

Off: A4 and Letter are not regarded as the same in size.

On: A4 and Letter are regarded as the same in size. The machine will use whichever size

is in the paper source.

Duplex Select binding orientation for duplex mode.

Value: Off, Bind Long Edge, Bind Short Edge

Copies Set the default number of copies, from 1 to 999.

Value: 1 to 999 copies

Orientation Set the default orientation, [Portrait] or [Landscape].

Value: Portrait, Landscape

Wide A4 Turn this to on to increase the maximum number of characters that can be printed in a line for

an A4 page (78 characters at 10 pitch) and Letter size page (80 characters at 10 pitch). This

setting is only effective in PCL6 emulation.

Value: Off, On

FormFeed TimeOut Receiving print data from the computer, the machine may sometimes wait if there is no

information signaling that the last page does not have any more data to be printed. When the

preset timeout passes, the machine automatically prints paper. The options are between 5 and

495 seconds.

Value: 5 to 495 seconds (in 5 second increments)

LF Action Set the line feed action when the machine receives the line feed code (character code 0AH).

Value: LF Only, LF and CR, Ignore LF

CR Action Set the character return action when the machine receives the character return code (character

code 0DH).

Value: CR Only, LF and CR, Ignore CR

8-34

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Job Name Set whether the job name set in the printer driver is displayed.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

When selecting [On], select the job name to be displayed from [Job Name], [Job No.+Job

Name], or [Job Name+Job No.].

User Name Set whether the user name set in the printer driver is displayed.

Value: Off, On

MP Tray Priority If paper is set in the multipurpose tray then it is possible for priority to be given to that

multipurpose tray in the paper feed.

Value

Off: The printer driver settings are followed.

Auto Feed: If Auto is selected in the printer driver and there is paper in the multipurpose

tray then the paper feed will be from the multipurpose tray.

Always: If there is paper in the multipurpose tray then the paper feed will be from the

multipurpose tray regardless of what is set in the printer driver.

Paper Feed Mode While printing from the computer, select how to feed paper when the paper source and type are

specified.

Value

Auto: Search the paper source that matches the selected paper size and type.

Fixed: Print on paper loaded in the specified paper source.

Auto Cass.Change Select the following actions when the paper runs out in the paper source while printing.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

When selecting [Off], the machine displays "Load paper in cassette #." (# is a cassette

number) or "Load paper in MP Tray", and stops printing.

Load the paper according to the paper source displayed to resume printing.

To print from the other paper source, select [Paper]. Select the desired paper source, and then

select the [OK] key.

When selecting [On], the machine continues printing automatically when the other cassette

contains the same paper as the currently-used cassette.

Resolution Set the resolution used for printing.

Value: 300dpi, 600dpi, Fast1200, Fine1200

NOTE

Settings that are received from the printer driver have priority over the operation panel settings.

KIR The machine is equipped with the smoothing function, which realizes an excellent printing of

about 9600 dpi (600 dpi × 15 gradation) × 600 dpi.

Value: Off, On

Item Description

8-35

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Send

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Send] > [OK] key

Configures settings for sending functions.

Item Description

Select Key Set. Commonly used sending functions can be registered to the Select key. Functions can be easily

configured by selecting the Select key.

Value: None, Color Selection, Original Size, Original Image, Scan Resolution,

Sending Size, Zoom, Orig. Orientation, Mixed Size Orig., Continuous Scan, File Format,

File Name Entry, Subject/Body, JobFinish Notice, FAX Resolution*1, FAX Direct TX*1,

FAX Delayed TX*1, FAXRXPolling

*1, FAX TX Report*1, Density, Duplex*2,

FTP Encrypted TX, File Separation, Sharpness, Contrast, Backgrnd Density, Skip Blank

Page

*1 Only on products with the fax function installed.

*2 Only on models with a duplex scanning function.

DestinationCheck Set the confirmation of destinations. *3

*3 Also applies when sending the fax.

Check beforeSend Select whether to display the confirmation screen of destinations after pressing the [Start] key

when performing sending jobs.

Value: Off, On

Check New Dest. When adding new destination, select whether to display the entry check screen to check the

entered destination.

Value: Off, On

New Dest. Entry Select whether to permit direct entry of destination.*3

Value: Permit, Prohibit

Recall Dest. Select whether to permit usage of [Recall] on the Send screen.*3

Value: Permit, Prohibit

Default Screen Use this procedure to set the default screen displayed when you select the [Send] key.

Value: Destination, Address Book

Send and Forward Set whether to send the original to another destination and store it when sending images.

Forward Set the rule to send the original.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

When selecting [On], select rules to forward from [E-mail], [Folder (SMB)], [Folder (FTP)] and

[FAX]*1.

Destination Set the destination to which the original is forwarded. One destination can be set. You can

check and edit the set address.

Follow the steps below to register the destination.

• Address Book

• Address Entry

Specifying Destination (page 5-30)

8-36

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

FAX

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [FAX] > [OK] key

Configure settings for FAX.

FAX Operation Guide

Document Box

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Document Box] > [OK] key

Configures settings related to the Job Box, Sub Address Box and Polling Box.

Item Description

Sub Address Box*1

*1 Only on products with the fax function installed.

FAX Operation Guide

Job Box Configure settings for Job Box.

Quick Copy Jobs To maintain free space on the box, you can set the maximum number of stored jobs.

Value: number between 0 and 300

NOTE

When 0 is set, Quick Copy cannot be used.

JobRet. Deletion This setting specifies that documents, such as Private Printing, Quick Copying, or Proof and

Hold Printing, saved temporarily in the job box are automatically deleted after they have been

saved for a set time.

Value: Off, 1 hour, 4 hours, 1 day, 1 week

NOTE

This function is valid for documents saved after the function is set. Regardless of this function

setting, temporary documents are deleted when the power switch is turned off.

Polling Box*1 FAX Operation Guide

Select Key Set. Commonly used printing and storing functions can be registered to the Select key. Functions

used when printing and when saving can both be registered. Functions can be easily

configured by selecting the Select key.

Value

Print: None, Collate, Paper Selection, Duplex, EcoPrint, File Name Entry,

JobFinish Notice, Print Override, Encrypted PDF*2, JPEG/TIFF Print*2, XPS FitTo Page*2,

Del. after Print*3

Store: None, Color Selection

, Original Size, Original Image, Scan Resolution, Storing Size

Zoom

, Orig. Orientation, Mixed Size Org., Continuous Scan, File Format

, File Separation

File Name Entry, JobFinish Notice, Density, Duplex

, Sharpness

, Contrast

Backgrnd Density

, Skip Blank Page

*2 Only displayed when printing from USB memory.

*3 Only displayed when printing from Sub Address Box.

*4 Not displayed when saving to Polling Box.

*5 Only on models with a duplex scanning function.

8-37

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Edit Destination

Address Book

[

System Menu/Counter

] key > [

▲

] [

▼

] key > [

Edit Destination

] > [

] key > [

▲

] [

▼

] key > [

Address Book

] > [

] key

Configure settings for address book.

Adding a Destination (Address Book) (page 3-18)

Print List

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Edit Destination] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Print List] > [OK] key

FAX Operation Guide

AddBookDefaults

[

System Menu/Counter

] key > [

▲

] [

▼

] key > [

Edit Destination

] > [

] key > [

▲

] [

▼

] key > [

AddBookDefaults

] > [

] key

NOTE

This function does not appear when the External Address Book is not set.

Item Description

Address Book Set the type of address book that appears when the address book is displayed.

Value: Machine AddrBook, Ext Address Book

8-38

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Adjust/Maint.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Adjust/Maint.] > [OK] key

Adjust printing quality and conduct machine maintenance.

Item Description

Copy Denst. Adj. Adjust copy density.

Value: -3 Lighter, -2, -1, 0 Normal, +1, +2, +3 Darker

Send/Box Density Adjust scan density when sending or storing the data in Document Box.

Value: -3 Lighter, -2, -1, 0 Normal, +1, +2, +3 Darker

Contrast (Copy) Increases or decreases the overall contrast of copies.

Value: -3, -2, -1, 0, 1, 2, 3

Contrast (Send) Increases or decreases the overall contrast when documents are sent or saved in a document

box.

Value: -3, -2, -1, 0, 1, 2, 3

Background Density Darkens or lightens overall background density adjustment.

Copy (Auto) Darkens or lightens overall background density adjustment during copying.

Value: -3 Lighter, -2, -1, 0 Normal, +1, +2, +3 Darker

Send/Box (Auto) Darkens or lightens overall background density when sending images or storing them in the

Document Box.

Value: -3 Lighter, -2, -1, 0 Normal, +1, +2, +3 Darker

Print Density Adjust print density. Adjustment can be made in 5 levels.

Value: 1 (Lighter) to 5 (Darker)

AutoColorCorrect This setting allows you to adjust the detection level used by the machine to determine whether

the original is color or black and white during Auto Color Mode. Setting a lower value will result

in more originals being identified as color, while a larger value will tend to increase the number

of originals being identified as black and white.

Value: 1 to 5

Correct. Bk Line Correct fine lines (streaks caused by contamination), which may appear on the image, when

the document processor is used.

Value: Off, On

Service Setting Settings for machine maintenance and inspection. This menu is primarily used by service

technicians to perform maintenance.

9-1

User Authentication and

Accounting (User Login,

Job Accounting)

This chapter explains the following topics:

Overview of User Login Administration .............................................................................................................. 9-2

Managing the Job Account from PC ........................................................................................................ 9-2

Enabling User Login Administration ................................................................................................................... 9-3

Setting User Login Administration ...................................................................................................................... 9-5

Authentication Security ............................................................................................................................ 9-5

Adding a User (Local User List) ............................................................................................................... 9-6

Changing User Properties ....................................................................................................................... 9-8

User Login Administration for Printing .................................................................................................... 9-11

Managing the Users to Scan Using TWAIN ........................................................................................... 9-12

Managing the Users to Scan Using WIA ............................................................................................... 9-13

Managing the Users that Send Faxes from a PC .................................................................................. 9-14

Group Authorization Settings ................................................................................................................. 9-15

Guest Authorization Set. ........................................................................................................................ 9-16

Obtain NW User Property ...................................................................................................................... 9-19

ID Card Settings .................................................................................................................................... 9-20

PIN Login Settings ................................................................................................................................. 9-21

Using User Login Administration ...................................................................................................................... 9-22

Login/Logout .......................................................................................................................................... 9-22

Overview of Job Accounting ............................................................................................................................ 9-23

To Manage the Number of Sheets Used on Jobs Printed from a PC ..................................................... 9-23

Enabling Job Accounting ................................................................................................................................. 9-24

Job Accounting Access .......................................................................................................................... 9-25

Setting an Account ........................................................................................................................................... 9-26

Adding an Account ................................................................................................................................. 9-26

Restricting the Use of the Machine ........................................................................................................ 9-28

Editing an Account ................................................................................................................................. 9-29

Deleting an Account ............................................................................................................................... 9-30

Job Accounting for Printing .................................................................................................................... 9-31

Job Accounting for Scan Using TWAIN ................................................................................................. 9-32

Job Accounting for Scan Using WIA ...................................................................................................... 9-33

Job Accounting for the FAX Transmitted from a Computer ................................................................... 9-34

Configuring Job Accounting ............................................................................................................................. 9-35

Default Setting ....................................................................................................................................... 9-35

Counting the Number of Pages Printed ................................................................................................. 9-36

Print Accounting Report ......................................................................................................................... 9-37

Using Job Accounting ...................................................................................................................................... 9-38

Login/Logout .......................................................................................................................................... 9-38

Unknown User Settings ................................................................................................................................... 9-39

Unknown ID Job .................................................................................................................................... 9-39

Registering Information for a User whose ID is Unknown ..................................................................... 9-40

9-2

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Overview of User Login Administration

Overview of User Login Administration

User login administration specifies how the user access is administered on this machine. Enter a correct login user

name and password for user authentication to login.

Access are in three levels - "User", "Administrator", and "Machine Administrator". The security levels can be modified

only by the "Machine Administrator".

Managing the Job Account from PC

In addition to the above settings, the following are necessary to manage the job account from PC.

To Manage the Users to Print from PCs

Printer driver settings are necessary to manage the users that print on the machine from PCs.

Managing the Users to Use TWAIN for Scanning

TWAIN driver settings on the PC are necessary to manage the users that use TWAIN for scanning.

Managing the Users to Scan Using TWAIN (page 9-12)

Managing the Users to Use WIA for Scanning

WIA driver settings on the PC are necessary to manage the users that use WIA for scanning.

Managing the Users to Scan Using WIA (page 9-13)

Managing the Users to Send Faxes from a PC

FAX driver settings on the PC are necessary to manage the users that send faxes from a PC.

Managing the Users that Send Faxes from a PC (page 9-14)

Fax functionality can only be used on products equipped with fax capability.

UserA

1Enable User Login

Administration

(page 9-3)

2Set the user

(page 9-6)3Enter the login user name and

password and execute the job

(page 2-15)

User A

User B

User C

1Set the User Login Administration

on the printer driver (page 9-11)2Print

9-3

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Enabling User Login Administration

Enabling User Login Administration

Select one of the following authentication methods:

1Display the screen.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [User/Job Account] > [OK] key

2[▲] [▼] key > [User Login Set.] > [OK] key

2Configure the settings.

1[▲] [▼] key > [User Login] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key >

[Local Authentic.]or[Netwk Authentic.] > [OK] key

When selecting [Netwk Authentic.]

1[▲] [▼] key > [NTLM], [Kerberos] or [Ext.] > [OK] key

2Enter the host name (64 characters or less) for the Authentication Server and select the

[OK] key.

3Select the domain name for the Authentication Server, and select the [OK] key.

If the domain has not been set, select the number where "----------------" is displayed and select

[Menu]. Select [Edit] and select the [OK] key then enter the domain name (in 256 characters or less).

Select the [OK] key and the domain will be registered.

To edit or delete a domain name that has already been registered, select that domain name and

select [Menu].

Item Descriptions

Local Authentication User authentication based on user properties on the local user list stored in the

machine.

Network Authentication

User authentication based on Authentication Server. Use a user property stored

in Authentication Server to access the network authentication login page.

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name

and password, and select [

]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

NOTE

Select [Off] to disable user login administration.

NOTE

Up to 10 domain names can be registered.

Model Name Login User Name Login Password

ECOSYS M2135dn/ECOSYS

M2635dn/ECOSYS M2635dw

3500 3500

ECOSYS M2040dn/ECOSYS

M2540dn/ECOSYS M2540dw

4000 4000

9-4

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Enabling User Login Administration

4When selecting [Ext.] as the server type, enter the port number and select the [OK] key.

NOTE

If the login user name and password are rejected, check the following settings.

• Network Authentication setting of the machine

• User property of the Authentication Server

• Date and time setting of the machine and the Authentication Server

If you cannot login because of the setting of the machine, login with any administrator

registered in the local user list and correct the settings.

9-5

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

Setting User Login Administration

This registers, alters and deletes users and configures the settings for User Login Administration.

Authentication Security

If user authentication is enabled, configure the user authentication settings.

User Account Lockout Setting

You can prohibit the use of a user account if an incorrect password is entered repeatedly to login with that account.

1Display the screen.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [User/Job Account] > [OK] key

2[▲] [▼] key > [User Login Set.] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Account Lockout] > [OK] key

2Configure the settings.

The following settings can be selected.

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name

and password, and select [

]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

Item Descriptions

Lockout Select whether or not account lockout policy is enabled.

Value: Off, On

Lockout Policy Specify the conditions and the extent to which the account lockout is

applied.

Number of

Retries

Specify how many login retries are allowed until the account is locked out.

Value: 1 to 10 times

Lockout Duration Specify how long the account is to be locked out until it is unlocked.

Value: 1 to 60 minutes

Lockout Target Specify the extent to which the account lockout is applied. [Remote Only]

locks out all operations from outside the operation panel.

Value: All, Remote Only

Locked out Users Displays a list of locked out users.

To cancel the locks:

Select the [▲] or [▼] key to select the user in the list, and [Select]. A

checkmark will be placed on the right of the selected user.

Select [Menu]. Select [Unlock] and the [OK] key.

Model Name Login User Name Login Password

ECOSYS M2135dn/ECOSYS

M2635dn/ECOSYS M2635dw

3500 3500

ECOSYS M2040dn/ECOSYS

M2540dn/ECOSYS M2540dw

4000 4000

9-6

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

Adding a User (Local User List)

This adds a new user. You can add up to 100 users (including the default login user name).

1Display the screen.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [User/Job Account] > [OK] key

2[▲] [▼] key > [User Login Set.] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Local User List] > [OK] key >

[Menu] > [▲] [▼] key > [Add User] > [OK] key

NOTE

By default, one of each default user with machine administrator rights and administrator privileges is already stored.

Each user's properties are:

Machine Administrator

User Name: DeviceAdmin

ECOSYS M2135dn/ECOSYS M2635dn/ECOSYS M2635dw: 3500

ECOSYS M2040dn/ECOSYS M2540dn/ECOSYS M2540dw: 4000

ECOSYS M2135dn/ECOSYS M2635dn/ECOSYS M2635dw: 3500

ECOSYS M2040dn/ECOSYS M2540dn/ECOSYS M2540dw: 4000

Access Level: Machine Administrator

Administrator

User Name: Admin

Access Level: Administrator

* Upper case and lower case letters are distinguished (case sensitive).

It is recommended to periodically change the user name, login user name and login password regularly for your

security.

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name

and password, and select [

]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

Model Name Login User Name Login Password

ECOSYS M2135dn/ECOSYS

M2635dn/ECOSYS M2635dw

3500 3500

ECOSYS M2040dn/ECOSYS

M2540dn/ECOSYS M2540dw

4000 4000

9-7

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

2Enter the user information.

1Enter the name displayed on the user list (up to 32 characters) and select the [OK] key.

2Enter the login user name to login (up to 64 characters) and select the [OK] key.

3To enter detailed user information, select [▲] [▼] key > [Detail] > [OK] key

To exit the operation, select [▲] [▼] key > [Exit] > [OK] key

4Enter the detailed user information.

Select [Edit], [Change] or [Detail] on each item, enter the information and then select the [OK] key.

Select the [►] key to view the next screen. Select the [◄] key to return to the previous screen. The

table below explains the user information to be registered.

3Select the [OK] key.

A new user is added on the local user list.

NOTE

For details on entering characters, refer to the the following:

Character Entry Method (page 11-8)

NOTE

The same login user name cannot be registered.

Item Descriptions

User Name*1

*1 Mandatory at user registration.

Enter the name displayed on the user list (up to 32 characters).

Name*1 Enter the login user name to login (up to 64 characters). The same login user

name cannot be registered.

password for confirmation and select the [OK] key.

Access Level*1 Select "Administrator" or "User" for user access privileges.

Account Name Add an account where the user belongs. The user, who registered his/her

account name, can login without entering the account ID.

Overview of Job Accounting (page 9-23)

ID Card

Information

key.

To delete IC card information, select [Change] > [▲] [▼] key > [Delete] >

[OK] key.

NOTE

This function is displayed when the optional Card Authentication Kit is

activated.

Card Authentication Kit(B) "Card Authentication Kit" (page 11-4)

9-8

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

Changing User Properties

Types of user properties that could be changed may be different depending on user access privilege.

For a user with administrator rights who logs in

User properties can be changed and users can be deleted. The items, which can be added, are all able to be changed.

1Display the screen.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [User/Job Account] > [OK] key

2[▲] [▼] key > [User Login Set.] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Local User List] > [OK] key

2Change the user properties.

Changing user properties

1Select the user whose properties you wish to change, and the [OK] key.

2Refer to step 2 of "Adding a User (Local User List)" to change a user property.

3[OK] key > [Yes]

The user information is changed.

NOTE

To change the user information of the machine administrator, you must log in with machine administrator authority.

You can only view user information if you log in as a regular user.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name

and password, and select [

]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

Adding a User (Local User List) (page 9-6)

Model Name Login User Name Login Password

ECOSYS M2135dn/ECOSYS

M2635dn/ECOSYS M2635dw

3500 3500

ECOSYS M2040dn/ECOSYS

M2540dn/ECOSYS M2540dw

4000 4000

Model Name Login User Name Login Password

ECOSYS M2135dn/ECOSYS

M2635dn/ECOSYS M2635dw

3500 3500

ECOSYS M2040dn/ECOSYS

M2540dn/ECOSYS M2540dw

4000 4000

9-9

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

Deleting a user

1Select the user whose properties you wish to delete, and [Menu].

2[▲] [▼] key > [Delete] > [OK] key > [Yes]

The selected user will be deleted.

NOTE

The default user with machine administrator rights cannot be deleted.

9-10

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

To change the user information of logged in user (User Property)

These users can partially change their own user properties including user name and login password.

Although "Login User Name", "Access Level", or "Account Name" cannot be changed, the users can check the present

status.

1Display the screen.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [User Property] > [OK] key

2Change the user properties.

1Refer to step 2 of "Adding a User (Local User List)" to change a user property.

2[OK] key > [Yes]

The user information is changed.

Adding a User (Local User List) (page 9-6)

Item Description

User Name Changes the name shown on the user list. Up to 32 characters can be

entered.

can be entered.

Access Level Displays the user's access level.

Account Name Displays the account where the user belongs.

ID Card Information Displays the ID card information of the logged in user.

NOTE

This function is displayed when the optional Card Authentication Kit is

activated.

Optional Applications (page 11-6)

This function does not appear when the server type is set to [Ext.] in

Network Authentication, and logged in with the user account

certificated in the server specified as the [Ext.] server type.

9-11

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

User Login Administration for Printing

It is possible to manage the users that print on this machine from a PC.

Setting Printer Driver

To manage the users that print on this machine from a PC, the following settings are necessary in the printer driver.

Instructions are based on interface elements as they appear in Windows 8.1.

1Display the screen.

1Select [Settings] in charms on Desktop, and select [Control Panel], and then [Devices

and Printers].

2Right-click the printer driver icon of the machine, and click the [Printer properties] menu of

the printer driver.

3Click [Administrator] on the [Device Settings] tab.

2Configure the settings.

1Select [User Login] on the [User Login] tab.

2Set the User Login Administration.

[Use specific name]: This option can be used to specify a user name and password to use

the same User login for every print job. If this option is selected, the user does not have to

type the name and password for each print job.

[Prompt for name]: A screen for entering the user name and password will be displayed

when attempting a printing. The user name and password must be entered each time a

printing is attempted.

[Prompt for name and validate]: A screen for entering the user name and password will

be displayed when attempting a printing. The user name and password stored in the Login

user name list needs to be entered. The user name and password must be entered each

time a printing is attempted.

[Validate user name (computer) or prompt for login user name]: When printing, the

Windows user name is searched in the "Login user names" and printing is possible if the

name is registered. If the name is not registered, the printing will be canceled for users with

only user authority. If the user has administrator privileges, the screen to enter the user

name and password will appear.

NOTE

In Windows 7, click [Start] button on the Windows, and then click [Devices and

Printers].

9-12

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

3Click [OK].

Managing the Users to Scan Using TWAIN

It is possible to manage the users that scan using TWAIN.

Setting TWAIN Driver

To manage the users that scan using TWAIN, the following settings are necessary in the TWAIN driver. Instructions are

based on interface elements as they appear in Windows 8.1.

1Display the screen.

1Select [Search] in charms, and enter "TWAIN Driver Setting" in the search box. Click

[TWAIN Driver Setting] in the search list then the TWAIN Driver Setting screen appears.

2Select the machine, and click [Edit].

2Configure the settings.

1Click [User Authentication Settings].

2Select the checkbox beside [Authentication], and enter Login User Name and Password.

3Click [OK].

NOTE

For other settings of job accounting, refer to the following:

Printer Driver User Guide

NOTE

In Windows 7, select [Start] button on the Windows, [All Programs], [Kyocera] and then

[TWAIN Driver Setting].

9-13

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

Managing the Users to Scan Using WIA

It is possible to manage the users that scan using WIA.

Setting WIA Driver

To manage the users that scan using WIA, the following settings are necessary in the WIA driver. Instructions are based

on interface elements as they appear in Windows 8.1.

1Display the screen.

1Click [Search] in charms, and enter "Scanner" in the search box. Click [View scanners

and cameras] in the search list then the Scanners and Cameras screen appears.

2Select the same name as this machine from WIA Drivers, and press [Properties].

2Configure the settings.

1Select the checkbox beside [Authentication] on the [Settings] tab, and enter Login User

Name and Password.

2Click [OK].

NOTE

In Windows 7, click [Start] button on the Windows and enter [Scanner] in [Program and

File Search]. Click [View scanners and cameras] in the search list then the Scanners

and Cameras screen appears.

9-14

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

Managing the Users that Send Faxes from a PC

It is possible to manage the users that send faxes from a PC.

Setting FAX Driver

To manage the users that send faxes from a PC, the following settings are necessary in the FAX driver. Instructions are

based on interface elements as they appear in Windows 8.1.

1Display the screen.

1Select [Settings] in charms on Desktop, and select [Control Panel], and then [Devices

and Printers].

2Right-click the printer driver icon of the machine, and click the [Printer properties] menu of

the printer driver.

3Click [FAX TX Setting] on the [Printing Preferences] window.

2Configure the settings.

1Select [User Login] on the [Authentication] tab.

2Set the User Login Administration.

[Use Specific Login User Name]: This option can be used to specify a user name and

password to use the same User login for every FAX job. If this option is selected, the user

does not have to type the name and password for each FAX job.

[Prompt for Login User Name]: A screen for entering the user name and password will be

displayed when attempting a transmission. The user name and password must be entered

each time a transmission is attempted.

3Click [OK].

NOTE

FAX functions are available only on products with the fax function installed.

NOTE

In Windows 7, click [Start] button on the Windows, and then click [Devices and

Printers].

9-15

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

Group Authorization Settings

Set restrictions of the machine usage by each individual group registered in the authentication server.

Group Authorization

1Display the screen.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [User/Job Account] > [OK] key

2[▲] [▼] key > [User Login Set.] > [OK] key

2Configure the setting.

[▲] [▼] key > [Group Auth.] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Off] or [On] > [OK] key

NOTE

• To use the group authorization settings, [Netwk Authentic.] must be selected for the authentication method in

"Enabling User Login Administration". Select "On" for "LDAP" in "Protocol Settings".

Enabling User Login Administration (page 9-3)

ProtocolSettings (page 8-12)

• Setting to use group authorization is performed from the operation panel. The groups should be registered with

Command Center RX.

Command Center RX User Guide

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name

and password, and select [

]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

Model Name Login User Name Login Password

ECOSYS M2135dn/ECOSYS

M2635dn/ECOSYS M2635dw

3500 3500

ECOSYS M2040dn/ECOSYS

M2540dn/ECOSYS M2540dw

4000 4000

9-16

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

Guest Authorization Set.

When User Login Administration is enabled, set the functions that guest users who cannot log in to the machine are

allowed to use.

Enabling Guest Authorization

1Display the screen.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [User/Job Account] > [OK] key

2[▲] [▼] key > [User Login Set.] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Guest Auth. Set.] >

[OK]key> [▲] [▼] key > [Guest Auth.] > [OK] key

2Configure the setting.

[▲] [▼] key > [On] or [Off] > [OK] key

NOTE

To use Guest Authorization Set., User Login Administration must be enabled in "Enabling User Login Administration".

Enabling User Login Administration (page 9-3)

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name

and password, and select [

]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

NOTE

If the guest authorization setting is enabled, the [Authentication/Logout] key must be

selected when logging in.

In the guest user default settings, only monochrome copying can be used. If you wish to use

a different function, log in as a user who can use that function, or change the settings in the

guest properties.

Model Name Login User Name Login Password

ECOSYS M2135dn/ECOSYS

M2635dn/ECOSYS M2635dw

3500 3500

ECOSYS M2040dn/ECOSYS

M2540dn/ECOSYS M2540dw

4000 4000

9-17

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

Configuring Guest Property

The table below explains the user information to be registered.

Item Descriptions

User Name Enter the name displayed on the user list (up to 32 characters).

The default setting is "Guest User".

Access Level The authority of the user appears. This cannot be changed.

Account Name Add an account where the user belongs.

Auth. Rules Set usage authority for each user.

The items you can restrict the access level with are as follows.

Print Restrict.:

Select whether or not use of the print function of the printer is prohibited.

Copy Restrict.

Select whether or not use of the copy print function is prohibited.

Send Restrict

Select whether or not use of the send function is prohibited.

FAX Restrict.*1

Select whether or not use of the fax send function is prohibited.

Storing in Box:

Select whether or not use of the box store function is prohibited.

StoringinMemory:

Select whether or not use of the removable memory store function is prohibited.

*1 Only on products with the fax function installed.

9-18

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

1Display the screen.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [User/Job Account] > [OK] key

2[▲] [▼] key > [User Login Set.] > [OK] key

2Configure the settings.

1[▲] [▼] key > [Guest Auth. Set.] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Guest Property] > [OK] key

2Register guest user information and functions that are restricted.

Select [Edit], [Change] or [Detail] on each item, enter the information and then select the [OK] key.

Select the [►] key to view the next screen. Select the [◄] key to return to the previous screen.

3Select the [OK] key.

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name

and password, and select [

]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

Model Name Login User Name Login Password

ECOSYS M2135dn/ECOSYS

M2635dn/ECOSYS M2635dw

3500 3500

ECOSYS M2040dn/ECOSYS

M2540dn/ECOSYS M2540dw

4000 4000

9-19

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

Obtain NW User Property

Set the required information to obtain the network user property from the LDAP server. The user name obtained with this

setting is shown in the user information, the status confirmation screen, and the header of E-mail.

1Display the screen.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [User/Job Account] > [OK] key

2[▲] [▼] key > [User Login Set.] > [OK] key

2Configure the settings.

[▲] [▼] key > [NW User Property] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Off] or [On] > [OK] key

NOTE

• To obtain the network user property from the LDAP server, [Netwk Authentic.] must be selected for the

authentication method in "Enabling User Login Administration". Select "On" for "LDAP" in "ProtocolSettings".

Enabling User Login Administration (page 9-3)

ProtocolSettings (page 8-12)

• Setting to obtain network user information is performed from the operation panel. The details of the information to be

obtained should be set with Command Center RX.

Command Center RX User Guide

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name

and password, and select [

]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

Model Name Login User Name Login Password

ECOSYS M2135dn/ECOSYS

M2635dn/ECOSYS M2635dw

3500 3500

ECOSYS M2040dn/ECOSYS

M2540dn/ECOSYS M2540dw

4000 4000

9-20

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

ID Card Settings

If ID card authentication is enabled, select the authentication type.

1Display the screen.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [User/Job Account] > [OK] key

2[▲] [▼] key > [User Login Set.] > [OK] key

2Configure the settings.

[▲] [▼] key > [ID Card Settings] > [OK] key

The following settings can be selected.

NOTE

This functions appears when the Card Authentication Kit is activated.

Optional Applications (page 11-6)

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name

and password, and select [

]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

Item Descriptions

Key Login When ID card authentication is enabled, select whether or not login by

keyboard is allowed.

Value: Permit, Prohibit

Additional Auth.*1

*1 This function does not appear when the server type is set to [NTLM] or [Kerberos] in "Network

Authentication".

Select whether or not to require password entry after authenticating by ID

card.

Value: Off, Use Password, Use PIN Code*2

*2 This function appear when [Network Authentication] is selected for the authentication method and

the server type is set to [Ext.] in "Network Authentication".

Model Name Login User Name Login Password

ECOSYS M2135dn/ECOSYS

M2635dn/ECOSYS M2635dw

3500 3500

ECOSYS M2040dn/ECOSYS

M2540dn/ECOSYS M2540dw

4000 4000

9-21

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

PIN Login Settings

1Display the screen.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [User/Job Account] > [OK] key

2[▲] [▼] key > [User Login Set.] > [OK] key

2Configure the settings.

[▲] [▼] key > [PIN Login] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > Select [Off] or [On] > [OK] key

NOTE

This setting is only displayed when [Network Authentication] must be selected for the authentication method and the

server type is set to [Ext.] in "Network Authentication".

Enabling User Login Administration (page 9-3)

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name

and password, and select [

]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

Model Name Login User Name Login Password

ECOSYS M2135dn/ECOSYS

M2635dn/ECOSYS M2635dw

3500 3500

ECOSYS M2040dn/ECOSYS

M2540dn/ECOSYS M2540dw

4000 4000

9-22

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Using User Login Administration

Using User Login Administration

This section explains procedures while setting job accounting.

If user login administration is enabled, the login user name and login password entry screen appears each time you use

this machine.

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, log in by referring to the following:

Logout

When the operations are complete, select the [Authentication/Logout] key to return to the login user name and login

password entry screen.

9-23

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Overview of Job Accounting

Overview of Job Accounting

Job accounting manages the copy/print/scan/FAX count accumulated by individual accounts by assigning an ID to each

account.

To Manage the Number of Sheets Used on Jobs

Printed from a PC

To manage the number of jobs to be printed from the PC on the network, you need to configure settings by using the

printer driver on the PC.

Managing the Scan Job Account by Using TWAIN

To manage the scan job account by using TWAIN, you need to configure the TWAIN driver settings on the computer

connected to the machine.

Job Accounting for Scan Using TWAIN (page 9-32)

Managing the Scan Job Account by Using WIA

To manage the scan job account by using WIA, you need to configure the WIA driver settings on the computer

connected to the machine.

Job Accounting for Scan Using WIA (page 9-33)

Managing the FAX Job Transmitted from a PC

To manage the number of FAX jobs transmitted from the PC, you need to configure the settings by using the FAX Driver

on the PC.

Job Accounting for the FAX Transmitted from a Computer (page 9-34)

Fax functionality can only be used on products equipped with fax capability.

100 400 200

A: 00000001

1Enable job

accounting. (page

9-24)

3Enter the assigned account

ID when performing the

job. (page 9-38)

4Count the number of pages

copied, printed, scanned

and faxed.

2Setting an

account. (page

9-26)

A: 00000001

B: 00000002

C: 00000003

100 400 200

1Set Job Accounting for the PC on

the network by using the printer

driver. (page 9-31)

2Execute printing. 3Count the number of

pages printed.

9-24

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Enabling Job Accounting

Enabling Job Accounting

1Display the screen.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [User/Job Account] > [OK] key

2[▲] [▼] key > [Job Account.Set.] > [OK] key

2Configure the settings.

[▲] [▼] key > [Job Accounting] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [On] > [OK] key

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name

and password, and select [

]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

NOTE

• To disable job accounting, select [Off].

• When the display returns to System Menu default screen, logout is automatically executed

and the screen to enter the Account ID appears. To continue the operation, enter the

Account ID.

Model Name Login User Name Login Password

ECOSYS M2135dn/ECOSYS

M2635dn/ECOSYS M2635dw

3500 3500

ECOSYS M2040dn/ECOSYS

M2540dn/ECOSYS M2540dw

4000 4000

9-25

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Enabling Job Accounting

Job Accounting Access

1Display the screen.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [User/Job Account] > [OK] key

2[▲] [▼] key > [Job Account.Set.] > [OK] key

2Configure the settings.

[▲] [▼] key > [

AccountingAccess

] > [

] key > [▲] [▼] key > [

Local

] or [

Network

] > [

] key

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name

and password, and select [

]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

Model Name Login User Name Login Password

ECOSYS M2135dn/ECOSYS

M2635dn/ECOSYS M2635dw

3500 3500

ECOSYS M2040dn/ECOSYS

M2540dn/ECOSYS M2540dw

4000 4000

9-26

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting an Account

Setting an Account

You can add, change and delete an account and set the restriction for each account.

Adding an Account

Up to 100 individual accounts can be added. The following entries are required.

1Display the screen.

1[System Menu/Counter] key >

[▲] [▼] key >

[User/Job Account] > [OK] key

[▲] [▼] key >

[Job Account.Set.] > [OK] key >

[▲] [▼] key >

[Account. List] > [OK] key >

[Menu] >

[▲] [▼] key >

[Add Account] > [OK] key

2Enter the account information.

1Enter the account name > [OK] key

2Enter the account ID > [OK] key

Item Descriptions

Account Name Enter the account name (up to 32 characters).

Account ID Enter the account ID as many as eight digits (between 0 and 99999999).

Restriction This prohibits printing/scanning or restricts the number of sheets to load.

Restricting the Use of the Machine (page 9-28)

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name

and password, and select [

]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

NOTE

For details on entering characters, refer to the the following:

Character Entry Method (page 11-8)

NOTE

Any "Account ID" that has already registered cannot be used. Enter any other account

ID.

Model Name Login User Name Login Password

ECOSYS M2135dn/ECOSYS

M2635dn/ECOSYS M2635dw

3500 3500

ECOSYS M2040dn/ECOSYS

M2540dn/ECOSYS M2540dw

4000 4000

9-27

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting an Account

3To apply restriction to the account ID, select [▲] [▼] key > [Detail] > [OK] key.

To exit the operation, select [▲] [▼] key > [Exit] > [OK] key.

4Check the account name and account ID and set the use restrictions.

To change the details, select [Edit], enter the information and then select the [OK] key. Select the [►]

key to view the next screen. Select the [◄] key to return to the previous screen.

5Select the [OK] key.

A new account is added on the account list.

Restricting the Use of the Machine (page 9-28)

9-28

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting an Account

Restricting the Use of the Machine

This section explains how to restrict the use of the machine by account or the number of sheets available.

The items that can be restricted differ depending on whether "Individual" or "Total" is selected for "Copy/Print Count".

Copy/Print Count (page 9-35)

Restriction Items

"Individual" selected for Copy/Printer Count"Split" selected for Copy/Printer Count

"Total" selected for Copy/Printer Count

Applying Restriction

Item Descriptions

Print Restrict Copier Limits the number of sheets used for copying.

Print Restrict Printer Limits the number of sheets used for printing.

Scan Restrict. Others Limits the number of sheets scanned (excludes copying).

FAX TX Restrict Limits the number of sheets sent by fax. This is displayed only on products with the

fax function installed.

Item Descriptions

Print Restrict Limits the total number of sheets used for copying and printing.

Scan Restrict. Others Limits the number of sheets scanned (excludes copying).

FAX TX Restrict Limits the number of sheets sent by fax. This is displayed only on products with the

fax function installed.

Item Descriptions

Off No restriction is applied.

Counter Limit*1

*1 If [Counter Limit] is selected, the [Limit Pages] screen appears after the [OK] key is selected. Enter a counter limit on

pages using the numeric keys, and select the [OK] key.

Restricts the print counter in one-page increments up to 9,999,999 copies.

Reject Usage Restriction is applied.

9-29

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting an Account

Editing an Account

1Display the screen.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [User/Job Account] > [OK] key

2[▲] [▼] key > [Job Account.Set.] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Account. List] > [OK] key

2Edit an account.

1Select the account you want to change and select the [OK] key.

2Refer to step 2 of "Adding an Account" and "Restricting the Use of the Machine" to change

account information.

3[OK] key > [Yes]

The account information is changed.

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name

and password, and select [

]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

NOTE

The account information can be changed by selecting [Menu], selecting [Detail/Edit] and

then selecting the [OK] key.

Adding an Account (page 9-26)

Restricting the Use of the Machine (page 9-28)

Model Name Login User Name Login Password

ECOSYS M2135dn/ECOSYS

M2635dn/ECOSYS M2635dw

3500 3500

ECOSYS M2040dn/ECOSYS

M2540dn/ECOSYS M2540dw

4000 4000

9-30

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting an Account

Deleting an Account

1Display the screen.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [User/Job Account] > [OK] key

2[▲] [▼] key > [Job Account.Set.] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Account. List] > [OK] key

2Delete an account.

1Select the account you want to delete and [Menu].

2[▲] [▼] key > [Delete] > [OK] key > [Yes]

The account is deleted.

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name

and password, and select [

]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

Model Name Login User Name Login Password

ECOSYS M2135dn/ECOSYS

M2635dn/ECOSYS M2635dw

3500 3500

ECOSYS M2040dn/ECOSYS

M2540dn/ECOSYS M2540dw

4000 4000

9-31

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting an Account

Job Accounting for Printing

The number of jobs to be printed from the computer can be managed by Job Accounting.

Setting Printer Driver

To manage the number of jobs to be printed from the PC on the network, you need configure the following settings by

using the printer driver on the PC. Instructions are based on interface elements as they appear in Windows 8.1.

1Display the screen.

1Select [Settings] in charms on Desktop, and select [Control Panel], and then [Devices

and Printers].

2Right-click the printer driver icon of the machine, and click the [Printer properties] menu of

the printer driver.

3Click [Administrator] on the [Device Settings] tab.

2Configure the settings.

1Select [Job accounting] on the [Job Accounting] tab.

2Set the Account ID.

[Use specific account ID]:

Enter the Account ID. Printing will be performed using the

entered Account ID. If this option is selected, the user does not have to enter the Account ID

for each print job.

[Prompt for account ID]: A screen for entering the Account ID will be displayed when

attempting a printing. The Account ID must be entered each time a printing is attempted.

[Prompt for account ID and validate]: A screen for entering the Account ID will be

displayed when attempting a printing. The Account ID stored in the Account ID list needs to

be entered. The Account ID must be entered each time a printing is attempted.

[Display account ID list]: The Account ID list is displayed when printing. The Account ID

to be used needs to be selected from the list.

[Validate user name (computer) or prompt for account ID]: When printing, the Windows

user name is searched in the "Account IDs" and printing is possible if the name is

registered. If the Account ID is not registered, the screen for entering the Account ID will

appear.

NOTE

In Windows 7, click [Start] button on the Windows, and then click [Devices and

Printers].

9-32

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting an Account

3Click [OK].

Job Accounting for Scan Using TWAIN

The number of jobs scanned by using TWAIN can be managed by Job Accounting.

Setting TWAIN Driver

To manage the number of jobs scanned by using TWAIN, you need to configure the following settings by using the

TWAIN Driver on the computer. Instructions are based on interface elements as they appear in Windows 8.1.

1Display the screen.

1Select [Search] in charms, and enter "TWAIN Driver Setting" in the search box. Click

[TWAIN Driver Setting] in the search list then the TWAIN Driver Setting screen appears.

2Select the machine, click [Edit].

2Configure the settings.

1Click [User Authentication Settings].

2Select the checkbox beside [Account], and enter the account ID.

3Click [OK].

NOTE

For other settings of job accounting, refer to the following:

Printer Driver User Guide

NOTE

In Windows 7, select [Start] button on the Windows, [All Programs], [Kyocera] and then

[TWAIN Driver Setting].

9-33

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting an Account

Job Accounting for Scan Using WIA

The number of jobs scanned by using WIA can be managed by Job Accounting.

Setting WIA Driver

To manage the number of jobs scanned by using WIA, you need to configure the following settings by using the WIA

Driver on the computer. Instructions are based on interface elements as they appear in Windows 8.1.

1Display the screen.

1Click [Search] in charms, and enter "Scanner" in the search box. Click [View scanners

and cameras] in the search list then the Scanners and Cameras screen appears.

2Select the same name as this machine from WIA Drivers, and press [Properties].

2Configure WIA Driver.

1Select the checkbox beside [Account ID] on the [Settings] tab, and enter the Account ID.

2Click [OK].

NOTE

In Windows 7, click [Start] button on the Windows and enter [Scanner] in [Program and

File Search]. Click [View scanners and cameras] in the search list then the Scanners

and Cameras screen appears.

9-34

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting an Account

Job Accounting for the FAX Transmitted from a

Computer

The number of FAX jobs transmitted from the computer can be managed by Job Accounting.

Setting FAX Driver

To manage the number of FAX jobs transmitted from the computer, you need to configure the following settings by using

the FAX Driver on the computer. Instructions are based on interface elements as they appear in Windows 8.1.

1Display the screen.

1Select [Settings] in charms on Desktop, and select [Control Panel], and then [Devices

and Printers].

2Right click the name of the machine to be used as the FAX Driver and select

[Printing preferences] from the resulting pull-down menu.

3Click [FAX TX Setting] in the [Printing Preferences] window.

2Configure the settings.

1Select [Job Accounting] on the [Authentication] tab.

2Set the Job Accounting.

[Use Specific Account ID]: This option can be used to specify an account ID to use the

same Account ID for every FAX job. If this option is selected, the user does not have to

enter the Account ID for each FAX job.

[Prompt for Account ID]: A screen for entering the Account ID will be displayed when

attempting a transmission. The Account ID must be entered each time a transmission is

attempted.

3Click [OK].

NOTE

FAX functions are available only on products with the fax function installed.

NOTE

In Windows 7, click [Start] button on the Windows, and then click [Devices and

Printers].

9-35

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Configuring Job Accounting

Configuring Job Accounting

Default Setting

Set the defaults for job accounting. To configure the settings, select the item in Default Setting and select the setting

item.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [User/Job Account] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Job Account.Set.] >

[OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Default Setting] > [OK] key

For details on each function, see the table below.

Item Description

Apply Limit This specifies how the machine behaves when the counter has reached the limit of restriction.

The table below describes the action taken.

Value

Immediately: Job stops when the counter reaches its limit. The next job will be

prohibited in sending or in storing in the box.

Subsequently: Printing/scanning of the job continues but the subsequent job will be

rejected.

Alert Only: Job continues while displaying an alert message.

Copy/Print Count You can select how the copying and printing page counts are shown - either the total of both or

each of copying and printing individually (Split). The selection may influence restriction on the

count and count method.

Value: Total, Individual

Restricting the Use of the Machine (page 9-28)

Print Accounting Report (page 9-37)

Counter Limit When you add a new account, you can change the default restrictions on the number of sheets

used. You can set any number from 1 to 9,999,999.

The items that can be set differ depending on whether [Individual] or [Total] is selected for

[Copy/Print Count].

Copy/Print Count (page 9-35)

[Split] selected for Copy/Printer Count

Copy Restriction Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for copying.

Print Restrict. Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for printing.

ScanRest.(Other) Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for scanning (excludes copying).

FAX Restriction*1

*1 Only on products with the fax function installed.

Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for sending faxes.

[Total] selected for Copy/Printer Count

Print Restrict. Sets the default restriction on the total number of sheets used for copying and printing.

ScanRest.(Other) Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for scanning (excludes copying).

FAX Restriction*1 Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for sending faxes.

9-36

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Configuring Job Accounting

Counting the Number of Pages Printed

Counts are classified into Total Job Accounting and Each Job Accounting. A new count can also be started after

resetting the count data which was stored for a certain period of time.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [User/Job Account] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Job Account.Set.] >

[OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Total Accounting] or [Each Job Account] > [OK] key

Total Accounting

This counts the number of pages for all accounts and resets the counts for those accounts together at the same time.

Each Job Account

This counts the number of pages for each account and resets the counts by account. When checking Each Job

Accounting, select the account for which you want to check the count.

Types of the counts are as follows.

To check other items, select the [OK] key to return to the screen one level higher.

Item Descriptions

Printed Pages Displays the number of pages copied and printed, and the total number of pages used. You can

also use [FAX RX Pages]*1, [Duplex Pages] and [Combine Pages] to check the number of

pages used.

*1 Only on products with the fax function installed.

Copy/Print Pages Displays the number of pages copied and printed, and the total number of pages used. Select

the [►] key to view the next screen. Select the [◄] key to return to the previous screen.

FAX RX Pages Displays the number of pages received.

Total PrintPages Displays the total number of pages used for copying and printing.

Duplex Pages Displays the number of pages printed in [1-Sided] mode, [2-Sided] mode, and the total pages

in both modes. Select the [►] key to view the next screen. Select the [◄] key to return to the

previous screen.

Combine Pages Displays the number of pages printed in [None] (no Combine) mode, [2 in 1] mode, [4 in 1]

mode, and the total pages in both modes. Select the [►] key to view the next screen. Select the

[◄] key to return to the previous screen.

Scanned Pages Displays the number of pages scanned for copying, faxing and other functions, as well as the

total number of pages scanned. Select the [►] key to view the next screen. Select the [◄] key

to return to the previous screen.

FAX TX Pages*1 Displays the number of pages faxed.

FAX TX Time*1 Displays the total duration of FAX transmissions.

Counter Reset Resets the counter.

Select [Yes] in the confirmation screen.

9-37

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Configuring Job Accounting

Print Accounting Report

The total pages counted of all relevant accounts can be printed as an accounting report.

Reports have different formats depending on how the count of copiers and printers is administered.

When "Individual" is selected for Managing the Copy/Printer Count.

1Prepare paper.

Check that A4 or Letter paper is loaded in the cassette.

2Display the screen.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [User/Job Account] > [OK] key

2[▲] [▼] key > [Job Account.Set.] > [OK] key

3Print the report.

[▲] [▼] key > [Account. Report] > [OK] key > [Yes]

Accounting report is printed.

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name

and password, and select [

]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

ACCOUNT. REPORT

Model Name Login User Name Login Password

ECOSYS M2135dn/ECOSYS

M2635dn/ECOSYS M2635dw

3500 3500

ECOSYS M2040dn/ECOSYS

M2540dn/ECOSYS M2540dw

4000 4000

9-38

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Using Job Accounting

Using Job Accounting

This section explains procedures while setting job accounting.

If job accounting is enabled, an account ID entry screen appears each time you use this machine.

When the screen for entry of account codes on the machine appears, perform the following.

1Enter the account ID using the numeric keys > [OK] key

When the screen to enter the login user name and password appears

If user login administration is enabled, the screen to enter the login user name and password

appears. Enter a login user name and password to login. If the user has already registered the

account information, the account ID entry would be skipped.

2Proceed to complete the rest of the steps.

Logout

When the operations are complete, select the [Authentication/Logout] key to return to the account ID entry screen.

NOTE

• If you entered a wrong character, select the [Clear] key and enter the account ID again.

• If the entered account ID does not match the registered ID, a warning beep will sound and

• By selecting [Counter], you can refer to the number of pages printed and the number of

pages scanned.

Adding a User (Local User List) (page 9-6)

9-39

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Unknown User Settings

Unknown User Settings

Unknown ID Job

This specifies the behavior for handling the jobs sent with unknown or unsent login user names or User ID. If the User

The setting items are as follows.

1Display the screen.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [User/Job Account] > [OK] key

2[▲] [▼] key > [Unknown User] key > [OK] key

2Configure the settings.

[▲] [▼] key > [Unknown ID Job] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Reject] or [Permit] > [OK] key

Item Descriptions

Permit The job is permitted to be printed.

Reject The job is rejected (not printed).

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name

and password, and select [

]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

Model Name Login User Name Login Password

ECOSYS M2135dn/ECOSYS

M2635dn/ECOSYS M2635dw

3500 3500

ECOSYS M2040dn/ECOSYS

M2540dn/ECOSYS M2540dw

4000 4000

9-40

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Unknown User Settings

Registering Information for a User whose ID is

Unknown

If you register user information for a user whose ID is unknown, you can check information on the Job Status or Job

History screens. In addition, you can restrict available functions.

1Display the screen.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [User/Job Account] > [OK] key

2[▲] [▼] key > [Unknown User] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [User Property] > [OK] key

2Enter the user information.

The table below explains the user information to be registered.

NOTE

This functions appears when [Unknown ID Job] is set to [Permit].

Unknown ID Job (page 9-39)

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name

and password, and select [

]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

Item Descriptions

User Name Enter the name displayed on the user list (up to 32 characters).

NOTE

This is displayed when user login administration is enabled.

Account Name Add an account where the user belongs.

Overview of Job Accounting (page 9-23)

NOTE

This is displayed when job accounting is enabled.

Auth. Rules Set usage authority.

The following restriction items are available:

Print Restriction:

Select whether or not use of the print function of the printer is prohibited.

Model Name Login User Name Login Password

ECOSYS M2135dn/ECOSYS

M2635dn/ECOSYS M2635dw

3500 3500

ECOSYS M2040dn/ECOSYS

M2540dn/ECOSYS M2540dw

4000 4000

10-1

10 Troubleshooting

This chapter explains the following topics:

Regular Maintenance ....................................................................................................................................... 10-2

Cleaning ................................................................................................................................................. 10-2

Cleaning Glass Platen ........................................................................................................................... 10-2

Cleaning Slit Grass ................................................................................................................................ 10-3

Cleaning the inside of the Machine ........................................................................................................ 10-4

Toner Container Replacement ............................................................................................................... 10-7

Loading Paper ..................................................................................................................................... 10-10

Using the Maintenance Menu ......................................................................................................................... 10-11

Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................................................. 10-12

Solving Malfunctions ............................................................................................................................ 10-12

Machine Operation Trouble ................................................................................................................. 10-12

Printed Image Trouble ......................................................................................................................... 10-15

Responding to Messages .................................................................................................................... 10-18

Clearing Paper Jams ..................................................................................................................................... 10-30

Jam Location Indicators ....................................................................................................................... 10-30

Remove any jammed paper in Cassette 1 ........................................................................................... 10-31

Remove any jammed paper in Cassette 2 ........................................................................................... 10-33

Remove any jammed paper in Cassette 3 ........................................................................................... 10-35

Remove any jammed paper in the Multipurpose Tray ......................................................................... 10-37

Remove any jammed paper inside of the Machine .............................................................................. 10-38

Remove any jammed paper in Rear Cover .......................................................................................... 10-42

Remove any jammed paper in the Document Processor .................................................................... 10-46

10-2

Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance

Regular Maintenance

Cleaning

Clean the machine regularly to ensure optimum printing quality.

Cleaning Glass Platen

Wipe the inside of the document processor and the glass platen with a soft cloth dampened with alcohol or mild

detergent.

CAUTION

For safety, always unplug the power cord before cleaning the machine.

IMPORTANT

Do not use thinner or other organic solvents.

10-3

Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance

Cleaning Slit Grass

When using the document processor, clean the slit glass surface and the reading guide with the soft cloth.

NOTE

Dirt on the slit glass or the reading guide may cause black streaks to appear in the output.

10-4

Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance

Cleaning the inside of the Machine

To maintain optimum print quality, clean the interior of the machine each time you replace the toner container, and

whenever vertical lines appear.

1Open the front cover.

2Lift the developer unit together with the toner container out of

the machine.

3Place the developer unit together with the toner container flat

on a clean, level surface.

IMPORTANT

Do not touch the developer unit or subject the developer unit to shock. Print quality

will be degraded.

IMPORTANT

Do not place the developer unit together with the toner container on end.

10-5

Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance

4Remove the drum unit from the machine.

5Place the drum unit flat on a clean, level surface.

6Use a clean, lint free cloth to clean dust and dirt away from the

metal registration roller.

IMPORTANT

Do not touch the drum or subject the drum to shock. Print quality will be degraded if

the drum is exposed to direct sunlight or intense light.

IMPORTANT

Do not place the drum unit on end.

10-6

Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance

7On the drum unit, slide the main charger cleaner back and forth

2 or 3 times to clean the charger wire.

8When cleaning is complete, return the drum unit to the original

position.

9Return the developer unit together with the toner container to

its position, aligning the guides at both ends with the slots in

the machine.

10 Close the front cover.

IMPORTANT

• Before using the charger cleaner for the first time, remove the tape that holds the

charger cleaner knob.

• After cleaning, make sure you restore the main charger cleaner to its home position

(CLEANER HOME POSITION).

10-7

Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance

Toner Container Replacement

When toner is empty, the following message will be displayed.

"Replace toner."

When toner runs low, the following message will be displayed. Make sure you have a new toner container available for

replacement.

"Toner is low. (Replace when empty.)"

Frequency of Toner Container Replacement

The life of the toner containers depends on the amount of toner required to accomplish your printing jobs. According to

ISO/IEC 19752 and EcoPrint switched off the toner container can print as follows (A4/Letter paper is assumed):

ECOSYS M2135dn/ECOSYS M2635dn/ECOSYS M2635dw

Life of the Toner Container (Printable pages)

3,000 images

ECOSYS M2040dn/ECOSYS M2540dn/ECOSYS M2540dw

Life of the Toner Container (Printable pages)

7,200 images

ECOSYS M2040dn/L

Life of the Toner Container (Printable pages)

12,000 images

NOTE

• The average number of images that can be printed with the toner containers provided with the machine is as

follows.

For ECOSYS M2135dn/ECOSYS M2635dn/ECOSYS M2635dw: 1,000 images

For ECOSYS M2040dn/ECOSYS M2540dn/ECOSYS M2540dw/ECOSYS M2040dn/L: 3,600 images

• To maintain quality, we recommend using genuine Kyocera toner containers, which must pass numerous quality

inspections.

CAUTION

Do not attempt to incinerate parts which contain toner. Dangerous sparks may cause burns.

10-8

Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance

Replacing the Toner Container

1Open the front cover.

2Unlock the toner container.

3Remove the toner container.

4Put used toner containers into the plastic waste bag.

10-9

Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance

5Remove the new toner container from the box.

6Shake the toner container.

7Install the toner container.

IMPORTANT

Do not touch the points shown below.

5~6

10-10

Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance

8Close the front cover.

Loading Paper

When Cassette # runs out of paper, the following messages will be displayed.

"Load paper in cassette #." (# is a cassette number)

"Load paper in MP tray."

Loading Paper (page 3-2)

Loading Paper in the Multipurpose Tray (page 5-5)

NOTE

• If the front cover does not close, check that the new toner container is installed correctly.

• Return the exhausted toner container to your dealer or service representative. The collected toner container will be

recycled or disposed in accordance with the relevant regulations.

NOTE

If [Paper Setup Msg] is set to [On], the confirmation screen for the paper setting will be displayed when a new paper

is set. If a paper is changed, select [Change] and then change the settings of the paper.

Cassette 1 to 3 (page 8-22)

MP Tray (page 8-22)

10-11

Troubleshooting > Using the Maintenance Menu

Using the Maintenance Menu

You can use the [Maintenance Menu] to adjust the print position and scan position, and maximize the print quality for

the elevation of your location.

Maintenance Menu User Guide

Item Description

Adjust print

position

Printing start position Enter or select the top margin start position for printing.

Value: 0 to 300 mm (in 5 mm increments)

Center Line Enter or select the left margin start position for printing for each

available paper source. This setting is available for each cassette

when optional paper feeders are installed.

Value: -25 to 25 mm (in 5 mm increments)

Adjust scan

position

Platen Scanning start

position

Enter or select the top margin scan start position for the platen.

Value: -45 to 45 mm (in 5 mm increments)

Center Line Enter or select the left margin scan start position for the platen.

Value: -50 to 50 mm (in 5 mm increments)

Document

Processor

Scanning start

position

With a document processor installed, enter or select the top margin

scan start positions for front and back.

Value: -25 to 25 mm (in 5 mm increments)

Scan end

position

With a document processor installed, enter or select the bottom

margin scan end positions for front and back.

Value: -25 to 25 mm (in 5 mm increments)

Center Line With a document processor installed, enter or select the left margin

scan start positions for front and back.

Value: -50 to 50 mm (in 5 mm increments)

Adjust print

quality

Drum charge setting When print quality has deteriorated, the output of the main charger

can be changed to restore print quality.

Value: 1 to 7

Altitude setting If you are using the machine at an altitude of 1,000 m or higher and

print quality has deteriorated, the Altitude setting can be used to

restore print quality.

Value: Normal, 1001 - 2000m, 2001 - 3000m, 3001 - 3500m

Drum refresh Perform Drum refresh when images show streaking with white lines.

10-12

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting

Solving Malfunctions

The table below provides general guidelines for problem solving.

If a problem occurs with your machine, look into the checkpoints and perform procedures indicated on the following

pages. If the problem persists, contact your Service Representative.

Machine Operation Trouble

When the following machine operation troubles occur, implement appropriate procedures.

NOTE

When contacting us, the serial number will be necessary.

To check the serial number, refer to the following:

Checking the Equipment's Serial Number (page i)

Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

The screen does not

respond when the power

switch is turned on.

Check the power cord. Connect both ends of the power cord

securely.

page 2-9

Pressing the [Start] key

does not produce copies.

Is there a message on the screen? Determine the appropriate response to

the message and respond accordingly.

page 10-18

Is the machine in Sleep mode? Select the [Energy Saver] key. page 2-26

Blank sheets are ejected. Are the originals loaded correctly? When placing originals on the platen,

place them face-down and align them

with the original size indicator plates.

page 5-2

When placing originals in the document

processor, place them face-up.

page 5-3

―Check that the settings of the

application software.

―

Paper often jams. Is the paper loaded correctly? Load the paper correctly. page 3-4

―Turn the orientation 180 degrees around

in which the paper is positioned.

page 3-4

Is the paper of the supported type? Is it

in good condition?

Remove the paper, turn it over, and

reload it.

page 3-4

Is the paper curled, folded or wrinkled? Replace the paper with new paper. page 3-4

Are there any loose scraps or jammed

paper in the machine?

Remove any jammed paper. page 10-30

2 or more sheets are

overlaps when ejected.

(multi feed)

―Load the paper correctly. page 3-2

10-13

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

Printouts are wrinkled. Is the paper loaded correctly? Load the paper correctly. page 3-2

―Turn the orientation 180 degrees around

in which the paper is positioned.

page 3-2

Is the paper damp? Replace the paper with new paper. page 3-2

Printouts are curled. ―Turn the paper over in the cassette, or

turn the orientation 180 degrees around

in which the paper is positioned.

page 3-2

Is the paper damp? Replace the paper with new paper. page 3-2

I can't install the printer

driver.

Are you trying to install the driver using

a host name with Wi-Fi or Wi-Fi Direct

enabled?

Specify an IP address instead of a host

name.

―

Cannot print. Is the machine plugged in? Plug the power cord into an AC outlet. ―

Is the machine powered on? Turn on the power switch. page 2-10

Are the USB cable and network cable

connected?

Connect the correct USB cable and

network cable securely.

page 2-8

Is the print job paused? Resume printing. page 7-13

Cannot print with USB

memory.

USB memory not

recognized.

Is the USB host blocked? Select [Unblock] in the USB host

settings.

page 8-17

―Check that the USB memory is securely

plugged into the machine.

―

While "Auto-IP" is set to

[On], the IP address is not

assigned automatically.

Is a value other than "0.0.0.0" entered

for the IP address of TCP/IP(v4)?

Enter "0.0.0.0" for the IP address of

TCP/IP(v4).

page 2-18

Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

10-14

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

Cannot send via SMB. Is the network cable connected? Connect the correct network cable

securely.

page 2-8

Have the network settings for the

equipment been configured properly?

Configure the TCP/IP settings properly. page 8-10

Have the folder sharing settings been

configured properly?

Check sharing settings and access

privileges under the folder properties.

page 3-10

Has the SMB protocol been set to [On]? Set the SMB protocol setting to [On]. page 8-13

Has [Host Name] been entered

properly? *1 Check the name of the computer to

which data is being sent.

page 5-16

Has [Path] been entered properly? Check the share name for the shared

folder.

page 5-16

Has [Login User Name] been entered

properly? *1 *2 Check the domain name and login user

name.

page 5-16

Has the same domain name been used for

[

Host Name

] and [

Delete the domain name and backslash

("/") from [

page 5-16

Has [Login Password] been entered

properly?

Check the login password. page 5-16

Have exceptions for Windows Firewall

been configured properly?

Configure exceptions for Windows

Firewall properly.

page 3-13

Do the time settings for the equipment,

domain server, and data destination

computer differ?

Set the equipment, domain server, and

data destination computer to the same

time.

―

Is the screen displaying Send error? Refer to Responding to Send Error.page 10-27

Cannot send via the e-mail. Is the E-mail send size limit set in the

SMTP server registered on the

machine?

Check the limit value is entered to "E-

mail Size Limit" of [E-mail] setting in

Command Center RX and change the

value as necessary.

page 2-51

The machine is emitting

steam in the area around the

paper ejection slot.

Check the room temperature to see if it

is low, or if damp paper was used.

Depending on the printing environment

and the paper's condition, the heat

generated during printing will cause the

moisture in the paper to evaporate, and

the steam emitted may look like smoke.

This is not a problem, and you can

continue printing. If the steam concerns

you, raise the room temperature, or

replace the paper with a newer, dryer

paper.

―

*1 You can also enter a full computer name as the host name (for example, pc001.abcdnet.com).

*2 You can also enter login user names in the following formats:

Domain_name/user_name (for example, abcdnet/james.smith)

User_name@domain_name (for example, james.smith@abcdnet)

Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

10-15

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

Printed Image Trouble

When the following printed image trouble occurs, implement appropriate procedures.

Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

Printed images are totally

too light.

Is the paper damp? Replace the paper with new paper. page 3-2

Have you changed the density? Select appropriate density level. page 6-18

page 8-38

Is the toner distributed evenly within the

toner container?

Shake the toner container from side to

side several times.

page 10-7

Is EcoPrint mode enabled? Disable [EcoPrint] mode. page 8-33

Are the drum unit and developer unit

installed correctly?

Correctly install the drum unit and

developer unit.

page 10-4

―Make sure the paper type setting is

correct for the paper being used.

page 8-21

―Select the [System Menu/Counter] key

> [Adjust/Maint.] > [Service Setting] >

[Drum Refresh], and then select [Yes].

―

Printed images are too dark

even though the background

of the scanned original is

white.

Have you changed the density? Select appropriate density level. page 6-18

page 8-38

―Select the [System Menu/Counter] key

> [Adjust/Maint.] > [Service Setting] >

[Drum Refresh], and then select [Yes].

―

―Select the [System Menu/Counter] key

> [Adjust/Maint.] > [Service Setting] >

[MC] and increase the adjustment value.

Increase the adjustment value 1 level at

a time from the current value. If there is

no improvement after the value is

increased by 1 level, increase by 1 level

again. If there is no improvement, lower

in increments of 1 level from the original

setting. If there is no improvement after

the value is decreased by 1 level,

decrease by 1 level again. If there is still

no improvement, return the setting to

the original value.

―

Copies have a moire pattern

(dots grouped together in

patterns and not aligned

uniformly).

Is the original a printed photograph? When making copies

Set the original image to [Photo].

page 6-17

―When making copies

Set [

Sharpness

] to a value from [

-1

] to [

-3

page 6-20

―When making copies

Select the [System Menu/Counter] key

> [Copy] > [DP Read Action], and set

to [Quality Priority].

page 8-32

Texts are not clearly printed. Did you choose appropriate image

quality for the original?

Select appropriate image quality. page 6-17

―When making copies

Set [Sharpness] to a value from [+1] to

[+3].

page 6-20

10-16

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

Black points appear in white

background parts of the

image.

Is the original holder or the glass platen

dirty?

Clean the original holder or the glass

platen.

page 10-2

―Select the [System Menu/Counter] key

> [Adjust/Maint.] > [Service Setting] >

[Drum Refresh], and then select [Yes].

―

―Select the [System Menu/Counter] key

> [Adjust/Maint.] > [Service Setting] >

[MC] and increase the adjustment value.

Increase the adjustment value 1 level at

a time from the current value. If there is

no improvement after the value is

increased by 1 level, increase by 1 level

again. If there is still no improvement,

return the setting to the original value.

―

Printed images are fuzzy. Is the machine being used in conditions

of very humid, or humidity or

temperature rapidly changes?

Use in an environment that has suitable

humidity.

―

―Select the [System Menu/Counter] key

> [Adjust/Maint.] > [Service Setting] >

[Drum Refresh], and then select [Yes].

―

Printed images are skewed. Are the originals placed correctly?

When placing originals on the platen, align

them with the original size indicator plates.

page 5-2

When placing originals in the document

processor, align the original width guides

securely before placing the originals.

page 5-3

Is the paper loaded correctly? Check the position of the paper width

guides.

page 3-2

Irregular horizontal lines

appear in the image.

―Select the [System Menu/Counter] key

> [Adjustment/Maintenance] >

[Service Setting] > [MC] and increase

the adjustment value. Increase the

adjustment value 1 level at a time from

the current value. If there is no

improvement after the value is

increased by 1 level, increase by 1 level

again. If there is still no improvement,

return the setting to the original value.

―

The altitude is 1000 m or

higher and irregular

horizontal white lines appear

in the image.

―Select the [System Menu/Counter] key

> [Adjustment/Maintenance] >

[Service Setting] > [Altitude

Adjustment], and set to an elevation

one level higher than the current setting.

―

Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

10-17

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

The altitude is 1000 m or

higher and dots appear in

the image.

―Select the [System Menu/Counter] key

> [Adjustment/Maintenance] >

[Service Setting] > [Altitude

Adjustment], and set to an elevation

one level higher than the current setting.

―

Printouts have vertical lines.

Is the slit glass dirty? Clean the slit glass. page 10-3

―Clean the charger inside of the machine. page 10-4

Dirt on the top edge or back

of the paper.

Is the interior of the machine dirty? Clean the interior of the machine. page 10-4

Part of the image is

periodically faint or shows

white lines.

―Open and then close the front cover. ―

―Select the [System Menu/Counter] key

> [Adjust/Maint.] > [Service Setting] >

[Drum Refresh], and then select [Yes].

―

―Select the [System Menu/Counter] key

> [Adjust/Maint.] > [Service Setting] >

[MC] and decrease the adjustment

value. Decrease the adjustment value 1

level at a time from the current value. If

there is no improvement after the value

is decreased by 1 level, decrease by 1

level again. If there is still no

improvement, return the setting to the

original value.

―

The previous image remains

and lightly printed.

―Make sure the paper type setting is

correct for the paper being used.

page 8-20

―Select the [System Menu/Counter] key

> [Adjustment/Maintenance] >

[Service Setting] > [MC] and increase

the adjustment value. Increase the

adjustment value 1 level at a time from

the current value. If there is no

improvement after the value is

increased by 1 level, increase by 1 level

again. If there is still no improvement,

return the setting to the original value.

―

Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

10-18

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

Responding to Messages

If the message display or the computer displays any of these messages, follow the corresponding procedure.

NOTE

When contacting us, the serial number will be necessary.

To check the serial number, refer to the following:

Checking the Equipment's Serial Number (page i)

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

Access point was not

detected.

―Check if the access point has been

set correctly.

―

Account error. ―Failed to specify Job Accounting

when processing the job externally.

The job is canceled. Select the [OK]

key.

—

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

Cannot connect to

Authentication Server

Check the connection

with the server.

— Check the connection status with

the server.

—

Cannot connect to

Authentication Server

Check the domain name.

— Check the domain name. page 9-2

Cannot connect to

Authentication Server

Check the host name.

— Check the host name. page 9-2

Cannot connect to

Authentication Server

Set machine time to

match server's time.

— Set machine time to match the

server’s time.

page 2-17

Cannot connect to

Server. Check the

Connection Status.

Job is canceled.

— Check the connection status with

the server.

—

Cannot connect. — This appears when the Wi-Fi or Wi-

Fi Direct connection did not

complete. Check the settings, and

check the signal conditions.

—

Cannot duplex print on

this paper.

↑↓

(Displayed alternately)

Press OK to continue

using cassette #.

Did you select a paper size/type

that cannot be duplex printed?

Select [Paper] to select the

available paper. Select [OK] to print

without using Duplex function.

―

10-19

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

Cannot duplex print on

this paper.

↑↓

(Displayed alternately)

Press OK to using MP

Tray.

Did you select a paper size/type

that cannot be duplex printed?

Select [Paper] to select the

available paper. Select the [OK] key

to print without using Duplex

function.

―

Cannot read data in this

ID Card.

―In registration process, the ID card

information was not read correctly.

Hold again the ID card over the ID

card reading part.

If the same message still appears,

the ID card may not be compatible

with this product. Change it to

another ID card.

―

Cannot recognize. ―

Make sure your ID card has been

registered.

Card

Authentication

Kit (B)

Operation

Guide

Cannot use this

function.

>> #####

―

This job is canceled because it is

restricted by User Authorization or

Job Accounting. Select the [

] key.

―

Close # cover. Is there any cover which is open? Close the cover indicated on the

screen.

―

Close the document

processor and its cover.

Is the document processor open? Close the document processor. ―

Cooling…

Please wait.

―The machine is under the

adjustment to maintain its quality.

Please wait.

―

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

Error occurred. Turn the

power switch off and on.

―System error has occurred. Turn the

power switch OFF and then ON.

―

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

Failed to store job

retention data. Job is

canceled.

— The job is canceled. Select the [OK]

key.

—

FAX memory is full. — FAX cannot be performed any more

due to insufficient memory. The job

is canceled. Select the [OK] key.

FAX

Operation

Guide

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

10-20

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

High temperature.

Adjust room temp.

―Adjust the temperature and the

humidity of your room.

―

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

Incorrect account ID.

Job is canceled.*1

*1 When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time elapses. For details

on Auto Error Clear, refer to the following:

Auto Err. Clear (page 8-27)

— The account ID was incorrect when

processing the job externally. The

job is canceled. Select the [OK] key.

—

Incorrect Login User

Name or Password. Job

is canceled.*1

— The login user name or password

was incorrect when processing the

job externally. The job is canceled.

Select the [OK] key.

—

Inner tray is full of paper.

Remove the paper.

—

Remove paper from the inner tray.

Select [

Continue

] to resume printing.

Select [

Cancel

] to cancel the job.

—

Insufficient memory.

Cannot start the job.

— Job cannot be started. Try again

later.

—

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

Job Accounting

restriction exceeded.

Job is canceled.

Is the acceptable printing count

restricted by Job Accounting

exceeded?

The printing count exceeded the

acceptable count restricted by Job

Accounting. Cannot print any more.

This job is canceled. Select the

[OK] key.

―

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

KPDL error. Job is

canceled.*1

*1 When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time elapses. For details

on Auto Error Clear, refer to the following:

Auto Err. Clear (page 8-27)

―PostScript error has occurred. The

job is canceled. Select the [OK] key.

―

10-21

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

Load paper in cassette #.

↑↓

(Displayed alternately)

Press OK to continue

using cassette #.

Is the indicated cassette out of

paper?

Load paper.

Select [Paper] to select the other

paper source. Select the [OK] key

to print on the paper in the currently

selected paper source.

page 3-2

Load paper in cassette #.

↑↓

(Displayed alternately)

Set selected size paper

and press [OK].

Is the indicated cassette out of

paper?

Load paper.

Select [Paper] to select the other

paper source. Select the [OK] key

to print on the paper in the currently

selected paper source.

page 3-2

Load paper in MP tray.

↑↓

(Displayed alternately)

Press OK to continue

using MP tray.

Is the paper of the selected size

loaded in the multipurpose tray?

Load paper.

Select [Paper] to select the other

paper source. Select the [OK] key

to print on the paper in the currently

selected paper source.

page 3-2

Load paper in MP tray.

↑↓

(Displayed alternately)

Set selected size paper

and press [OK].

Is the paper of the selected size

loaded in the multipurpose tray?

Load paper.

Select [Paper] to select the other

paper source. Select the [OK] key

to print on the paper in the currently

selected paper source.

page 3-2

Low temperature. Adjust

room temp.

―Adjust the temperature and the

humidity of your room.

―

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

Machine failure. Call

service.

―An error has occurred in the

machine. Make a note of the error

code displayed on the message

display, and contact your service

representative.

―

Maximum number of

scanned pages. Job is

canceled.

Is the acceptable scanning count

exceeded?

Cannot scan pages any more. Job is

canceled. Select the [

] key.

—

Memory card error.

Job is canceled.

—

An error has occurred on the

memory card. Job is canceled.

Select [

End

04: Insufficient space on the memory

card to complete this operation.

Move data or delete unneeded data.

—

10-22

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

Memory is full. Job is

canceled.

— The process cannot be performed

due to insufficient memory. If only

[End] is available, select [End]. The

job will be canceled.

—

Memory is full.

Print job cannot be

processed completely.*1

— Unable to continue the job as the

memory is used up. Select

[Continue] to print the scanned

pages. The print job cannot be

processed completely. Select

[Cancel] to cancel the job.

The machine may reproduce the

same originals by arranging the

following settings:

•Select [On] of RAM Disk Mode

in System Menu, and then

decrease the RAM Disk Size.

•Select [Printer Priority] of

Optional Memory in System

Menu.

NOTE

Before changing the RAM Disk

Mode or Optional Memory setting,

contact your administrator.

page 8-30

*1 When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time elapses. For details

on Auto Error Clear, refer to the following:

Auto Err. Clear (page 8-27)

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

Non-genuine Toner.

Press [Help].

Is the installed toner container our

own brand?

The manufacturer assumes no

responsibility for damage caused by

a non-genuine toner. We

recommend that you only use

genuine toner containers. When

you want to use the toner container

currently installed, select the [OK]

key and the [Stop] key

simultaneously for 3 seconds or

more.

—

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

Paper jammed above

Cassette 1.

―If a paper jam occurs, the machine

will stop and the location of the jam

will be indicated on the screen.

Leave the machine on and select

[Help] on the screen, and follow the

instruction to remove the jammed

paper.

page 10-38

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

10-23

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

Paper jammed at MP

tray.

―If a paper jam occurs, the machine

will stop and the location of the jam

will be indicated on the screen.

Leave the machine on and follow

the instruction to remove the

jammed paper.

page 10-30

Paper jammed in

Cassette #.

Paper jammed in

document processor.

―A paper jam has occurred in the

document processor. Leave the

machine on and select [Help] on the

screen, and follow the instruction to

remove the jammed paper.

page 10-46

Paper jammed in Rear

cover.

―If a paper jam occurs, the machine

will stop and the location of the jam

will be indicated on the screen.

Leave the machine on and select

[Help] on the screen, and follow the

instruction to remove the jammed

paper.

page 10-42

Polling box limit

exceeded. Job is

canceled.

Is [OK] displayed on the screen? The specified box is full, and no

further storage is available; Job is

canceled. Select the [OK] key. Try

to perform the job again after

printing or deleting data from the

box.

FAX

Operation

Guide

Print overrun. Job is

paused.

— The job was paused because print

processing is taking a long time.

Select [Continue] to restart the job.

To cancel the job, select [Cancel].

—

Printing multiple copies

is not allowed.

— Only one copy is available. Select

[Continue] to continue printing.

Select [Cancel] to cancel the job.

—

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

RAM disk error. Press

[OK].

―An error has occurred on the RAM

disk. Job is canceled. Select the

[OK] key.

The possible error codes and their

descriptions are as follows.

04: Insufficient space on the RAM

disk. If the optional RAM dis is

installed, increase the RAM Disk

Size by changing RAM Disk Mode

in System Menu.

NOTE

The range of RAM disk size can be

increased by selecting [Printer

Priority] in Optional Memory.

page 8-30

Refreshing drum...

Please wait.

―The machine is under the

adjustment to maintain its quality.

Please wait.

―

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

10-24

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

Cloud Print. Are you

sure?

―The message is displayed when

this machine receives the register

request for Google Cloud Print.

Select the [Yes] key to register the

printer as a Google Cloud Print

device. Select the [No] key to

cancel the registration.

―

Removable Memory is

full. Job is canceled.*1

―

Job is canceled. Select [

End

Insufficient free space in the

removable memory. Delete

unneeded files.

―

Remove original from

document processor.

Are there any originals left in the

document processor?

Remove originals from the

document processor.

page 10-46

Replace all originals and

press Start key.

―Remove originals from the

document processor, put them back

in their original order, and place

them again. Select [Cancel] to

cancel the job.

―

Replace MK. ―Replacement of the parts in the

maintenance kit is necessary at

every 100,000 pages of printing and

requires professional servicing.

Contact your Service

Representative.

―

Replace the toner. ―Replace the toner container. page 10-7

Restricted by Job

Accounting.

Cannot print.

— This job is canceled because it is

restricted by Job Accounting. Select

the [OK] key.

—

*1 When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time elapses. For details

on Auto Error Clear, refer to the following:

Auto Err. Clear (page 8-27)

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

Scanner memory is full.

Job is canceled.

— Scanning cannot be performed any

more due to insufficient memory.

The job is canceled. Select the [OK]

key.

page 8-30

Scheduled sending jobs

exceeded.

— The number of jobs has exceeded

the limit set for delayed

transmission. Select the [OK] key.

—

Send Error.*1

*1 When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time elapses. For details

on Auto Error Clear, refer to the following:

Auto Err. Clear (page 8-27)

— An error has occurred during

transmission. The job is canceled.

Select the [OK] key.

Refer to Responding to Send Error

for the error code and corrective

actions.

page 10-27

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

10-25

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

The device cannot be

connected because

allowed connections

would be exceeded.

— Release the connection of an

unused mobile device, or set an

auto break time on the machine to

break connections to mobile

devices.

—

The phone receiver is off

the hook. Hang Up.

— Put down the receiver. FAX

Operation

Guide

The slit glass requires

cleaning.

— Clean the slit glass. page 10-3

The toner container is

improperly installed.

Are the toner container and

developer unit installed correctly?

Correctly install the toner container

and developer unit.

page 10-4

This ID Card is

already registered.

— Your ID card has already been

registered. Change it to another ID

card.

—

This user account is

locked out.

Contact administrator

Job is canceled.

— Contact administrator.

The job is canceled. Select the [OK]

key.

—

Toner is low.

(Replace when empty.)

— It is almost time to replace the toner

container. Obtain a new toner

container.

—

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

Unknown Toner

Installed. PC

Does the installed toner container's

regional specification match the

machine's?

Install the specified toner container. —

10-26

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

USB memory error.

Job is canceled.

Is writing to a removable memory

prohibited?

An error occurred in the removable

memory. The job stopped. Select

the [OK] key.

The possible error codes and their

descriptions are as follows.

01: Connect a removable memory

that can be written to.

—

— An error occurred in the removable

memory. The job stopped. Select

[OK].

The possible error codes and their

descriptions are as follows.

01: The amount of data that can be

saved at once has been exceeded.

Turn the power OFF/ON. If the error

still occurs, the removable memory

is not compatible with the machine.

Use the removable memory

formatted by this machine. If the

removable memory cannot be

formatted, it is damaged. Connect a

compatible removable memory.

—

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

10-27

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

Responding to Send Error

Error

Code Message Corrective Actions Reference

Page

1101 Failed to send the e-mail. Check the host name of the SMTP server on the

Command Center RX.

page 2-51

Failed to send via FTP. Check the host name of FTP. page 5-18

Failed to send via SMB. Check the host name of SMB. page 5-16

1102 Failed to send via SMB. Check the SMB settings.

• Login user name and login password

NOTE

If the sender is a domain user, specify the domain

name.

•Host name

•Path

page 5-16

Failed to send the e-mail. Check the following on the Command Center RX.

• SMTP login user name and login password

• POP3 login user name and login password

• E-mail size limit

page 2-51

Failed to send via FTP. Check the FTP settings.

• Login user name and login password

NOTE

If the sender is a domain user, specify the domain

name.

•Path

• Folder share permissions of the recipient

page 5-18

1103 Failed to send via SMB. Check the SMB settings.

• Login user name and login password

NOTE

If the sender is a domain user, specify the domain

name.

•Path

• Folder share permissions of the recipient

page 5-16

Failed to send via FTP. Check the FTP settings.

•Path

• Folder share permissions of the recipient

page 5-18

1104 Failed to send the e-mail. Check the e-mail address.

NOTE

If the address is rejected by the domain, you cannot

send the email.

page 5-15

10-28

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

1105 Failed to send via SMB. Select [On] of the SMB settings on the Command

Center RX.

page 8-13

Failed to send the e-mail. Select [On] of the SMTP settings on the Command

Center RX.

page 2-51

Failed to send via FTP. Select [On] of the FTP settings on the Command

Center RX.

page 8-12

1106 Failed to send the e-mail. Check the sender address of SMTP on the Command

Center RX.

page 2-51

1131 Failed to send via FTP. Select [On] of the secure protocol settings on the

Command Center RX.

page 8-16

1132 Failed to send the e-mail. Check the following of the SMTP server.

• Is SMTP over SSL available?

• Is the encryption available?

Refer to the

Command

Center RX

User Guide.

Failed to send via FTP. Check the following of the FTP server.

• Is FTPS available?

• Is the encryption available?

—

2101 Failed to send via SMB. Check the network and SMB settings.

• The network cable is connected.

• The hub is not operating properly.

• The server is not operating properly.

• Host name and IP address

• Port number

—

Failed to send via FTP. Check the network and FTP settings.

• The network cable is connected.

• The hub is not operating properly.

• The server is not operating properly.

• Host name and IP address

• Port number

—

Failed to send the e-mail. Check the network and Command Center RX.

• The network cable is connected.

• The hub is not operating properly.

• The server is not operating properly.

• POP3 server name of the POP3 user

• SMTP server name

page 2-51

Error

Code Message Corrective Actions Reference

Page

10-29

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

2102

2103

Failed to send via FTP. Check the network.

• The network cable is connected.

• The hub is not operating properly.

• The server is not operating properly.

—

Check the following of the FTP server.

• Is FTP available?

• The server is not operating properly.

—

Failed to send the e-mail. Check the network.

• The network cable is connected.

• The hub is not operating properly.

• The server is not operating properly.

—

2201

2202

2203

2231

Failed to send the e-mail.

Failed to send via FTP.

Failed to send via SMB.

Check the network.

• The network cable is connected.

• The hub is not operating properly.

• The server is not operating properly.

—

2204 Failed to send the e-mail. Check the e-mail size limit of the SMTP settings on

the Command Center RX.

page 2-51

3101 Failed to send the e-mail. Check the authentication methods of both the sender

and the recipient.

—

Failed to send via FTP. Check the network.

• The network cable is connected.

• The hub is not operating properly.

• The server is not operating properly.

—

3201 Failed to send the e-mail. Check the SMTP user authentication method of the

recipient.

—

0007

4201

4701

5101

5102

5103

5104

7101

7102

7103

720f

— Turn the power switch off and back on. If this error

occurs several times, make a note of the displayed

error code and contact your service representative.

page 2-10

9181 — The scanned original exceeds the acceptable number

of pages of 999. Send the excess pages separately.

—

Error

Code Message Corrective Actions Reference

Page

10-30

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

Clearing Paper Jams

If a paper jam occurs, the message display will display "Paper Jam." and the machine will stop. Refer to these

procedures to remove the jammed paper.

Jam Location Indicators

If a paper jam occurs, the location of the jam will be displayed on the message display as well as the clearing instructions.

1 Shows the location of a paper jam.

2 Displays the Help screen.

NOTE

For details on Help Screen, refer to the following:

Help Screen (page 2-14)

Paper Jam Location Indicator

Paper Jam Location Reference Page

ACassette 1 page 10-31

BCassette 2 page 10-33

CCassette 3 page 10-35

DMultipurpose Tray page 10-37

EInside the Machine page 10-38

FRear Cover page 10-42

GDocument Processor page 10-46

Paper

jammed in

Cassette 1.

Help

JAM****

Paper

jammed in

Cassette 1.

Help

JAM****

10-31

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

Remove any jammed paper in Cassette 1

1Pull Cassette 1 out toward you until it stops.

2Remove any jammed paper.

3Push Cassette 1 back in.

CAUTION

• Do not reuse jammed papers.

• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.

Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.

10-32

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

4Open the front cover.

5Close the front cover.

10-33

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

Remove any jammed paper in Cassette 2

1Pull Cassette 2 out toward you until it stops.

2Remove any jammed paper.

3Push Cassette 2 back in.

CAUTION

• Do not reuse jammed papers.

• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.

Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.

10-34

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

4Open the front cover.

5Close the front cover.

10-35

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

Remove any jammed paper in Cassette 3

1Pull Cassette 3 out toward you until it stops.

2Remove any jammed paper.

3Push Cassette 3 back in.

CAUTION

• Do not reuse jammed papers.

• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.

Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.

10-36

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

4Open the front cover.

5Close the front cover.

10-37

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

Remove any jammed paper in the Multipurpose Tray

1Remove any jammed paper.

2Remove all the paper.

3Reload the paper.

CAUTION

• Do not reuse jammed papers.

• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.

Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.

10-38

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

Remove any jammed paper inside of the Machine

1Pull Cassette 1 out toward you until it stops.

2Remove any jammed paper.

3Push Cassette 1 back in.

CAUTION

• Do not reuse jammed papers.

• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.

Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.

10-39

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

4Open the front cover.

5Lift the developer unit together with the toner container out of

the machine.

6Place the developer unit together with the toner container flat

on a clean, level surface.

IMPORTANT

Do not touch the developer unit or subject the developer unit to shock. Print quality

will be degraded.

IMPORTANT

Do not place the developer unit together with the toner container on end.

10-40

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

7Remove the drum unit from the machine.

8Place the drum unit flat on a clean, level surface.

9Open Feed Cover (C).

IMPORTANT

• The fuser unit inside the machine is hot. Do not touch it, as it may result in burn

injury.

• Do not touch the drum or subject the drum to shock. Print quality will be degraded

if the drum is exposed to direct sunlight or intense light.

IMPORTANT

Do not place the drum unit on end.

10-41

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

10 Remove any jammed paper.

11 Push Feed Cover back in.

12 Return the drum unit to the original position.

13 Return the developer unit together with the toner container to

its position, aligning the guides at both ends with the slots in

the machine.

10-42

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

14 Close the front cover.

Remove any jammed paper in Rear Cover

1Open Rear Cover.

2Remove any jammed paper.

CAUTION

The fixing unit is extremely hot. Take sufficient care when working in this area, as there is a danger of getting

burned.

10-43

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

3Open the fuser cover (D).

4Remove any jammed paper.

5Pull Cassette 1 out toward you until it stops.

6Open Feed Cover.

10-44

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

7Remove any jammed paper.

8Push Feed Cover back in.

9Push Cassette 1 back in.

10 Push Rear Cover.

10-45

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

11 Open the front cover.

12 Close the front cover.

10-46

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

Remove any jammed paper in the Document

Processor

1Remove the originals from the Original Table.

2Open the front cover and remove any jammed paper.

3Remove originals inside the document processor.

CAUTION

• Do not reuse jammed papers.

• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.

Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.

10-47

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

4Push the cover.

11-1

11 Appendix

This chapter explains the following topics:

Optional Equipment .......................................................................................................................................... 11-2

Overview of Optional Equipment ............................................................................................................ 11-2

Optional Applications .............................................................................................................................. 11-6

Starting Application Use .......................................................................................................................... 11-6

Checking Details of Application .............................................................................................................. 11-7

Character Entry Method .................................................................................................................................... 11-8

Using the Keys ........................................................................................................................................ 11-8

Selecting Type of Characters .................................................................................................................. 11-9

Characters That Can be Entered Using the Numeric Keys .................................................................... 11-9

Entering Symbols .................................................................................................................................. 11-10

Entering Characters .............................................................................................................................. 11-10

Entering Using the Character Selection Screen ................................................................................... 11-12

Paper .............................................................................................................................................................. 11-13

Basic Paper Specifications ................................................................................................................... 11-13

Choosing the Appropriate Paper .......................................................................................................... 11-14

Special Paper ........................................................................................................................................ 11-17

Specifications .................................................................................................................................................. 11-21

Machine ................................................................................................................................................ 11-21

Copy Functions ..................................................................................................................................... 11-22

Printer Functions ................................................................................................................................... 11-23

Scanner Functions ................................................................................................................................ 11-23

Document Processor ............................................................................................................................ 11-24

Paper Feeder ........................................................................................................................................ 11-24

Glossary .......................................................................................................................................................... 11-25

11-2

Appendix > Optional Equipment

Optional Equipment

Overview of Optional Equipment

The following optional equipment is available for the machine.

(1) Expansion Memory

Software option

(4) UG-33

(5) SD/SDHC Memory Card

(6) USB Keyboard

(3) Card Authentication

Kit (B)

(2) PF-1100

11-3

Appendix > Optional Equipment

(1) "Expansion Memory"

The machine can perform the more multiple jobs simultaneously by adding more memories. You can increase the

machine's memory up to 1,536 MB by plugging in the optional memory modules.

Precautions for Handling the Memory Modules

To protect electronic parts, discharge static electricity from your body by wearing an antistatic wrist strap, if possible,

when you install the memory modules. If you do not have a wristband, touch a metal object to discharge static electricity

before inserting the memory.

Installing the Memory Modules

1Turn off the machine and disconnect the power cord and interface cable.

2Remove the covers.

3Remove the memory module from its package.

4With the memory connection terminal pointing toward the socket, align the cut-out part with

the socket terminal and insert directly in at an angle.

5Carefully press the inserted memory down and into the machine.

6Reinstall the covers.

11-4

Appendix > Optional Equipment

(2) PF-1100 "Paper Feeder"

The paper feeder can be installed in the printer.

Loading in the Cassette (page 3-4)

(3) Card Authentication Kit(B) "Card Authentication Kit"

User login administration can be performed using ID cards. To do so, it is necessary to register ID card information on

the previously registered local user list. For more information about how to register this information, refer to the

following:

Card Authentication Kit(B) Operation Guide

(4) UG-33 "ThinPrint Option"

This application allows print data to be printed directly without a print driver.

(5) "SD/SDHC Memory Card"

An SD/SDHC memory card is useful for storing fonts, macros, and overlays. The machine is equipped with a slot for an

SDHC memory card with a maximum size of 32 GB, and an SD memory card with a maximum size of 2 GB.

Reading the SD/SDHC Memory Card

Once inserted in the machine's slot, the contents of the SD/SDHC memory card can be read from the operation panel or

automatically when you power on or reset the machine.

Installing and Formatting the SD/SDHC Memory Card

To use an unused SD/SDHC memory card, you must first use the machine to format the SD/SDHC memory card.

Format SD Card (page 8-30)

1Power off the machine and unplug the power cord.

2Remove the cover.

IMPORTANT

Unencrypted data is saved on the SD/SDHC memory card.

Exercise caution when saving sensitive documents.

11-5

Appendix > Optional Equipment

3Insert the SD/SDHC memory card into the SD/SDHC memory card slot.

4Replace the covers.

(6) USB Keyboard "USB Keyboard"

A USB keyboard can be used to enter information into the text fields on the operation panel. A special mount is also

available to install the keyboard on the machine. Please contact your dealer or service representative for information on

keyboards that are compatible with your machine before you purchase one.

11-6

Appendix > Optional Equipment

Optional Applications

The applications listed below are installed on this machine.

Starting Application Use

1Display the screen.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [System/Network] > [OK] key

2[▲] [▼] key > [Op Functions] > [OK] key

2Activate the application.

1Select the desired application, and select the [OK] key.

2[▲] [▼] key > [Official] > [OK] key

To use the application as a trial, select [Trial] without entering the license key.

3Enter the license key > [OK] key

Some applications do not require you to enter a license key. If the license key entry screen does not

appear, go to Step 6.

Application

Card Authentication Kit

ThinPrint Option*1

*1 This can be used on a trial basis for a limited time.

NOTE

• Restrictions such as the number of times the application can be used during the trial period differ depending on the

application.

• If you change the date/time while using the trial version of an application, you will no longer be able to use the

application.

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name

and password, and select [

]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

NOTE

You can view detailed information on the selected application by selecting [Menu] >

[▲][▼] key > [Detail] > [OK] key.

Model Name Login User Name Login Password

ECOSYS M2135dn/ECOSYS M2635dn/

ECOSYS M2635dw

3500 3500

ECOSYS M2040dn/ECOSYS M2540dn/

ECOSYS M2540dw

4000 4000

11-7

Appendix > Optional Equipment

4Select [Yes].

Checking Details of Application

1Display the screen.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [System/Network] > [OK] key

2[▲] [▼] key > [Op Functions] > [OK] key

2Check the details of application.

1Select the desired application, and select [Menu].

2[▲] [▼] key > [Detail] > [OK] key

You can view detailed information on the selected application. Select the [►] key to view the next

screen. Select the [◄] key to return to the previous screen.

The table below lists the item you can view.

Extend the trial period.

[◄] [►] key > [Date of Trial] > [Extend] > [Yes]

The trial period is extended.

NOTE

If you started the Thin Print option and entered the license key, turn the power OFF/ON.

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name

and password, and select [

]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

Item

Function Name

License On

Trial Counts

Date of Trial

Status

Model Name Login User Name Login Password

ECOSYS M2135dn/ECOSYS M2635dn/

ECOSYS M2635dw

3500 3500

ECOSYS M2040dn/ECOSYS M2540dn/

ECOSYS M2540dw

4000 4000

11-8

Appendix > Character Entry Method

Character Entry Method

This section explains how to enter characters.

Using the Keys

Use the following keys to enter characters.

No. Display/Key Description

1Message Display Displays entered characters.

2Cursor Characters are entered at the position of the cursor.

3Right Select key Select to select the type of characters you want to enter. (When [Text] is displayed)

4[OK] key Select to finalize entry and return to the screen before the entry. To enter a symbol, select to confirm

the selected symbol.

5[Clear] key Select to delete characters.

6Numeric keys Select to enter characters and symbols.

7Arrow keys Select to select the entry position, or select a character from the character list.

Account Name:

Text

ABC

516

11-9

Appendix > Character Entry Method

Selecting Type of Characters

To enter characters, the following three types are available:

In a character entry screen, select [Text] to select the type of characters you want to enter.

Each time you select [Text], the character type switches as follows: [ABC], [123], [Symbols], [ABC] ...

Characters That Can be Entered Using the Numeric

Keys

The following table lists the characters that can be entered using the numeric keys.

Types Description

ABC To enter alphabets.

123 To enter numerals.

Symbols To enter symbols.

Keys Characters (Each press of a key changes the character in the order from left to right.)

. @ - _ / : ~ 1 (Repeats from the first character on the left)

1 (During number entry)

a b c A B C 2 (Repeats from the first character on the left)

2 (During number entry)

d e f D E F 3 (Repeats from the first character on the left)

3 (During number entry)

g h i G H I 4 (Repeats from the first character on the left)

4 (During number entry)

j k l J K L 5 (Repeats from the first character on the left)

5 (During number entry)

m n o M N O 6 (Repeats from the first character on the left)

6 (During number entry)

p q r s P Q R S 7 (Repeats from the first character on the left)

7 (During number entry)

t u v T U V 8 (Repeats from the first character on the left)

8 (During number entry)

Symbols:

Text

!"#$%&'()*+,-./:;<=>

?@[\]^_`{|}~^

Account Name:

Text

123

Account Name:

Text

ABC

11-10

Appendix > Character Entry Method

Entering Symbols

Symbols can be entered.

1Select the [#] key. Displays the symbol list.

2Select the [▲], [▼], [►] or [◄] key to move the cursor and select the symbol to be entered.

3Select the [OK] key. The selected symbol is entered.

Entering Characters

Follow the steps shown below to enter "R&D" for example.

1Select the [7] key three times. [r] is entered.

w x y z W X Y Z 9 (Repeats from the first character on the left)

9 (During number entry)

. , - _ ' ! ? (space) 0 (Repeats from the first character on the left)

0 (During number entry)

Select to change the character in the cursor position between upper case and lower case.

"*" or "." (During number entry)

! " # $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . / : ; Displays the

symbol list. For

details, refer to the

following:

Entering

Symbols (page

11-10)

<=>?@[ \ ] ^_ ` { | } ~

# (During number entry)

* Depending on the functions, there are symbols that cannot be entered.

Keys Characters (Each press of a key changes the character in the order from left to right.)

Symbols:

Text

!"#$%&'()*+,-./:;<=>

?@[\]^_`{|}~^

Symbols:

Text

!"#$%&'()*+,-./:;<=>

?@[\]^_`{|}~^

Account Name:

Text

ABC

Account Name:

Text

ABC

11-11

Appendix > Character Entry Method

2Select the [*/.] key. [r] changes to [R].

3Select the [►] key. The cursor moves to the right.

4Select the [#] key. Displays the symbol list.

5Select the [▲] or [▼] key to move the cursor and select [&].

6Select the [OK] key. [&] is entered.

7Select the [3] key four times. [D] is entered.

8Select the [►] key.

Account Name:

Text

ABC

Account Name:

Text

ABC

Symbols:

Text

!"#$%&'()*+,-./:;<=>

?@[\]^_`{|}~^

Symbols:

Text

!"#$%&'()*+,-./:;<=>

?@[\]^_`{|}~^

Account Name:

Text

ABC

Account Name:

Text

ABC

R&D

Account Name:

Text

ABC

R&D

11-12

Appendix > Character Entry Method

Entering Using the Character Selection Screen

If "Login Operation" is [Select Character], then the screen is displayed to enter details by selecting from the characters

on the message display. For details on changing the login operation method, refer to the following:

Function Defaults (page 8-28)

1Select the [▲], [▼], [►] or [◄] key to move the cursor and select the character to be

entered.

2Select the [OK] key. The selected character is entered.

You can go back one character by selecting the [Clear] key.

3When the entry is complete, select [Complete].

Complete

abcdefghijklmnopqrst

uvwxyzABCDEFGHIJKLMNO

Complete

abcdefghijklmnopqrst

uvwxyzABCDEFGHIJKLMNO

Complete

uvwxyzABCDEFGHIJKLMNO

Admin

abcdefghijklmnopqrst

11-13

Appendix > Paper

Paper

This section explains the paper sizes and types that can be used in the paper source.

For details on the sizes, types, and number of sheets of paper that can be loaded in each paper tray, refer to the

following:

Specifications (page 11-21)

Basic Paper Specifications

This machine is designed to print on standard copy paper as used in regular ('dry') copiers and page printers such as

laser printers. It also supports a variety of other types of paper that conform to the specifications given in this appendix.

Be careful when choosing paper. Paper unsuitable for the machine may cause jams or may be wrinkled.

Supported Paper

Use standard copy paper for regular copiers or laser printers. The printing quality will be affected by the quality of paper.

Poor quality paper may result in unsatisfactory output.

Basic Paper Specifications that can be Used with This Machine

The following table lists the specifications of paper that is supported with this machine. Refer to the subsequent sections

for further details.

We are not responsible for the problems occurred from the use of paper that does not conform to our specifications.

Criteria Specifications

Weight Cassettes: 60 to 163 g/m2

Multipurpose tray: 60 to 220 g/m2, 209 g/m2 (Cardstock)

Dimensional accuracy ±0.7 mm

Squareness of corners 90° ±0.2°

Moisture content 4 to 6%

Pulp content 80% or more

NOTE

Some recycled paper does not meet requirements for use with this machine as listed in the Basic Paper Specifications

shown below, such as moisture or pulp content. For this reason, we recommend purchasing a small amount of

recycled paper as a sample for testing prior to use. Choose recycled paper that gives the best printing results and

contains low levels of paper dust.

11-14

Appendix > Paper

Choosing the Appropriate Paper

This section describes guidelines for choosing paper.

Condition

Avoid using paper with bent corners or that is curled, dirty, or torn. Do not use paper that has a rough surface or paper

fiber lint, or that is especially delicate. Use of paper in any of these conditions will not only deliver poor copies but may

also cause jams and shorten the useful life of the machine. Choose paper with a smooth and even surface; however,

avoid coated paper or paper with a treated surface as it may damage the drum or fusing unit.

Ingredients

Do not use paper such as paper that has been coated or surface-treated or paper that contains plastic or carbon. Those

types of paper may produce harmful fumes from the heat of printing and may damage the drum.

Be sure to use the standard paper that contains at least 80% pulp, i.e., not more than 20% of the total paper content

consists of cotton or other fibers.

Smoothness

The paper surface should be smooth, but it must be uncoated. With paper that is too smooth and slippery, several

sheets may accidentally be supplied at once, causing jams.

Basis Weight

In countries that use the metric system, basis weight is the weight in grams of one sheet of paper one square meter in

area. In the United States, basis weight is the weight in pounds of one ream (500 sheets) of paper cut to the standard

size (or trade size) for a specific grade of paper. Paper that is too heavy or too light may be supplied incorrectly or cause

paper jams, which may cause excessive wear of the machine. Mixed paper weight (i.e., thickness) may cause several

sheets to be supplied at once accidentally and may also cause blurring or other printing problems if the toner fails to

adhere correctly.

Moisture Content

Paper moisture content is the ratio of moisture to dryness expressed as a percentage. Moisture affects how the paper is

supplied, the electrostatic chargeability of the paper, and how the toner adheres.

Paper moisture content varies depending on the relative humidity in the room. High relative humidity causes paper to

become damp, making the edges expand so it appears wavy. Low relative humidity causes paper to lose moisture,

making the edges tighten and weakening print contrast.

Wavy or tight edges may cause the paper to slip when it is supplied. Try to keep the moisture content between 4 to 6%.

To maintain the right level of moisture content, bear in mind the following considerations.

• Store paper in a cool, well-ventilated place.

• Store paper flat and unopened in the package. Once the package is opened, reseal it if the paper is not to be used for

a while.

• Store paper sealed in the original package and box. Put a pallet under the carton to keep it raised above the floor.

Especially during rainy seasons keep the paper a sufficient distance away from wooden or concrete floors.

• Before using paper that has been stored, keep it at the proper moisture level for at least 48 hours.

• Do not store paper where it is exposed to heat, sunlight, or dampness.

11-15

Appendix > Paper

Other Paper Specifications

Porosity: The density of the paper fibers.

Stiffness: Paper must be stiff enough or it may buckle in the machine, causing jams.

Curl: Most paper naturally tends to curl after the package is opened. When paper passes through the fixing unit, it curls

upward slightly. To deliver flat printouts, load the paper so that the curl faces towards the bottom of the paper tray.

Static electricity: During printing, paper is electrostatically charged so that the toner adheres. Choose paper that can be

discharged quickly so that copies do not cling together.

Whiteness: Paper whiteness affects print contrast. Use whiter paper for sharper, brighter copies.

Quality: Machine problems may occur if sheet sizes are not uniform or if corners are not square, edges are rough,

sheets are uncut, or edges or corners are crushed. In order to prevent these problems, be especially careful when you

cut the paper yourself.

Packaging: Choose paper that is properly packaged and stacked in boxes. Ideally, the packaging itself should have

been treated with a coating to inhibit moisture.

Specially treated paper: We do not recommend printing onto the following types of paper, even if it conforms to the

basic specifications. When you use these kinds of paper, purchase a small amount first as a sample to test.

• Glossy paper

• Watermarked paper

• Paper with an uneven surface

• Perforated paper

11-16

Appendix > Paper

Paper Sizes that can be Used with This Machine

Paper of the following sizes is supported by the machine.

Measurements in the table take into account a ±0.7 mm dimensional accuracy for length and width. Corner angles must

be 90° ± 0.2°.

Multipurpose Tray

• B6 (182 × 128 mm)

• Hagaki (Cardstock) (100 × 148 mm)

• Oufuku hagaki (Return postcard) (148 × 200 mm)

• Envelope Monarch (3-7/8 × 7-1/2")

• Envelope #10 (4-1/8 × 9-1/2")

• Envelope DL (110 × 220 mm)

• Envelope C5 (162 × 229 mm)

• Envelope #9 (3-7/8 × 8-7/8")

• Envelope #6 3/4 (3-5/8 × 6-1/2")

• Youkei 4 (105 × 235 mm)

• Youkei 2 (114 × 162 mm)

• Custom (70 × 148 to 216 × 356 mm)

Cassettes or Multipurpose Tray

• Executive (7-1/4 × 10-1/2")

•Letter

• Legal

• A4 (297 × 210 mm)

• B5 (257 × 182 mm)

• A5-R (148 × 210 mm)

• A5 (210 × 148 mm)

• A6 (148 × 105 mm)

• B5(ISO) (176 × 250 mm)

• Oficio II

• 216 × 340 mm

• 16K (273 × 197 mm)

• Statement

• Folio (210 × 330 mm)

• Custom (Cassette: 105 × 148 to 216 × 356 mm, Multipurpose Tray: 70 × 148 to 216 × 356 mm)

11-17

Appendix > Paper

Special Paper

This section describes printing onto special paper and print media.

Special Paper that can be Used with This Machine

• Transparencies

• Preprinted paper

• Bond paper

• Recycled paper

• Vellum

• Thin paper

• Letterhead

• Colored paper

• Prepunched paper

• Envelopes

• Hagaki (Cardstock)

• Thick paper

• Labels

• High-quality paper

When using these paper and media, choose those that are designed specifically for copiers or page printers (such as

laser printers). Use the multipurpose tray for transparencies, vellum, thin paper, envelopes, cardstocks and label paper.

Choosing Special Paper

Although special paper that meets the following requirements can be used with the machine, print quality will vary

considerably due to differences in the construction and quality of special paper. Thus, special paper is more likely than

regular paper to cause printing problems. Before purchasing special paper in volume, try testing a sample to ensure the

print quality is satisfactory. General precautions when printing onto special paper are given below. Note that we are not

responsible for any harm to the user or damage to the machine caused by moisture or specifications of special paper.

Select a cassette or multipurpose tray for special paper.

Transparencies

Transparencies must be able to withstand the heat of printing. Transparencies must meet the following conditions.

To avoid problems, use the multipurpose tray for transparencies and load transparencies with the long side facing the

machine.

If transparencies jam frequently at output, try pulling the leading edge of sheets gently as they are ejected.

Heat resistance Must withstand at least 190°C

Thickness 0.100 to 0.110 mm

Material Polyester

Dimensional accuracy ±0.7 mm

Squareness of corners 90° ±0.2°

11-18

Appendix > Paper

Label

Be sure to feed labels from the multipurpose tray.

For selecting labels, use extreme care so that the adhesive may not come in direct contact with any part of the machine

and that the labels are not easily peeled from the carrier sheet. Adhesives that stick to the drum or rollers and peeled

labels remaining in the machine may cause a failure.

When printing onto labels, you must be liable for the print quality and possible trouble.

Labels consist of three layers as shown in the illustration. The adhesive layer contains materials that are easily affected

by the force applied in the machine. The carrier sheet bears the top sheet until the label is used. This composition of

labels may cause more problems.

The label surface must be covered completely with the top sheet. Gaps between labels may cause peeling of labels,

resulting in a serious failure.

Some label paper has large margins on the top sheet. When using such paper, do not peel these margins from the

carrier sheet before completing output.

Use label paper that conforms to the following specifications.

Top sheet weight 44 to 74 g/m²

Basis weight

(overall paper weight)

104 to 151 g/m²

Top sheet thickness 0.086 to 0.107 mm

Overall paper thickness 0.115 to 0.145 mm

Moisture content 4 to 6 % (composite)

Top sheet

Adhesive layer

Carrier sheet

Not allowedAllowed

Top sheet

Carrier sheet

11-19

Appendix > Paper

Hagaki (Cardstock)

Before loading Hagaki (Cardstock) into the multipurpose tray, fan them and align the edges. If the Hagaki (Cardstock)

paper is curled, straighten it before loading. Printing onto curled Hagaki (Cardstock) may cause jams.

Use unfolded Oufuku hagaki (Return postcard) (available at post offices). Some Hagaki (Cardstock) may still have rough

edges developed by a paper cutter on the back side. Remove any such rough edges by placing the Hagaki (Cardstock)

on a flat surface and rubbing the edges gently a few times with a ruler.

Envelopes

Envelopes should be fed from the multipurpose tray.

Due to the structure of envelopes, printing evenly over the entire surface may not be possible in some cases. Thin

envelopes in particular may be wrinkled by the machine in some cases as they pass through. Before purchasing

envelopes in volume, try testing a sample to ensure the print quality.

Storing envelopes for a long period may cause them to become wrinkled. Thus, keep the package sealed until you are

ready to use them.

Keep the following points in mind.

• Do not use envelopes with exposed adhesive. In addition, do not use the type of envelope in which the adhesive is

exposed after the top layer is peeled off. Serious damage may be caused if the paper covering the adhesive comes

off in the machine.

• Do not use envelopes with certain special features. For example, do not use envelopes with a grommet for winding a

string to close the flap or envelopes with an open or film-covered window.

• If paper jams occur, load fewer envelopes at once.

Thick Paper

Before loading thick paper, fan it and align the edges. Some thick paper may still have rough edges developed by a

paper cutter on the back side. Remove any such rough edges just as with Hagaki (Cardstock) by placing the paper on a

flat surface and rubbing the edges gently a few times with a ruler. Printing onto paper with rough edges may cause jams.

Colored Paper

Colored paper must conform to the specifications.

Basic Paper Specifications (page 11-13)

In addition, the pigments in the paper must be able to withstand the heat of printing (up to 200°C or 392°F).

NOTE

If the paper is not supplied correctly even after it is smoothed, load the paper with the leading edge raised a few

millimeters.

Burrs

11-20

Appendix > Paper

Preprinted Paper

Preprinted paper must conform to the specifications.

Basic Paper Specifications (page 11-13)

The colored ink must be able to withstand the heat of printing. It must be resistant to silicone oil as well. Do not use

paper with a treated surface such as glossy paper used for calendars.

Recycled Paper

Recycled paper must conform to the specifications; however, its whiteness may be considered separately.

Basic Paper Specifications (page 11-13)

NOTE

Before purchasing recycled paper in volume, try testing a sample to ensure satisfactory print quality.

11-21

Appendix > Specifications

Specifications

Machine

IMPORTANT

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

NOTE

For more information on using the FAX, refer to the following:

FAX Operation Guide

Item Description

Type Desktop

Printing Method Electrophotography by semiconductor laser

Paper Weight Cassette 60 to 163 g/m2

Multipurpose

Tray

60 to 220 g/m2, 209 g/m2 (Cardstock)

Paper Type Cassette

Plain, Rough,

Vellum,

Recycled, Preprinted, Bond, Color, Prepunched,

Letterhead, Thick, High

Quality,Custom 1 to 8

(Duplex: Same as Simplex)

Multipurpose

Tray

Plain, Transparency (OHP film), Rough, Labels, Recycled, Vellum,

Preprinted, Bond, Cardstock, Color, Prepunched, Letterhead,

Envelope, Thick, High Quality, Custom 1 to 8

Paper Size Cassette A4, A5-R, A5, A6, B5, Letter, Legal, Statement, Executive,Oficio II,

Folio, 216 × 340 mm, 16K, B5(ISO),

Custom (105 × 148 mm to 216 × 356 mm)

Multipurpose

Tray

A4, A5-R, A5, A6, B5, B6, Folio, 216 × 340 mm, Letter, Legal,

Statement, Executive, Oficio II, 16K, B5(ISO), Envelope #10,

Envelope #9, Envelope #6 3/4, Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL,

Envelope C5, Hagaki (Cardstock), Oufuku Hagaki (Return postcard),

Youkei 4, Youkei 2, Custom (70 × 148 mm to 216 × 356 mm)

Printable area Print margin for top, bottom and both sides is 4.2 mm.

Warm-up Time

23°C/73.4°F, 60 %

Power on 17 seconds or less

Sleep 10 seconds or less

Paper Capacity Cassette 250 sheets (80 g/m2)*1

*1 Up to upper limit height line in the cassette.

Multipurpose

Tray

100 sheets (A4/Letter or smaller) (80 g/m2)

Output Tray

Capacity

Inner tray 150 sheets (80 g/m2)

Image Write System Semiconductor laser and electrophotography

Memory 512 MB

Interface USB Interface Connector: 1 (Hi-Speed USB)

Network interface: 1 (10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX/1000 BASE-T)

USB Port: 1 (Hi-Speed USB)

Wireless LAN support*2

Fax: 1*3

*2 Only ECOSYS M2635dw/ECOSYS M2540dw

*3 Only ECOSYS M2635dn/ECOSYS M2635dw/ECOSYS M2540dn/ECOSYS M2540dw

11-22

Appendix > Specifications

Copy Functions

Item Description

Operating

Environment

Temperature 10 to 32.5°C/50 to 90.5°F

Humidity 10 to 80 %

Altitude 3,500 m/11,482 ft maximum

Brightness 1,500 lux maximum

Dimension (W × D × H) Metric Model:

16.42" × 16.23" × 17.21"

417 × 412 × 437 mm

Inch Model:

18.71 × 16.23" × 17.21"

475 × 412 × 437 mm

Weight (without toner container) Approx. 41.9 lb/Approx. 19 kg

Space Required (W × D)

(Using multipurpose tray)

14.77" × 28.47"

375 × 723 mm

Power Source 120 V Specification Model: 120 V 60 Hz 8.7 A

230 V Specification Model: 220 to 240 V 50/60 Hz 4.4 A

The power consumption of the

product in networked standby (If

all network ports are connected.)

The information is available at the website below.

http://www.kyoceradocumentsolutions.eu/index/environment/

green_products/low_power_consumption.html

Options Optional Equipment (page 11-2)

Item Description

Copy Speed ECOSYS

M2135dn/

ECOSYS

M2635dn/

ECOSYS

M2635dw

A4/A5 35 sheets/min

Letter 37 sheets/min

Legal 30 sheets/min

B5 24 sheets/min

A5-R 17 sheets/min

A6 17 sheets/min

16K 20 sheets/min

ECOSYS

M2040dn/

ECOSYS

M2540dn/

ECOSYS

M2540dw

A4/A5 40 sheets/min

Letter 42 sheets/min

Legal 34 sheets/min

B5 27 sheets/min

A5-R 19 sheets/min

A6 19 sheets/min

16K 22 sheets/min

First Copy Time (A4, place on the

platen, feed from Cassette)

ECOSYS M2135dn/ECOSYS M2635dn/ECOSYS M2635dw:

6.9 seconds or less

ECOSYS M2040dn/ECOSYS M2540dn/ECOSYS M2540dw:

6.4 seconds or less

Zoom Level Manual mode: 25 to 400%, 1% increments

Auto mode: Preset Zoom

Continuous Copying 1 to 999 sheets

Resolution 600 × 600 dpi

Supported Original Types Sheet, Book, 3-dimensional objects (maximum original size: Legal/

Folio)

Original Feed System Fixed

11-23

Appendix > Specifications

Printer Functions

Scanner Functions

Item Description

Printing Speed Same as Copying Speed.

First Print Time (A4, feed from

Cassette)

ECOSYS M2135dn/ECOSYS M2635dn/ECOSYS M2635dw:

6.8 seconds or less

ECOSYS M2040dn/ECOSYS M2540dn/ECOSYS M2540dw:

6.4 seconds or less

Resolution

300dpi x 300 dpi, 600 dpi x 600 dpi,

1200 dpi equivalent x 1200 dpi equivalent, 1800 dpi equivalent x 600 dpi

Operating System

Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, Windows Vista, Windows 7,

Windows 8, Windows 8.1, Windows 10, Windows Server 2008/R2,

Windows Server 2012/R2, Mac OS 10.5 or later

Interface USB Interface Connector: 1 (Hi-Speed USB)

Network interface: 1 (10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX/1000 BASE-T)

Wireless LAN support*1

*1 Only ECOSYS M2635dw/ECOSYS M2540dw

Page Description Language PRESCRIBE

Emulations PCL6 (PCL-XL, PCL5c), KPDL3 (PostScript3 compatible), PDF,

XPS, OpenXPS

Item Description

Resolution 300 × 300 dpi, 200 × 200 dpi, 200 × 100 dpi, 600 × 600 dpi,

400 × 400 dpi, 200 × 400 dpi

File Format TIFF (MMR/JPEG compression), JPEG, PDF (MMR/JPEG

compression), XPS, High compressive PDF, PDF/A-1

Scanning Speed*1

*1 When using the document processor (except TWAIN and WIA scanning)

1-sided B/W 40 Images/min

Color 23 Images/min

2-sided*2 B/W 32 Images/min

Color 16 Images/min

(A4 landscape, 300 × 300 dpi, Image quality: Text/Photo original)

*2 Only ECOSYS M2040dn/ECOSYS M2540dn/ECOSYS M2540dw

Interface Ethernet (10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX/1000 BASE-T), USB,

Wireless LAN support*3

*3 Only ECOSYS M2635dw/ECOSYS M2540dw

Transmission System SMBv3, SMTP, FTP, FTP over SSL, USB, TWAIN*4, WIA*5, WSD

*4 Available Operating System: Windows XP/Windows Vista/Windows Server 2003/Windows Server 2008/

Windows Server 2008 R2/Windows 7/Windows 8/Windows 8.1/Windows 10/Windows Server 2012/

Windows Server 2012 R2

*5 Available Operating System: Windows Vista/Windows Server 2008/Windows Server 2008 R2/Windows 7/

Windows 8/Windows 8.1/Windows Server 2012/Windows Server 2012 R2/Windows 10

11-24

Appendix > Specifications

Document Processor

Paper Feeder

Item Description

Supported Original Types Sheet originals*1

*1 Simultaneous duplex scanning is only available on the ECOSYS M2040dn/ECOSYS M2540dn/

ECOSYS M2540dw.

Paper Size Maximum: Folio/Legal

Minimum: Statement/A6

Paper Weight 50 to 160 g/m2

Loading Capacity 50 sheets (50 to 80 g/m²) maximum*2

Thick (120 g/m2): 25 sheets

*2 Up to upper limit height line in the document processor

Item Description

Paper Supply Method Friction roller feeder

( No. Sheets: 250, 80 g/m2, 1 cassette)

Paper Size

A4, A5-R, A5, B5, A6, Letter, Legal, Folio, 216 × 340 mm, Statement,

Executive, Oficio II, 16K, B5 (ISO), Custom (105 × 148 to 216 × 356 mm)

Supported Paper Paper weight: 60 to 163 g/m²

Media types: Plain, Recycled, Special Paper

Dimensions

(W) × (D) × (H)

14.77" × 15.48" × 3.94"

375 × 393 × 100 mm

Weight Approx. 6.4 lb/Approx. 2.9 kg

NOTE

Consult your dealer or service representative for recommended paper types.

11-25

Appendix > Glossary

Glossary

Accessibility

The machine is designed featuring good accessibility even for the elderly and those who are physically challenged or

visually impaired.

Apple Talk

AppleTalk offers file sharing and printer sharing and it also enables you to utilize application software that is on another

computer on the same AppleTalk network.

Auto Form Feed Timeout

During data transmission, the machine may sometimes have to wait until receiving the next data. This is the auto form

feed timeout. When the preset timeout passes, the machine automatically prints output. However, no output is

performed if the last page has no data to be printed.

Auto-IP

Auto-IP is a module that enables dynamic IPv4 addresses to be assigned to a device on startup. However, DHCP

requires a DHCP server. Auto-IP is a server-less method of choosing an IP address. IP addresses between 169.254.0.0

to 169.254.255.255 are reserved for Auto-IP and assigned automatically.

Auto Paper Selection

A function to automatically select paper in the same size as originals when printing.

Auto Sleep

A mode designed for electrical power saving, activated when the machine is left unused or there is no data transfer for a

specific period. In Sleep mode, power consumption is kept to a minimum.

Bonjour

Bonjour, also known as zero-configuration networking, is a service that automatically detects computers, devices and

services on an IP network. Bonjour, because an industry-standard IP protocol is used, allows devices to automatically

recognize each other without an IP address being specified or DNS server being set. Bonjour also sends and receives

network packets by UDP port 5353. If a firewall is enabled, the user must check that UDP port 5353 is left open so that

Bonjour will run correctly. Some firewalls are set up so as to reject only certain Bonjour packets. If Bonjour does not run

stably, check the firewall settings and ensure that Bonjour is registered on the exceptions list and that Bonjour packets

are accepted. If you install Bonjour on Windows XP Service Pack 2 or later, the Windows firewall will be set up correctly

for Bonjour.

Default Gateway

This indicates the device, such as a computer or router, that serves as the entrance/exit (gateway) for accessing

computers outside the network that you are on. When no specific gateway is designated for a destination IP address,

data is sent to the host designated as the Default Gateway.

DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol)

Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) that automatically resolves IP addresses, subnet masks, and gateway

addresses on a TCP/IP network. DHCP minimizes the load of network management employing a large number of client

computers because it relieves individual clients including printers from the IP address being assigned.

11-26

Appendix > Glossary

DHCP (IPv6)

DHCP (IPv6) is the next-generation of the Internet's Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol and supports IPv6. It extends

the BOOTP startup protocol that defines the protocols used for transferring configuration information to hosts on the

network. DHCP (IPv6) permits the DHCP server to use its expanded functionality to send configuration parameters to an

IPv6 node. Because the network addresses that can be used are allocated automatically, the IPv6 node management

workload is reduced in systems where the administrator has to exercise close control over IP address allocation.

dpi (dots per inch)

A unit for resolution, representing the number of dots printed per inch (25.4 mm).

EcoPrint Mode

A printing mode that helps save toner. Copies made in this mode are thus lighter than normal.

Emulation

The function to interpret and execute other printers' page description languages. The machine emulates operation of

PCL6, KPDL3 (PostScript 3 compatible).

Enhanced WSD

Proprietary web services.

FTP (File Transfer Protocol)

A protocol to transfer files on the TCP/IP network, whether the Internet or an intranet. Along with HTTP and SMTP/POP,

FTP is now frequently used on the Internet.

Grayscale

A computer color expression. Displayed images of this sort are typically composed of shades of gray, varying from black

at the weakest intensity to white at the strongest, without any other colors. Gray levels are displayed in numerical levels:

that is, white and black only for 1 bit; 256 gray levels (including white and black) for 8 bits; and 65,536 gray levels for 16

bits.

Help

A [Help] key is provided on this machine's operation panel. If you are unsure of how to operate the machine, would like

more information on its functions or are having problems getting the machine to work properly, press the [Help] key to

view a detailed explanation on the message display.

IP Address

An Internet protocol address is a unique number that represents a specific computer or related device on the network.

The format of an IP address is four sets of numbers separated by dots, e.g. 192.168.110.171. Each number should be

between 0 and 255.

IPP

IPP (Internet Printing Protocol) is a standard that uses TCP/IP networks such as the Internet to enable print jobs to be

sent between remote computers and printers. IPP is an extension of the HTTP protocol used to view websites and

enables printing to be carried out via routers on printers in remote locations. It also supports the HTTP authentication

mechanisms along with SSL server and client authentication as well as encryption.

11-27

Appendix > Glossary

Job Box

The Job Box function stores print data on the printer and allows users to print single or multiple copies of the stored data

later using the printer's operation panel.

KPDL (Kyocera Page Description Language)

Kyocera's PostScript page description language compatible with Adobe PostScript Level 3.

Multipurpose (MP) Tray

The paper supply tray on the front side of the machine. Use this tray instead of the cassettes when printing onto

envelopes, Hagaki (Cardstock), transparencies, or labels.

NetBEUI (NetBIOS Extended User Interface)

An interface, developed by IBM in 1985, as an update from NetBIOS. It enables more advanced functions on smaller

networks than other protocols such as TCP/IP, etc. It is not suitable for larger networks due to lack of routing capabilities

to choose the most appropriate routes. NetBEUI has been adopted by IBM for its OS/2 and Microsoft for its Windows as

a standard protocol for file sharing and printing services.

Outline font

With outline fonts, character outlines are represented with numerical expressions and fonts can be enlarged or reduced

in different ways by changing the numeric values of those expressions. Printing remains clear even if you enlarge fonts,

since the characters are defined with outlines represented with numerical expressions. You can specify the font size in

steps of 0.25 points up to 999.75 points.

PDF/A

This is "ISO 19005-1. Document management - Electronic document file format for long-term preservation - Part 1: Use

of PDF (PDF/A)", and is a file format based on PDF 1.4. It has been standardized as ISO 19005-1, and is a

specialization of PDF, which has been mainly used for printing, for long-term storage. A new part, ISO 19005-2 (PDF/A-

2), is currently being prepared.

POP3 (Post Office Protocol 3)

A standard protocol to receive E-mail from the server in which the mail is stored on the Internet or an intranet.

PostScript

A page description language developed by Adobe Systems. It enables flexible font functions and highly-functional

graphics, allowing higher quality printing. The first version called Level 1 was launched in 1985, followed by Level 2 that

enabled color printing and two-byte languages (e.g. Japanese) in 1990. In 1996, Level 3 was released as an update for

the Internet access and PDF format as well as gradual improvements in implementation technologies.

PPM (prints per minute)

This indicates the number of A4 size printouts made in one minute.

Printer Driver

The software to enable you to print data created on any application software. The printer driver for the machine is

contained in the DVD enclosed in the package. Install the printer driver on the computer connected to the machine.

RA(Stateless)

The IPv6 router communicates (transmits) information such as the global address prefix using ICMPv6. This information

is the Router Advertisement (RA).

11-28

Appendix > Glossary

ICMPv6 stands for Internet Control Message Protocol, and is a IPv6 standard defined in the RFC 2463 "Internet Control

Message Protocol (ICMPv6) for the Internet Protocol Version 6 (IPv6) Specification".

RAM Disk

Using part of the printer's memory as a virtual disk, you can set any amount of memory from overall printer memory as a

RAM disk in order to use features such as electronic sorting (shortening print time).

Send as E-mail

A function to send the image data stored in the machine as an E-mail attachment. E-mail addresses can be selected

from the list or entered at each time.

SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol)

A protocol for E-mail transmission over the Internet or an intranet. It is used for transferring mail between mail servers as

well as for sending mail from clients to their servers.

Status Page

The page lists machine conditions, such as the memory capacity, total number of prints and scans, and paper source

settings.

Subnet Mask

The subnet mask is a way of augmenting the network address section of an IP address.

A subnet mask represents all network address sections as 1 and all host address sections as 0. The number of bits in

the prefix indicates the length of the network address. The term "prefix" refers to something added to the beginning and,

in this context, indicates the first section of the IP address. When an IP address is written, the length of the network

address is indicated by the prefix length after a forward slash (/). For example, "24" in the address "133.210.2.0/24". In

this way, "133.210.2.0/24" denotes the IP address "133.210.2.0" with a 24-bit prefix (network section). This new network

address section (originally part of the host address) made possible by the subnet mask is referred to as the subnet

address. When you enter the subnet mask, be sure to set the "DHCP" setting to "Off".

TCP/IP (Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol)

TCP/IP is a suite of protocols designed to define the way computers and other devices communicate with each other

over a network.

TCP/IP (IPv6)

TCP/IP (IPv6) is based on the current Internet protocol, TCP/IP (IPv4). IPv6 is the next-generation Internet protocol and

expands the available address space, which resolves the problem of the lack of addresses under IPv4, while also

introducing other improvements such as additional security functionality and the capacity to prioritize data transmission.

TWAIN (Technology Without An Interesting Name)

A technical specification for connecting scanners, digital cameras, and other image equipment to computers. The

TWAIN compatible devices enable you to process image data on any relevant application software. TWAIN is adopted

on a large amount of graphic software (e.g. Adobe Photoshop) and OCR software.

USB (Universal Serial Bus) 2.0

A USB interface standard for Hi-Speed USB 2.0. The maximum transfer rate is 480 Mbps. This machine is equipped with

USB 2.0 for high-speed data transfer.

11-29

Appendix > Glossary

WIA (Windows Imaging Acquisition)

A function to import images supported after Windows Me/XP from digital cameras and other peripheral devices. This

function replaces what TWAIN used to do. The feature is provided as a part of Windows functions and improves ease of

operation, so that you import images directly to My Computer without using any application.

WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup)

WPS is a network security standard created by Wi-Fi Alliance, to make it easy to connect with the wireless devices and

set up the Wi-Fi Protected Access. The WPS-supported services can connect to the wireless access points by pushing

a button or entering passphrases.

Index-1

Index

Accessibility 11-25

Address Book 3-18

Adding 3-18

Contact 3-18

Editing and Deleting 3-23

Group 3-21

Adjustment/Maintenance 8-38

Print Density 8-38

AirPrint 4-9

Anti-theft Lock Slot 2-3

Apache License (Version 2.0) 1-14

Apple Talk 11-25

Auto Error Clear 8-27

Auto Form Feed Timeout 11-25

Auto Panel Reset 8-26

Auto Paper Selection 11-25

Auto Sleep 2-27, 11-25

AutoColorCorrect 8-38

Auto-IP 11-25

Settings 8-10

Automatic 2-Sided Print Function 1-17

Background Density Adjustment 6-21, 8-38

Default 8-28

Bonjour 11-25

Settings 8-12

Border Line 6-14

Default 8-29

Cables 2-7

Card Authentication Kit 11-4

Cassette

Loading Paper 3-4

Paper Size and Media Type 8-23

Cassette 1 2-2

Cassette 2 2-6

Cassette 3 2-6

Character Entry Method 11-8

Checking the Counter 2-43

Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner 7-15

Cleaning 10-2

Glass Platen 10-2

Machine 10-4

Slit Glass 10-3

Collate 6-9

Default 8-28

Color Selection 6-20

Default 8-28

Combine 6-14

Command Center RX 2-45

Common Settings 8-19

Date Setting 8-25

Default Screen 8-19

Display Brightness 8-19

Display Status/Log 8-31

Error Handling 8-25

Format SD Card 8-30

Function Defaults 8-28

Language 8-19

Low Toner Alert 8-31

Measurement 8-24

Optional Memory 8-30

Orig./Paper Set. 8-20

Preset Limit 8-24

RAM Disk Mode 8-30

Sound 8-19

Timer Setting 8-26

USB Keyboard Type 8-31

Configuration Tool 4-21

Accessing 4-21

Exiting 4-22

Settings 4-23

Connecting

LAN Cable 2-8

Power Cable 2-9

USB cable 2-9

Connection Method 2-7

Continuous Scan 6-18

Default 8-28, 8-29

Contrast 6-21, 8-38

Contrast (Copy) 8-38

Contrast (Send) 8-38

Conventions Used in This Guide xix

Copy 5-12

Copy Denst. Adj. 8-38

Copy Settings 8-32

Auto % Priority 8-32

AutoPaperSelect. 8-32

DP Read Action 8-32

Paper Selection 8-32

Select Key Setting 8-32

Copy Speed 11-22

Correct. Bk Line 8-38

Counting the Number of Pages Printed

Counter 2-43

Each Job Account 9-36

Print Accounting Report 9-37

Total Accounting 9-36

Unknown ID Job 9-39

Date Format 8-25

Date Setting

Date Format 8-25

Date/Time 8-25

Summer Time 8-25

Time Zone 8-25

Date/Time 8-25

Index-2

Date/Timer/Energy Saver

EnergySaver RecoveryLevel 8-32

Default Gateway 11-25

Settings 8-10

Default Screen 8-19

Density 6-18

Destination

Adding a Destination 3-18

Address Book 5-30

Checking and Editing 5-34

Confirmation Screen of Destinations 5-34

Destination Check 8-35

Multi Sending 5-27

One Touch Key 3-25

Search 5-31, 5-32

Sort 8-37

Destination Check

Check before Send 8-35

Check New Destination 8-35

Device 7-14

DHCP 11-25

Settings 8-10

DHCP (IPv6) 11-26

Settings 8-11

Display Brightness 8-19

Display Status/Log 8-31

Document Box

Job Box 4-10, 5-36

Removable Memory Box 5-36

Document Box Settings 8-36

Job Box 8-36

Polling Box 8-36

Select Key Setting 8-36

Sub Address Box 8-36

Document Processor 2-2

Loading Originals 5-3

Originals Not Supported by the Document

Processor 5-3

Originals Supported by the Document

Processor 5-3

Part Names 2-2

dpi 11-26

Duplex 6-9

Duplex (2-sided Original) 6-28

EcoPrint 6-18, 11-26

Default 8-28

Printer 8-33

Edit Destination 8-37

Address Book 3-18

Address Book Defaults 8-37

Contact 3-18

Group 3-21

One Touch Key 3-25

E-mail Settings 2-51

E-mail Subject/Body 6-28

Default 8-28

Emulation 11-26

Selection 8-33

Encrypted PDF 6-30

Energy Saver Recovery Level 8-32

Energy Saving Control Function 1-17

Energy Star (ENERGY STAR®) Program 1-17

Enhanced WSD 11-26

Protocol Settings 8-15

EnhancedWSD (SSL)

Protocol Settings 8-15

Entry

File Name 6-19

Subject 6-28

Environment 1-3

Err. Clear Timer 8-27

Error Handling 8-25

eSCL

Protocol Settings 8-15

eSCL over SSL

Protocol Settings 8-16

Expansion Memory 11-3

FAX 8-36

Feed Cover 2-4

File

Format 6-24

PDF 6-26

Separation 6-29

File Format 6-24

Default 8-29

File Name Entry 6-19

Default 8-28

File Separation 6-29

Default 8-29

Finishing Binding 6-10, 6-11

First Copy Time 11-22

First Print Time 11-23

Format SD Card 8-30

Front Cover Open Button 2-2

FTP 11-26

FTP (Clien)

Protocol Settings 8-12

FTP (Server)

Protocol Settings 8-12

FTP Encrypted TX 6-29

Function Defaults 8-28

Fuser Cover 2-4

Glossary 11-25

Google Cloud Print 4-9

GPL/LGPL 1-12

Grayscale 11-26

Group Authorization Set. 9-15

Group Authorization 9-15

Group Authorization Settings 9-15

Guest Authorization Set. 9-16

Guest Authorization 9-16

Guest Property 9-17

Guides Provided with the Machine xvi

Index-3

Help 11-26

Help Screen 2-14

High Compression PDF 6-25

Host Name 8-7

HTTP

Protocol Settings 8-14

HTTPS

Protocol Settings 8-14

I/F Block Set. 8-17

Image Quality 6-24

Inner Tray 2-2

Install

Macintosh 2-38

Software 2-30

Uninstalling 2-37

Windows 2-31

IP Address 11-26

Settings 8-10

IPP 11-26

Protocol Settings 8-13

IPP over SSL

Protocol Settings 8-14

IPSec

Settings 8-12

Job

Available Status 7-2

Canceling 7-13

Checking History 7-8

Checking Status 7-2

Displaying History Screen 7-9

Displaying Status Screens 7-2

Pause and Resumption 7-13

Sending the Log History 7-12

Job Accounting 9-23

Adding an Account 9-26

Counting the Number of Pages Printed 9-36

Default Setting 9-35

Deleting an Account 9-30

Editing an Account 9-29

Enabling Job Accounting 9-24

FAX Driver 9-34

Job Accounting Access 9-25

Logout 9-38

Overview of Job Accounting 9-23

Print Accounting Report 9-37

Printing 9-31

Restricting the Use of the Machine 9-28

TWAIN 9-32

WIA 9-33

Job Box 11-27

Deletion of Job Retention 8-36

Private Print Box 4-11

Proof and Hold Box 4-15

Quick Copy Box 4-14

Quick Copy Jobs 8-36

Specifying the Job Box from a Computer and Storing

the Job 4-10

Stored Job Box 4-12

Job Finish Notice 6-19

JPEG/TIFF Print 6-31

Default 8-29

Knopflerfish License 1-14

KPDL 11-27

Label 11-18

LAN Cable 2-7

Connecting 2-8

Language 8-19

LDAP

Protocol Settings 8-14

Legal Information 1-11

Legal Restriction on Copying 1-9

Legal Restriction on Scanning 1-9

Limited Use of This Product 1-10

LINE Connector 2-4

Loading Originals 5-2

Loading Originals in the Document Processor 5-3

Placing Originals on the Platen 5-2

Logout 2-16

Low Toner Alert 8-31

LPD

Protocol Settings 8-13

Maintenance Menu 10-11

Management 9-1

Manual Settings (IPv6) 8-11

Measurement 8-24

Media Type Setting 8-24

Mixed Size Originals 6-17

Monotype Imaging License Agreement 1-13

Mopria 4-9

MP Tray Settings 8-23

Multi Sending 5-27

Multipurpose Tray 2-4, 11-27

Paper Size and Media Type 8-23

NetBEUI 11-27

Protocol Settings 8-12

Network

Preparation 2-18

Settings 8-7

Index-4

Network Interface 2-7

Network Interface Connector 2-4

Notice 1-2

NW InterfaceSend 8-16

One Touch Key

Adding 3-25

Editing and Deleting 3-26

OpenSSL License 1-12

Operation Panel 2-2

Option

Card Authentication Kit 11-4

Expansion Memory 11-3

Overview 11-2

Paper Feeder (500-sheet) 11-4

SD/SDHC Memory Card 11-4

ThinPrint Option 11-4

USB Keyboard 11-5

Optional Applications 11-6

Optional Function 8-17

Optional Memory 8-30

Orig. Binding

Default 8-29

Orig./Paper Set. 8-20

Original

Auto Detect Original Size (DP) 8-20

Custom Orig. Size 8-20

Default Original Size 8-20

Settings 8-20

Size xx

Original Binding 6-10, 6-11, 6-28

Original eject table 2-2

Original Image 6-17

Default 8-28

Original Orientation 6-16

Default 8-28

Original Size 6-16

Original Size Indicator Plates 2-2

Original SSLeay License 1-12

Original Stopper 2-2

Original Table 2-2

Original Width Guides 2-2

Outline font 11-27

Panel Reset Timer 8-26

Paper

Checking the Remaining Amount of Paper 7-15

Appropriate Paper 11-14

Cassette 8-23

Custom Paper Size 8-21

Default Paper Source 8-22

Loading Cardstock 5-7

Loading Envelopes 5-7

Loading Paper 3-2

Loading Paper in the Cassettes 3-4

Media for Auto 8-21

Media Type Setting 8-21

Multipurpose Tray 8-23

Size and Media Type 11-13

Special Paper 11-17

Special Paper Action 8-22

Specifications 11-13

Weight 8-24

Paper Feed Mode 8-34

Paper Feeder (500-sheet) 11-4

Paper Jams 10-30

Cassette 1 10-31

Cassette 2 10-31

Cassette 3 (500-sheet x 2) 10-35

Document Processor 10-46

Inside of the Machine 10-38

Jam Location Indicators 10-30

Multipurpose Tray 10-37

Rear Cover 1 10-42

Paper Length Guide 2-4, 3-4

Paper Selection 6-8

Paper Stopper 2-2, 3-7

Paper Width Guides 2-4, 3-4

Part Names 2-2

PDF/A 6-24, 11-27

Ping 8-16

Platen 2-2

POP3 11-27

Protocol Settings 8-13

PostScript 11-27

Power Cable

Connecting 2-9

Power Management 1-17

Power Off 2-10

Power On 2-10

Power Switch 2-2

PPM 11-27

Precaution for Loading Paper 3-4

Precautions for Use 1-4

Preset Limit 8-24

Print Density 8-38

Print Settings 4-2, 4-8

Index-5

Printer 8-33

Auto Cassette Change 8-34

Copies 8-33

CR Action 8-33

Duplex 8-33

EcoPrint 8-33

Emulation Set. 8-33

Form Feed TimeOut 8-33

Job Name 8-34

LF Action 8-33

MP Tray Priority 8-34

Orientation 8-33

Override A4/Letter 8-33

Paper Feed Mode 8-34

Print setting 4-2

User Name 8-34

Wide A4 8-33

Printer Driver 11-27

Help 4-3

Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB

Memory 5-37

Printing from PC 4-4

Printing Speed 11-23

Priority Override 6-19

Product Library xvii

Program 5-8

Deleting 5-10

Overwriting 5-10

Recalling 5-9

Registering 5-8

RA (Stateless) 11-27

RA(Stateless)

Settings 8-11

RAM Disk 11-28

RAM Disk Mode 8-30

Raw

Protocol Settings 8-13

Rear Cover 1 2-3

Recycled Paper 11-20

Regarding Trade Names 1-11

Regular Maintenance 10-2

Toner Container Replacement 10-7

Report 8-5

Admin Report Settings 8-6

Job Log History 8-6

Report Print 8-5

Result Report Settings 8-6

Report Print

Font List 8-5

Menu Map 8-5

Status Page 8-5

Resolution 6-22, 11-22, 11-23

Resource Saving - Paper 1-17

Responding to Messages 10-18

Restart 8-17

Restart Network 8-16

Safety Conventions in This Guide 1-2

Saving Documents to USB Memory 5-39

Scan Resolution 6-22

Default 8-28

SD Card 11-4

Format 8-30

SD/SDHC Memory Card 11-4

Secure Settings 8-16

Security Level 8-17

Security Precautions when Using Wireless LAN 1-9

Select Key Setting 8-32, 8-35, 8-36

Send and Forward 8-35

Send as E-mail 5-14

Send Result 8-6

Send Settings 8-35

Default Screen 8-35

Destination Check 8-35

New Destination Entry 8-35

Recall Destination 8-35

Select Key Setting 8-35

Send and Forward 8-35

Send to Folder (FTP) 5-14

Send to Folder (SMB) 5-14

Send/Box Density 8-38

Sending 5-14

Preparation for Sending a Document to a PC 3-8

Sending Size 6-23

Service Setting 8-38

Setting Date and Time 2-17

Sharpness 6-20

Skip Blank Page 6-22

Sleep 2-26

Sleep Level 2-28, 8-26

Sleep Rules 2-27, 8-26

Sleep Timer 8-26

Slit Glass 2-2

SMB

Protocol Settings 8-13

SMTP 11-28

Protocol Settings 8-13

SNMPv1/v2c

Protocol Settings 8-13

SNMPv3

Protocol Settings 8-12

Solving Malfunctions 10-12

Sound 8-19

Specifications 11-21

Copy Functions 11-22

Document Processor 11-24

Machine 11-21

Paper Feeder (500-sheet) 11-24

Printer Functions 11-23

Scanner Functions 11-23

SSL 8-16

Status Page 11-28

Status/Job Cancel 7-1

Storing Size 6-30

Subject/Body

Default 8-28

Index-6

Subnet Mask 11-28

Settings 8-10

Supplies

Checking the Remaining Amount 7-15

Symbols 1-2

System Menu 8-2

Adjustment/Maintenance 8-38

Common Settings 8-19

Copy 8-32

Document Box 8-36

Edit Destination 8-37

FAX 8-36

Operation Method 8-2

Printer 8-33

Report 8-5

Send 8-35

System/Network 8-7

User Login/Job Accounting 8-18

User Property 8-18, 9-10

System/Network 8-7

I/F Block Set. 8-17

Network Setting 8-7

NW InterfaceSend 8-16

Optional Function 8-17

Restart 8-17

Security Level 8-17

TCP/IP 11-28

Settings 8-10, 8-11

TCP/IP (IPv4)

Settings 2-18, 8-10

TCP/IP (IPv6) 11-26

Settings 8-11

TEL Connector 2-4

Thin Print over SSL

Protocol Settings 8-14

ThinPrint

Protocol Settings 8-14

ThinPrint Option 11-4

Time Zone 8-25

Timer Setting

Auto Error Clear 8-27

Auto Panel Reset 8-26

Err. Clear Timer 8-27

PanelReset Timer 8-26

Ping Timeout 8-27

Sleep Level 8-26

Sleep Rules 8-26

Sleep Timer 8-26

Unusable Time 8-27

Toner Container Replacement 10-7

Tray Extension 2-4

Troubleshooting 10-12

TWAIN 11-28

Setting TWAIN Driver 2-40

USB 11-28

USB Cable

Connecting 2-9

USB Interface 2-7

USB Interface Connector 2-4

USB Keyboard 11-5

USB Keyboard Type 8-31

USB Memory

Printing 5-37

Remove 5-40

Save 5-39

USB Memory Slot 2-4

User Login Administration 9-2

Adding a User 9-6

Changing User Properties 9-8

Enabling User Login Administration 9-3

FAX Driver 9-14

Group Authorization Settings 9-15

Guest Authorization Set. 9-16

ID Card Settings 9-20

Logout 2-16

Obtain NW User Property 9-19

Overview of User Login Administration 9-2

Printing 9-11

TWAIN 9-12

User Account Lockout Setting 9-5

WIA 9-13

User Login/Job Accounting 8-18

Job Accounting 9-23

Unknown ID Job 9-39

User Login 9-2

User Property 8-18

WIA 11-29

Setting WIA Driver 2-42

Wi-Fi

Settings 2-20, 8-8

Wi-Fi Direct

Settings 2-24, 8-7

Wireless Connection 1-9

Wireless Network

Settings 2-20

WPS 11-29

WSD Scan 5-22

WSD-PRINT

Protocol Settings 8-15

WSD-SCAN

Protocol Settings 8-15

XPS Fit to Page 6-31

XPS FitTo Page

Default 8-29

Zoom 6-12

Default 8-28

KYOCERA Document Solutions America, Inc.

Headquarters

225 Sand Road,

Fairfield, New Jersey 07004-0008, USA

Phone: +1-973-808-8444

Fax: +1-973-882-6000

Latin America

8240 NW 52nd Terrace Dawson Building, Suite 100

Miami, Florida 33166, USA

Phone: +1-305-421-6640

Fax: +1-305-421-6666

KYOCERA Document Solutions Canada

, Ltd.

6120 Kestrel Rd., Mississauga, ON L5T 1S8,

Canada

Phone: +1-905-670-4425

Fax: +1-905-670-8116

KYOCERA Document Solutions

Mexico, S.A. de C.V.

Calle Arquimedes No. 130, 4 Piso, Colonia Polanco

Chapultepec, Delegacion Miguel Hidalgo,

Distrito Federal, C.P. 11560, México

Phone: +52-555-383-2741

Fax: +52-555-383-7804

KYOCERA Document Solutions Brazil, Ltda.

Alameda África, 545, Pólo Empresarial Consbrás,

Tamboré, Santana de Parnaíba, State of São Paulo, CEP

06543-306, Brazil

Phone: +55-11-2424-5353

Fax: +55-11-2424-5304

KYOCERA Document Solutions Chile SpA

Jose Ananias 505, Macul. Santiago, Chile

Phone: +562-2350-7000

Fax: +562-2350-7150

KYOCERA Document Solutions

Australia Pty. Ltd.

Level 3, 6-10 Talavera Road North Ryde N.S.W, 2113,

Australia

Phone: +61-2-9888-9999

Fax: +61-2-9888-9588

KYOCERA Document Solutions

New Zealand Ltd.

Ground Floor, 19 Byron Avenue, Takapuna, Auckland,

New Zealand

Phone: +64-9-415-4517

Fax: +64-9-415-4597

KYOCERA Document Solutions Asia Limited

Unit 3 & 5, 16/F.,Mita Centre, 552-566, Castle Peak Road

Tsuen Wan, New Territories, Hong Kong

Phone: +852-2496-5678

Fax: +852-2610-2063

KYOCERA Document Solutions

(China) Corporation

8F, No. 288 Nanjing Road West, Huangpu District,

Shanghai,200003, China

Phone: +86-21-5301-1777

Fax: +86-21-5302-8300

KYOCERA Document Solutions

(Thailand) Corp., Ltd.

335 Ratchadapisek Road, Wongsawang, Bangsue,

Bangkok 10800,

Thailand

Phone: +66-2-586-0333

Fax: +66-2-586-0278

KYOCERA Document Solutions

Singapore Pte. Ltd.

12 Tai Seng Street #04-01A,

Luxasia Building, Singapore 534118

Phone: +65-6741-8733

Fax: +65-6748-3788

KYOCERA Document Solutions

Hong Kong Limited

Unit 1,2,4,6,8 & 10, 16/F.,Mita Centre, 552-566, Castle

Peak Road Tsuen Wan, New Territories, Hong Kong

Phone: +852-3582-4000

Fax: +852-3185-1399

KYOCERA Document Solutions

Taiwan Corporation

6F., No.37, Sec. 3, Minquan E. Rd.,

Zhongshan Dist., Taipei 104, Taiwan R.O.C.

Phone: +886-2-2507-6709

Fax: +886-2-2507-8432

KYOCERA Document Solutions Korea Co., Ltd.

#3F Daewoo Foundation Bldg 18, Toegye-ro, Jung-gu,

Seoul, Korea

Phone: +822-6933-4050

Fax: +822-747-0084

KYOCERA Document Solutions

India Private Limited

Second Floor, Centrum Plaza, Golf Course Road,

Sector-53, Gurgaon, Haryana 122002, India

Phone: +91-0124-4671000

Fax: +91-0124-4671001

KYOCERA Document Solutions Europe B.V.

Bloemlaan 4, 2132 NP Hoofddorp,

The Netherlands

Phone: +31-20-654-0000

Fax: +31-20-653-1256

KYOCERA Document Solutions Nederland B.V.

Beechavenue 25, 1119 RA Schiphol-Rijk,

The Netherlands

Phone: +31-20-5877200

Fax: +31-20-5877260

KYOCERA Document Solutions (U.K.) Limited

Eldon Court, 75-77 London Road,

Reading, Berkshire RG1 5BS,

United Kingdom

Phone: +44-118-931-1500

Fax: +44-118-931-1108

KYOCERA Document Solutions Italia S.p.A.

Via Monfalcone 15, 20132, Milano, Italy,

Phone: +39-02-921791

Fax: +39-02-92179-600

KYOCERA Document Solutions Belgium N.V.

Sint-Martinusweg 199-201 1930 Zaventem,

Belgium

Phone: +32-2-7209270

Fax: +32-2-7208748

KYOCERA Document Solutions France S.A.S.

Espace Technologique de St Aubin

Route de IOrme 91195 Gif-sur-Yvette CEDEX,

France

Phone: +33-1-69852600

Fax: +33-1-69853409

KYOCERA Document Solutions Espana, S.A.

Edificio Kyocera, Avda. de Manacor No.2,

28290 Las Matas (Madrid), Spain

Phone: +34-91-6318392

Fax: +34-91-6318219

KYOCERA Document Solutions Finland Oy

Atomitie 5C, 00370 Helsinki,

Finland

Phone: +358-9-47805200

Fax: +358-9-47805390

KYOCERA Document Solutions

Europe B.V., Amsterdam (NL) Zürich Branch

Hohlstrasse 614, 8048 Zürich,

Switzerland

Phone: +41-44-9084949

Fax: +41-44-9084950

KYOCERA Bilgitas Document Solutions

Turkey A.S.

Gülbahar Mahallesi Otello Kamil Sk. No:6 Mecidiyeköy

34394 ili stanbul, Turkey

Phone: +90-212-356-7000

Fax: +90-212-356-6725

is a trademark of KYOCERA Corporation

KYOCERA Document Solutions

Deutschland GmbH

Otto-Hahn-Strasse 12, 40670 Meerbusch,

Germany

Phone: +49-2159-9180

Fax: +49-2159-918100

KYOCERA Document Solutions Austria GmbH

Altmannsdorferstraße 91, Stiege 1, 2. OG, Top 1, 1120,

Wien, Austria

Phone: +43-1-863380

Fax: +43-1-86338-400

KYOCERA Document Solutions Nordic AB

Esbogatan 16B 164 75 Kista, Sweden

Phone: +46-8-546-550-00

Fax: +46-8-546-550-10

KYOCERA Document Solutions Norge Nuf

Olaf Helsetsv. 6, 0619 Oslo, Norway

Phone: +47-22-62-73-00

Fax: +47-22-62-72-00

KYOCERA Document Solutions Danmark A/S

Ejby Industrivej 60, DK-2600 Glostrup,

Denmark

Phone: +45-70223880

Fax: +45-45765850

KYOCERA Document Solutions Portugal Lda.

Rua do Centro Cultural, 41 (Alvalade) 1700-106 Lisboa,

Portugal

Phone: +351-21-843-6780

Fax: +351-21-849-3312

KYOCERA Document Solutions

South Africa (Pty) Ltd.

KYOCERA House, Hertford Office Park,

90 Bekker Road (Cnr. Allandale), Midrand, South Africa

Phone: +27-11-540-2600

Fax: +27-11-466-3050

KYOCERA Document Solutions Russia LLC.

Building 2, 51/4, Schepkina St., 129110, Moscow,

Russia

Phone: +7(495)741-0004

Fax: +7(495)741-0018

KYOCERA Document Solutions Middle East

Dubai Internet City, Bldg. 17,

Office 157 P.O. Box 500817, Dubai,

United Arab Emirates

Phone: +971-04-433-0412

KYOCERA Document Solutions Inc.

2-28, 1-chome, Tamatsukuri, Chuo-ku

Osaka 540-8585, Japan

Phone: +81-6-6764-3555

http://www.kyoceradocumentsolutions.com

2017.2

2S4KDEN003